JP2019048230A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of smoothly rotating a moving member at a position where a pin member, reciprocally moving in a guide portion, performs a direction change.SOLUTION: At a position where a moving direction of a projection pin 792 changes the direction, a fourth external rib 715 is configured to have a cut out area 711d and therefore a tip part support amount of a right presentation member 760R is not supported. Consequently, such the right presentation member 760R can be smoothly rotated around a left support shaft 717L. In other words, when the projection pin 792 performs a direction change of the moving direction, the behavior of the right presentation member 760R becomes unstable, but when the behavior becomes unstable, support from the fourth external rib 715 is not given. Accordingly, the movable range of the right presentation member 760R can be secured. In this way, it is possible to suppress inhibition of the rotation of the right presentation member 760R by the fourth external rib 715.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a rotary body rotated about a first axis, a pin member which protrudes from the rotary body and is eccentrically positioned on the first axis, and a guide portion for guiding the pin member And a driving unit for applying a driving force to the rotating body, wherein the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the driving force of the driving unit. There is a gaming machine in which the pin member is reciprocated in the guide portion and the movable body is rotated about the second axis.

JP 2004-350919 A

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the movement of the moving member becomes unstable at the position where the pin member which reciprocates the guide moves, and it is difficult to smoothly rotate the moving member. The

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of smoothly rotating a moving member at a position where a pin member reciprocating a guide moves. The purpose is

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a rotating body rotated about a first axis, and a pin member projecting from the rotating body and eccentrically positioned on the first axis. A moving member having a guide portion for guiding the pin member and rotating around a second axis, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the rotating body, the rotating body by the driving force of the driving means Is rotated about the first axis, the pin member is reciprocated in the guide portion, and the movable body is rotated about the second axis, and a movement locus of the movable member Supporting member for supporting the moving member, the supporting amount of the moving member by the supporting member is reduced at a position where the direction of movement of the pin member reciprocating the guide portion changes direction .

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the support member is formed in a rib shape extending along the movement trajectory of the moving member, and reciprocates the guide portion. The separation member is provided corresponding to the position in which the movement direction of the pin member moves, and at least the height of which is reduced.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the support member has a plurality of rows formed along a movement trajectory of the moving member, and a first axis of the plurality of rows of support members is formed. The parting area is formed in the support member at a position farthest from the bottom.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, at the position where the moving direction of the pin member changes direction, the amount of support of the moving member by the support member is reduced, so the moving member is moved smoothly (with the first axis as the center). Can be rotated). That is, when the pin member changes the direction of movement, the behavior of the moving member becomes unstable. When this behavior becomes unstable, the amount of support of the support member is reduced. The movable range of the support member can be secured, and the movement of the movable member (rotation around the first axis) can be prevented from being hindered by the support member. Thus, the moving member can be moved smoothly.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the support member is formed in a rib shape extending along the movement trajectory of the moving member, so that resistance is achieved. The movement member can be moved smoothly by suppressing the movement. In this case, the support member is provided with a divided area in which at least the height is lowered at a position where the direction of movement of the pin member that reciprocates the guide portion is changed. The movable range can be secured. Therefore, when the pin member changes the moving direction and the behavior of the moving member becomes unstable, it is possible to avoid that the movement of the moving member (rotation around the first axis) is inhibited by the support member. Thus, the moving member can be moved smoothly.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the supporting member is formed in a plurality of rows along the movement trajectory of the moving member, and among the plurality of rows of supporting members Since the divided area is formed in the support member at a position farthest from the first axis, the divided area can be passed to the more distal end side (the side opposite to the first axis) of the moving member. Therefore, the action by the divided area can be more effectively exhibited.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 1st unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 1st base body and a 1st cover body. (A) is a partial expanded sectional view of the 1st base body in the Xa-Xa line of FIG. 9, (b) is a sectional view of the 1st cover body in the Xb-Xb line of FIG. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 1st presentation member. (A) is a front view of a 1st presentation member, (b) is a side view of the 1st presentation member in the arrow XIIb direction view of Fig.12 (a). (A) is a rear view of a 1st presentation member, (b) and (c) is a partial expanded rear view of the 1st presentation member in the XIIIb part of Fig.13 (a). (A) is a front view of the first unit in a state in which the first effect member is disposed in the raised position, and (b) is a front view of the first unit in a state in which the first effect member is disposed in the lowered position FIG. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd unit. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of a 2nd cover body, (b) is a partially expanded sectional view of the 2nd cover body in the XVIb-XVIb line of Fig.16 (a). (A) is a front view of a support member, (b) is a rear view of a support member, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the support member taken along line XVIIc-XVIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the positional relationship of a support wall, a back control, and a front control rib typically. (A) is a front view of a 1st unit and a 2nd unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit and 2nd unit in the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). It is a schematic diagram of the 1st unit and 2nd unit in a downward view. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 3rd unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a 3rd unit. It is a front perspective view of the 4th unit. It is a front perspective view of a 4th case. It is a partial enlarged front view of the 4th case which expanded a drive part disposition concave part. It is a partially expanded front perspective view of the 4th case which partially expanded drive part arrangement | positioning recessed part. It is a rear perspective view of the right gear member. (A) is a rear view of a right gear member, (b) is sectional drawing of the right gear member in the XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb line | wire of Fig.28 (a). FIG. 18 is a partially enlarged front view of a fourth case in which a region where the fourth inner rib and the fourth outer rib are formed is partially enlarged. It is a front perspective view of a 4th effect member. (A) is a front view of the left effect member, (b) is a side view of the left effect member in the direction of arrow XXXIb in FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is in FIG. 31 (b) It is a partially expanded rear view of the left effect member in arrow XXXIc direction view. (A) is a front view of the right effect member, (b) is a side view of the right effect member in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is in FIG. 32 (b) It is a partial expansion rear view of the right production member in arrow XXXIIc direction view. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the 4th unit in the state to which the right production member was arrange | positioned in the raising position, (b) is a partial enlargement schematic diagram of the 4th unit in the XXXIIIb part of Fig.33 (a). is there. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the 4th unit in the state by which the right production member was arranged between the rise position and the fall position, (b) is the 4th unit in the XXXIVb part of Fig.34 (a). FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the 4th unit in the state where the right effect member was arranged at the descent position, (b) is a partial enlarged schematic diagram of the 4th unit in the XXXVb part of FIG. is there. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 1st unit, a 3rd unit, and a 4th unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 2nd unit, a 3rd unit, and a 4th unit. FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged front view of a fourth case in which a drive unit disposition concave portion in the second embodiment is partially enlarged. It is a partially expanded front schematic diagram of the drive part arrangement recessed part which partially expanded the gear member vicinity. (A) is a front view of a left presentation member, (b) is a side view of the left presentation member in the arrow XLb direction view of Fig.40 (a). (A) is a front view of a right production member, (b) is a side view of the right production member in the arrow XLIb direction view of Fig.41 (a). (A) is a front schematic diagram of the left effect member and the right effect member in the state of being disposed at the rising position, and (b) is the left effect member in the state of being disposed between the raising position and the lowering position and It is a front schematic diagram of the right effect member. It is a front schematic diagram of the left effect member and the right effect member in the state where it is arranged at the lowered position. FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged front view of a fourth case in which a drive unit disposition concave portion in the third embodiment is partially enlarged. It is a partially expanded front perspective view of the 4th case which partially expanded drive part arrangement | positioning recessed part. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the right gear member and drive part arrangement | positioning recessed part in the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. It is a front disassembled perspective view of the 1st base body and the 1st cover body in a 4th embodiment. (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged schematic view of a guide groove and a first effect member. It is a front disassembled perspective view of the 1st base body and the 1st cover body in a 5th embodiment. (A) to (d) is a partially enlarged schematic view of a guide groove and a first effect member. It is a front schematic diagram of the 4th unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of a 4th unit. It is a rear perspective view of the right gear member as a modification. It is a rear perspective view of the right gear member as a modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61, 62, The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. It is attached to the back side of reference). The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is being fixed by a wood screw etc. from the front side of 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by means of a resin arc member (not shown) formed by providing two rails 61, 62 and an arc connecting the rails on the inner side. The region is a substantially circular area (a region where a winning opening etc. is disposed and a shot ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. Further, in the state of the pachinko machine 10, a resin formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. An arc member made of a metal is abutted against and fixed to the base plate 60.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Bb.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady state or not or in a short time or in a normal state by a lighted state, or indicates by a lighted state whether or not it is fluctuating. It indicates whether the symbol corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or the outlier symbol is displayed by the lighting state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37Aa and 37Ba are comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, and may suggest the various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are entered. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second entry ball opening It refers to the state of the game where it is easy for the ball to enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only is the probability of hitting the second symbol up, but also the time for which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is open is changed, which is longer than normal. Is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (opened state), the ball enters the second entrance 640 compared to the case where the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to ball. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite change or time, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time during a definite change or during a short time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is open during the time and one hit when the electric symbol 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during definite period of time or during a short time, the time when the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened or the number of times the motorized symbol 640a is opened at one time is not the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed to be increased relative to the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (start winning) as a trigger while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. 3 With the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of symbols, and LEDs that show the second symbol in a variable display triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. While the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) by the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display thereof A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 640 a of the second entrance 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite variation and during time saving.

  In addition, the second ball exit 640 during positive or negative time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the motorized symbol 640a per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board is configured to be passable. . When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown) Is displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display, as well as the variable display of the second symbol, is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. In addition, since the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first ball entrance 64 in a front view, a second ball entrance 640 where a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball is hit. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is ball entering the second entrance 640 is five. May be

  The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The motorized accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the motorized accessory 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and time.

  Here, in the case where the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the probability of becoming a big hit is in the low probability state or the high probability state It is the same. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is that the ball entered the first entrance 64 in the case where the ball entered the second entrance 640 It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can enter the ball at all times.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory is entered. Aim the ball 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and entering the first entrance 64 has many chances for a big hit lottery It is advantageous for the player to obtain and aim to be a big hit.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite change or time, and it is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Since it is in the state, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second entrance 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and it passes through the through gate 67 It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by entering the second entrance ball port 640 while opening the object.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right of the first ball entrance 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is made after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B is lighted to become a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. Both have and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LEDs 37Aa and LED 37Ba corresponding to the large hit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined time, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a special gaming state. Further, the specific winning hole 65a is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, two) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first entrance 64, for example, a variable display unit It may be the left of 80.

  Sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking certificates and identification labels etc. are provided in the central part and right corner of the lower side of the game board 13, and the test cards etc. stuck on the sticking space K1 It can be viewed through the small windows 35 (see FIG. 1) of the frame 14.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided through the out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Do.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a front side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected to the side, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. Do.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. The other device 228 includes a first drive motor 470, a second drive motor, a third drive motor 670, and a fourth drive motor.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the detailed configuration of the operation unit 300 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 6 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 300 is disposed to face the first unit 400 for sliding the first effect member 460 and the side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the first unit 400. And the second unit 500 for rotating the second effect member 560, and a direction in which the pair of third effect members 660 are disposed close to each other on the back side of the first unit 400 and the second unit 500. And a fourth unit 700 disposed on the back side of the third unit 600 and rotating the pair of fourth effect members 760 in directions approaching and separating from each other.

  The fourth unit 700 includes a box-shaped fourth case 710 whose one side (the front side in FIGS. 5 and 6) is open, and in the internal space of the fourth case 710, a first unit 400 and a second unit. 500 and a third unit 600 are accommodated respectively.

  The fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 711a at the center. The central opening 711a is formed in a rectangular shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the display content can be visually recognized). The pair of fourth effect members 760 has a lowered position (see FIG. 23) in which the mating surfaces are in contact with each other in the front of the opening 711a (see FIG. 5) and an elevated position (FIG. 5 and FIG. 6) and is rotated.

  The third unit 600 includes a third case 610 that forms the outer shape of the third unit 600. The third effect member 660 and the like are accommodated (disposed) in the third case 610. The third case 610 has an outer shape substantially equal to the inner shape (the space formed by the inner wall surface of the wall portion 712) of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, and has an opening 711a at the center. By forming the opening 621 corresponding to the outer shape, it is formed in a frame shape having a rectangular shape in front view. The third unit 600 is housed in the internal space of the fourth unit 700 in a posture in which the back surface of the third case 610 (third base body 620) is parallel to the bottom surface of the fourth case 710 (front of the bottom plate 711). Will be installed.

  A plurality of pedestals 711e are erected from the bottom surface of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, and a plurality of fastening portions formed on the outer edge of the third case 610 of the third unit 600 on the respective pedestals 711e The third unit 600 is disposed (fixed) in the fourth unit 700 by fastening and fixing the respective 624. That is, the third unit 600 (third case 610) is raised from the bottom surface of the fourth case 710 by the height at which the pedestal 711e is provided, and the space formed by the increase (fourth case) The space between opposing surfaces between the bottom surface 710 (the front of the bottom plate 711) and the back surface of the third case 610 is a space for the fourth effect member 760 to rotate.

  The first unit 400 and the second unit 500 are the front side (the front side of the sheet in FIGS. 5 and 6) of the third unit 600 and one of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700 (the left side in FIGS. ) And the wall 712 of the other (right side in FIGS. 5 and 6). That is, the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 are disposed to be opposite to each other across the openings 621 and 711 a of the third case 610 and the fourth case 710.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the first unit 400, the first effect member 460 is formed to project on the front side (the front side in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6), and the tip end side (tip portion 464 of the first effect member 460). ) Are disposed on the front side of the second unit 500. Here, the first unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 14.

  FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the first unit 400, and FIG. 8 is a front exploded perspective view of the first unit 400. 7 and 8, the state in which the first effect member 460 is disposed at the raised position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the first unit 400 includes a first case 410, a first effect member 460 whose proximal end is slidably supported by the first case 410, and a first effect member A first drive motor 470 is mainly provided to generate a driving force for sliding the slide 460.

  The first case 410 includes a box-shaped first base body 420 open on one side and a first cover body fastened and fixed to one side of the first base body 420 to close an open portion of the first base body 420. 430, a front side member 440 which is overlapped on the front side of the first cover body 430 and fastened and fixed, and a decorative connection plate 450 which is overlapped and fastened on the front side of the front side member 440.

  A substrate (not shown) is accommodated inside the front side member 440 (while facing the front side of the first cover body 430), and a plurality of light emitting means (in the present embodiment) is accommodated on the front side of the substrate. , LEDs) are scattered over the entire surface. The front side member 440 and the decorative connection plate 450 are formed of a light transmissive resin material, and the light emission of the LED is visible from the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIGS. 7 and 8). In the front side member 440, rectangular openings in a front view are formed at a plurality of places, and the light emitting means are respectively exposed at the plurality of openings, so that the light emitting means can be directly viewed from the outside.

  The front side member 440 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the first cover body 430 in a front view, and is overlapped at a position where the outer edges thereof coincide with each other. It is formed to have a slightly smaller outer shape as viewed, and a part of the decorative connection plate 450 is overlapped at a position where it protrudes (projects upward) from the outer edge of the front side member 440 (upper side in FIGS. 7 and 8).

  A portion of the decorative connection plate 450 protruding upward from the outer edge of the front side member 440 (upper side in FIG. 7) is a fastening hole 712 a of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700 by a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 451. (See FIG. 23). Thereby, even when the third unit 600 and the first unit 400 are accommodated in the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700 in a stacked state, the rigidity as a whole is secured, and each unit 400, It is possible to suppress wobble when the effect members 460 and 660 of 600 operate.

  In an internal space formed by the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430, a first drive for applying a driving force to the base end side (base 461) of the first effect member 460 and the first effect member 460 A motor 470 is provided. Here, the detailed configuration of the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.

  FIG. 9 is a front exploded perspective view of the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430. As shown in FIG. FIG. 10A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the first base body 420 taken along line Xa-Xa in FIG. 9, and FIG. 10B is a cross section taken along line Xb-Xb in FIG. FIG. Note that FIG. 9 shows a state in which the first drive motor 470 and the drive gear 472, the pinion gear 480, and the slide position detection sensor S are attached to the first base body 420. 10A, the first base body 420 is stacked on the third case 610 of the third unit 600 (see FIG. 5) to facilitate understanding, and the first effect member 460 and the slide position detection A state in which the electrical wiring S of the sensor S is wired is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first base body 420 is formed in a plate shape, and a bottom plate 421 which forms the bottom surface of the first base body 420, a wall 422 erected from the bottom plate 421, and its wall A guide wall 423 erected from the bottom plate 421 at the same vertical height as the portion 422, and a guide groove formed in the bottom plate 421 as an oval shaped hole extending in parallel with the extending direction of the guide wall 423 And 424.

  The bottom plate 421 is formed in a front view trapezoid shape in which the upper base is in the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 9), and the wall portion 422 is formed in a vertically elongated front view parallelogram shape. In the wall portion 422, notches 422a, 422b, and 422c are respectively recessed on opposite sides of the trapezoidal shape in which the length of the two opposite sides is increased. The notch 422a is a notch for securing the movement space of the first effect member 460, and is formed in an area including the movement locus (see FIG. 14) of the first effect member 460 (the base 461). The cutouts 422 b and the cutouts 422 c are cutouts for passing (wrapping) the electrical wiring S of the first effect member 460 and the slide position detection sensor S.

  The guide wall 423 and the guide groove 424 are portions for guiding the movement of the first effect member 460 (in one direction). The guide wall 423 extends in parallel with a part of the wall 422 (the right side in FIG. 9) at a predetermined distance, and the space between the part of the wall 422 and the guide wall 423 is A rack portion 465 (see FIG. 8) of the one effect member 460 is disposed. The guide groove 424 is extended in parallel with the guide wall 423, and a collar C (see FIGS. 8 and 12) attached to the base 461 of the first effect member 460 is inserted.

  The bottom plate 421 is a side (right side in FIG. 9) of the guide wall 423 and the guide groove 424, and a slide surface 421a is formed between the both portions 423, 424 and the wall portion 422 (and the notch portion 422a). Prepare. The slide surface 421 a is a portion for slidably supporting the bottom surfaces of the base 461 and the rack portion 465 of the first effect member 460, and is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pinion gear 480.

  In the guide groove 424, a wall is erected toward the front along the opening edge, and the area of the inner wall surface of the guide groove 424 is enlarged. Thereby, when guiding the slide movement of the first effect member 460, the surface pressure acting from the collar C (see FIGS. 11 and 12) can be reduced, and the durability can be improved, and the guiding effect can be improved. As a certainty, speeding up of the slide movement of the first effect member 460 can be enabled.

  In addition, the wall erected along the opening edge of the guide groove 424 is formed to have the same erecting height as the wall 422 and the guide wall 423. Therefore, when the first effect member 460 is inclined in the front-rear direction (the front direction or the back direction in FIG. 9) or in the plane of the slide movement, the color of the base 461 of the first effect member 460 is Both C and the rack 465 can be simultaneously supported by both of the wall erected along the opening edge of the guide groove 424 and the wall 422 or the guide wall 423. Thereby, the inclination of the first effect member 460 can be suppressed, and the speeding up of the slide movement can be made possible.

  The facing distance between a part of the wall 422 (right side in FIG. 9) and the guide wall 423 is slightly larger than the width of the rack 465, and a gap is formed between the wall 422 or the guide wall 423 and the rack 465 Be done. Similarly, the groove width (the facing distance of the inner wall surfaces) of the guide groove 424 is slightly larger than the diameter of the collar C (main body portion), and the inner wall surface of the guide groove 424 and the outer peripheral surface of the collar C (main body portion) A gap is formed between them. Thereby, it is possible not only to absorb the dimensional tolerance of each part and to improve the assemblability, but as described later, smooth the initial operation when the movement of the first effect member 460 is started (that is, While suppressing the biting, it is possible to speed up the sliding movement, and the surface pressure of the tooth surface of the rack portion 465 (rack gear 465 b) and the pinion gear 480 can be made appropriate to suppress the wear of the tooth surface .

  A drive gear 472 and a pinion gear 480 engaged with the drive gear 472 are disposed between the guide wall 423 and the guide groove 424. The drive gear 472 is fixed to the drive shaft 471 of the first drive motor 470, and the pinion gear 480 is disposed at a position where it can mesh with the rack gear 465b in the rack portion 465 of the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 14). .

  A slide position detection sensor S is disposed on the side of the guide groove 424. The slide position detection sensor S is an optical sensor provided with a light emitting portion Sa and a light receiving portion Sb, and a space between the light emitting portion Sa and the light receiving portion Sb is a plate to be detected 461b in the base 461 of the first effect member 460 11) detects the slide position of the first effect member 460 (whether or not it is positioned at the rising position) based on the presence or absence of the detection target plate 461b.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10B, the first cover body 430 has an outer shape corresponding to the formation region of the wall portion 422 of the first base body 420 in a front view (that is, a vertically elongated parallelogram shape) A rack guide recess 431 and a collar guide recess 432 are formed in the back of the first cover body 430.

  The rack guide recess 431 and the color guide recess 432 are linearly extended in order to guide the movement of the first effect member 460 (in one direction), and the rack guide recess 431 is a first effect member. The guide rib 465c (see FIG. 11) of the rack portion 465 of 460 and the collar C (main portion, see FIG. 11) of the base 461 of the first effect member 460 are inserted into the collar guide recess 432, respectively.

  In the assembled state in which the first cover body 430 is fastened and fixed to the first base body 420, the rack guide recess 431 faces the slide surface 421a of the first base body 420 (ie, the guide rib 465c of the rack portion 465). The collar guide recesses 432 are respectively formed facing the guide grooves 424 of the first base body 420).

  The direction of movement of the first effect member 460 is one direction by the guiding effect of the rack guide recess 431 and the collar guide recess 432 of the first cover body 430 and the guide wall 423 and the guide groove 424 of the first base body 420 The extending direction of the recess 431 and the collar guide recess 432, the guide wall 423 and the guide groove 424) is restricted (see FIG. 14).

  In the thickness dimension of the first cover body 430 (vertical dimension in FIG. 10B), as shown in FIG. 10B, the thickness dimension of the formation region of the rack guide concave portion 431 is different from that in the other region (color guide It is larger (thicker) than the thickness dimension of the region opposite to the rack guide concave portion 431 with respect to the concave portion 431 (left side in FIG. 10B). In the present embodiment, along the outer edge of the first cover body 430 (right end in FIG. 10B) and the opening edge of the collar guide groove 432 (the opening edge near the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 8)) The thickness dimension is increased in the region up to the imaginary straight line.

  As described above, by enlarging only the thickness dimension of the range including the formation region of the rack guiding concave portion 431, in the first cover body 430, only the thickness dimension of the region where the load acting from the first effect member 460 is large is partially Can be enlarged. Thus, while the durability of the first cover body 430 is improved, it is possible to suppress the thickness dimension of the entire first cover body 430 from becoming unnecessarily large, thereby achieving weight reduction and material cost reduction. it can.

  Further, in this manner, the thickness dimension of the first cover body 430 is increased in the formation region of the rack guide recess 431 in which the groove width (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 10B) is smaller than the collar guide recess 432. Thus, the rack guide recess 431 can be recessed without projecting to the front surface (upper side surface in FIG. 10B) of the first cover body 430 like the collar guide recess 432. By making the thickness of the mold uniform, moldability at the time of injection molding using a resin mold can be improved.

  In the collar guide recess 432, a wall is erected along the opening edge, and the area of the inner wall surface of the collar guide recess 432 is enlarged. The erected end of the wall is flush with the portion where the thickness dimension is increased as described above. Thereby, when guiding the slide movement of the first effect member 460, the surface pressure acting from the collar C (see FIGS. 11 and 12) can be reduced, and the durability can be improved, and the guiding effect can be improved. As a certainty, speeding up of the slide movement of the first effect member 460 can be enabled.

  Further, as in the case of the first base body 420 described above, the groove width of the rack guide recess 431 (the distance between the inner wall surfaces, the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 10B) is the guide rib 465c of the rack portion 465 (FIG. It is set to a size larger than the thickness size of the reference), and the groove width of the collar guide recess 432 (the distance between the inner wall and the width in FIG. 10B) is larger than the diameter of the collar C That is, it is set to the same dimension as the groove width of the guide groove 424). Thereby, it is possible not only to absorb the dimensional tolerance of each part and to improve the assemblability, but as described later, smooth the initial operation when the movement of the first effect member 460 is started (that is, While suppressing the biting, it is possible to speed up the sliding movement, and the surface pressure of the tooth surface of the rack portion 465 (rack gear 465 b) and the pinion gear 480 can be made appropriate to suppress the wear of the tooth surface .

  In the bottom plate 421 of the first base body 420, a plurality of to-be-fastened portions 425, claw portions 426, and a receiving hole 427 are formed in a portion that is outward of the region surrounded by the wall portion 422. The to-be-fastened portion 425 is a portion fastened and fixed to the pedestal 635 (see FIG. 21) of the third case body 630, and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted is bored. The first case 410 (first unit 400) is the third case 610 by the fastening screws inserted into the respective to-be-fastened portions 425 being respectively fastened to the pedestal portion 635 of the third case body 630 in the third unit 600. (The third unit 600) is disposed in a stacked state (see FIG. 36).

  The claw portion 426 is a claw-like portion for holding the electrical wiring S, and a base extending from the bottom plate 421 and an extension extending horizontally from the standing end of the base to the bottom plate 421 And a bent portion formed by bending the extending end of the extended portion toward the bottom plate 421. A gap necessary for passing the electrical wiring S is secured between the bent tip of the bent portion and the bottom plate 421.

  The receiving hole 427 is a hole formed through the bottom plate 421 and is a position facing the extending portion and the bending portion of the claw portion 426, and the third base body 620 and the third base body of the third case 610. It arrange | positions in the position corresponding to the head of the fastening bolt B which fastens the cover body 630. That is, when the first case 410 (the first base body 420) is stacked on the front of the third case 610 (the third cover body 630) (see FIGS. 5 and 6), the third cover body in the third case 610. The head of the fastening bolt B projected from the front of 630 can be received (inserted) into the receiving hole 427 of the first base body 420. Therefore, even if the head of the fastening bolt B is protruded, the back surface of the first base body 420 can be brought into close contact with the front surface of the third cover body 630. As a result, the first case 410 and the third case 610 can be stacked without bulking in the thickness direction, and the overall thickness dimension (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 10A) can be reduced.

  In this case, since the receiving hole 427 is formed at a position facing the claw portion 426, the opening of the receiving hole 427 can be closed (hidden) by the claw portion 426. Thereby, the head of the fastening bolt B is prevented from being exposed to the outside through the opening of the receiving hole 427, and the access from the outside to the head of the fastening bolt B (operation of the head) Can be difficult. Furthermore, since the claw portion 426 is a portion for holding the electrical wiring S, the electrical wiring S can also close (hide) the opening of the receiving hole 427.

  In particular, since the electrical wiring S is wired along the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the claws 426 (the vertical direction in FIG. 10A), it is difficult to close (hide) the claws 426. The space on both sides (upper and lower sides in FIG. 9) of the portion 426 can be effectively closed by the electrical wiring S. That is, forming the receiving hole 427 at a position facing the claw portion 426 makes it difficult for the head portion of the fastening bolt B to be accessed from the outside (hard to operate the head portion). S can be synergistically enhanced.

  Referring back to FIG. 7 and FIG. The first effect member 460 is disposed slidably in the first case 410 (the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430). The base end side of the first effect member 460 is supported by the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430, and the front end side is from the side of the first case 410 (the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430). It is arranged in the posture which was projected horizontally. Here, the detailed configuration of the first effect member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13.

  FIG. 11 is a front exploded perspective view of the first effect member 460. FIG. Fig.12 (a) is a front view of the 1st presentation member 460, FIG.12 (b) is a side view of the 1st presentation member 460 in the arrow XIIb direction view of Fig.12 (a). Fig.13 (a) is a rear view of the 1st presentation member 460, FIG.13 (b) and FIG.13 (c) are the partial enlarged rear views of the 1st presentation member 460 in the XIIIb part of FIG. 13 (a). It is. 12 (a), 12 (b), 13 (a) and 13 (b), a state in which the rack portion 465 is attached to the base 461 is illustrated, while FIG. 13 (c). Then, the state in which the rack portion 465 is removed from the base 461 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 11 to FIG. 13, the first effect member 460 has a base 461 and a side (FIG. 12 (a) and FIG. 12 (b) right) edge of the base 461 front (FIG. 12 (b) A standing portion 462 standing upright, an extending portion 463 extending horizontally from the standing end of the standing portion 462 with the base 461, and an extending end of the extending portion 463 And a rack portion 465 connected to the upper (FIG. 12 (a) upper) edge of the base portion 461.

  The base 461 is formed of a resin material into a flat plate shape in a front view (see FIG. 12A), and is slidably supported by the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430. In the base portion 461, a support shaft 461a for supporting the collar C and a detection plate 461b which is a portion detected by the slide position detection sensor S are integrally formed.

  The support shaft 461a is a cylindrical portion, and a pair is erected from the front of the base 461 and a pair is erected from the back of the base 461 opposite to the front. . The front set is located coaxial to the back set. The collar C is rotatably supported by the base 461 by the support shaft 461 a being inserted into a shaft support hole formed through the center of the collar C.

  Each set of collars C is disposed along the side edge of the base 461 (the left side in FIG. 12A) opposite to the side on which the standing portion 462 is formed. Be done. More specifically, one support shaft 461a of each set is located at one end (the lower left side in FIG. 12 (a) of FIG. 12) of the base 461 formed in a front view, and the other support shaft 461a is viewed from the front It is located at a bent portion (upper left side in FIG. 12A) of the base portion 461 formed in a V shape.

  The collar C is integrally formed of a resin material with a cylindrical main body having an axial support hole and a flange-like flange projecting radially outward from an outer peripheral surface at an axial end of the main body. And attached to the support shaft 461a with the flange portion directed to the front or back of the base 461. That is, the diameter of the flange portion of the collar C is made larger than the groove width of the guide groove 424 of the first base body 420 and the collar guide recess 432 of the first cover body 430 (see FIGS. 9 and 10 (b)) The main body portion is inserted in the guide groove 424 and the collar guide recess 432 in a displaceable manner, and the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion is guided by the guide groove 424 and the inner wall surface of the collar guide recess 432.

  In this embodiment, a fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a support shaft 461a erected from the back surface (the lower side surface in FIG. 12B) of the base 461. The diameter of the head of the fastening screw is a collar C (body portion Larger than the diameter of the insertion hole of. Thus, the collar C attached to the support shaft 461a on the back of the base 461 is restricted from axial movement (ie, the collar C is held by the head of the fastening screw). On the other hand, the collar C mounted on the support shaft 461a erected from the front surface (the upper side surface in FIG. 12B) of the base 461 is omitted in the fastening and fixing by the fastening screw and can be removed from the support shaft 461a .

  As a result, by omitting the front side fastening screw, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and to reduce the part cost. As described above, even in the case where the fastening screw is omitted in order to reduce the cost of parts, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the assembly workability.

  That is, in the assembly of the first unit 400, the base 461 of the first effect member 460 is on the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 9) on the open side of the first base body 430 (the front side of FIG. And the first cover body 420 is covered, and then fastened and fixed. Therefore, while the collar C on the back side of the base 461 needs to be held by a fastening screw to prevent falling off from the support shaft 461 a, the collar C on the front side of the base 461 is in the assembly process, Since it is always located at the upper side, it is not necessary to prevent falling off from the support shaft 461a. Further, since the collar C on the front side of the base portion 461 is held by the collar guide concave portion 432 if the first cover body 430 is put over, from this point as well, it is necessary to prevent the falling off from the support shaft 461a by the fastening screw. There is no As described above, even if the fastening of the fastening screw to the support shaft 461a on the front side is omitted, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the assembly workability.

  The base 461 is, as shown in FIG. 13C, a rack shaft support surface 461c, a cylindrical rack support shaft 461d erected from the center of the rack shaft support surface 461c, and the rack support shaft 461d. And a rack regulation wall 461 e standing around the The rack shaft bearing surface 461c is a portion for supporting the base end side of the main body 465a of the rack portion 465, and is formed as a flat surface.

  The rack support shaft 461d is a circular cross section shaft for rotatably supporting the rack 465 (main body 465a), and is inserted into a cross section circular support hole 465d formed through the main body 465a of the rack portion 465. . The outer diameter of the rack support shaft 461d is set to be smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 465d. Therefore, the rack portion 465 (main body 465a) is rotatably supported by the rack support shaft 461d with slight rattling.

  The rack restricting wall 461 e is a portion for restricting rotation of the rack portion 465 within a predetermined rotation angle when the rack portion 465 rotates about the rack support shaft 461 d, and in the rear view shown in FIG. It includes a semicircular portion formed in a semicircular shape centering on the support shaft 461d, and a straight portion extending linearly in parallel from both ends of the semicircular portion. That is, the rack restricting wall 461 e is formed in a shape in which a part of an oval shape is cut away in the rear view. The straight portion of the rack restricting wall 461 e is extended in parallel with the direction connecting the axial centers of the pair of collars C.

  The inner diameter r1 of the semicircular portion of the rack regulation wall 461e is larger than the outer diameter r2 of the base end side (lower side in FIG. 13C) of the main body 465a of the rack portion 465 (r2 <r1), and the rack regulation The facing distance w1 of the straight portions of the wall 461e is larger than the width dimension w2 of the base end side of the main body 465a of the rack portion 465 (w2 <w1). The facing distance w1 is twice the inner diameter r1 (w1 = 2 × r1), and the width w2 is twice the outer diameter r2 (w2 = 2 × r2).

  The rack portion 465 can be rotated about the rack support shaft 461d by a predetermined amount by the difference in dimension between the facing distance w1 and the width dimension w2. Further, the dimensional difference between the outer diameter (radius) of the rack support shaft 461d and the inner diameter (radius) of the axial support hole 465d is equal to or slightly larger than the dimensional difference (r1-r2) between the inner diameter r1 and the outer diameter r2. . Thus, the rack portion 465 can move horizontally by a predetermined amount with respect to the base portion 461 in the plane of the rack shaft bearing surface 461c. In this case, when the rotation or horizontal movement of the rack portion 465 exceeds a predetermined amount, the side wall of the rack portion 465 (main body 465a) can be received by the inner peripheral wall of the rack restricting wall 461e to restrict further rotation or horizontal movement. That is, the load due to rotation or horizontal movement can be distributed to the rack restricting wall 461e instead of being carried by only the rack support shaft 461d and the shaft support hole 465d, so that the durability can be improved accordingly. Can.

  The height of the rack regulation wall 461e from the rack shaft seating surface 461c (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 13C) corresponds to the base end side (FIG. 13C) of the main body 465a of the rack portion 465. Slightly larger than the thickness dimension of FIG. 13 (c). Therefore, the first effect member 460 is attached to the first base body 420 (see FIG. 8), and the standing front end face of the rack restricting wall 461e is abutted against the slide surface 421a (see FIG. 9) of the first base body 420. Then, the rack portion 465 is rotatably held at its base end side between the slide surface 421 a and the rack shaft bearing surface 461 c.

  The standing portion 462 is a side edge (upper right side in FIG. 12A) of the base portion 461 in order to raise the position of the extending portion 463 to the front side (upper side in FIG. 12B) of the base 461. An erected portion 462a erected from the side edge of the base 461 to the front side (upper side in FIG. 12B), and an erected portion of the erected portion 462a. A base portion 461 and a flat plate portion 462b horizontally extended from the tip to the opposite side to the base 461 (right side in FIG. 12B) are provided.

  The erected portion 462a is formed in a U-shape in which the cross-sectional shape cut along a virtual plane parallel to the base portion 461 is opened with the extended portion 463 side (right side in FIG. 12A) to achieve weight reduction At the same time, the bending rigidity is improved in the direction in which the extension portion 463 is inclined with respect to the base portion 461 (the vertical direction in FIG. 12B). The flat plate portion 462a is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the proximal end side (the left side in FIG. 12B) of the extending portion 463.

  The extending portion 463 is a portion having the largest outer shape and weight among the components of the first effect member 460, and is formed in a hollow box shape. Inside the rim portion 463, light emitting means (for example, an LED) and a circuit board (both not shown) are accommodated. As shown in FIG. 12A, the extending portion 463 connects the collar C located on the rack 465 side (upper side in FIG. 12A) of the pair of collars C with the standing portion 462 It extends along (the left and right direction in FIG. 12 (a)). Therefore, in the front view (FIG. 12A), the extending portion 463 is extended along a direction inclining with respect to the direction connecting the pair of collars C (support shafts 461a).

  A decoration plate 463 a is disposed in front of the extending portion 463. The decorative plate 463a is a member on which a predetermined character string (for example, a character string indicating the name of the pachinko machine 10) is formed, and a portion on the front side (in the present embodiment, a shape portion corresponding to each character of the character string Is formed of a light transmissive material. The player can visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, the LED) disposed inside through the portion made of the light transmitting material of the extending portion 463.

  The tip end portion 464 is a portion formed on the tip end side of the first effect member 460 and supported by the second unit 500 from below in the direction of gravity (see FIG. 19A), and the tip end side of the extending portion 463 An attachment portion 464a to be fastened and fixed to the back surface (FIG. 12 (b) right side), and a tip end plate portion 464b that protrudes outward from the attachment portion 464a and is formed in a flat plate shape in front view and horizontal Equipped with

  The front end plate portion 464b connects the collar C located on the rack 465 side (upper side in FIG. 12A) of the pair of collars C in a front view shown in FIG. It is extended in parallel with the direction (that is, the extending direction of the extending portion 463, the left and right direction in FIG. 12A).

  Further, in the side view shown in FIG. 12 (b), the distal end plate portion 464 b is disposed in a posture parallel to the proximal end 461, and the extended portion 463 side (front side) relative to the proximal end 461. It is disposed at a position offset by a distance N1 (ie, a position raised to the front side). Thereby, the durability of the tip portion 464 can be improved.

  That is, since the first effect member 460 has a shape in which the extending portion 463 protrudes to the front side (upper side in FIG. 12B) with respect to the base portion 461, the first effect in the side view shown in FIG. The barycentric position of the member 460 as a whole is located closer to the extending portion 463 than the plane including the base portion 461 as illustrated as a position G in FIG. 12B (in the present embodiment, the back surface of the extending portion 463 (Located near the lower side in FIG. 12B), when the first effect member 460 slides (or even while the first effect member 460 is stopped) the up-down direction of the extending portion 463 12 (b) shaking in the vertical direction of the drawing in the front view shown in FIG. 12 (a). That is, the shaking in which the extending portion 463 is displaced in the vertical direction in FIG. Free vibration with the extension portion 463 as the free end) Easy to. The tip end plate portion 464b is a portion supported by the restriction ribs 532 and 542 and the support walls 533 and 543 (all refer to FIG. 19) of the second unit 500, as described later. When a sway in the direction occurs, the sway (that is, the weight of the extension portion 463) needs to be supported by the tip 464, and the durability of the tip 464 is concerned.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the distal end plate portion 464b is offset by the distance N1 toward the extending portion 463 side relative to the proximal end 461, the barycentric position (position is compared with the case where the distance N1 is not offset). The distance between G) and the tip plate portion 464b can be reduced. As a result, even if swinging of the extending portion 463 in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 12B) (a free vibration with the tip 464 as the fixed end and the extending portion 463 as the free end) is generated, The moment acting on the end plate portion 464 b due to the shaking (the weight of the extended portion 463 portion) can be reduced, and the durability of the end portion 464 can be improved. In addition, since the distance between the position of the center of gravity and the tip end plate portion 464b is reduced as described above, the vertical movement of the extending portion 463 can be converged early.

  A wall is erected along the outer edge of the front surface of the end plate portion 464b (the front side in the drawing of FIG. 12A) to improve the rigidity of the end plate portion 464b. The standing front end surface of the wall portion erected in front of the front end plate portion 464 b and the back surface of the front end plate member 464 b are formed as flat surfaces parallel to the base 461. Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the bulking position (the position in the vertical direction in FIG. 12) of the distal end plate portion 464b is set between the front surface of the proximal end 461 and the rear surface of the extending portion 463.

  The rack portion 465 is a portion which is combined with the pinion gear 480 disposed on the first base body 420 to constitute a rack and pinion, and the rotational force of the first drive motor 470 is a straight line of the first effect member 460. Convert to movement (slide movement). The rack portion 465 is erected on a long plate-like main body 465a, a rack gear 465b engraved on the side surface of the main body 465a and meshed with the pinion gear 480, and a front surface of the main body 465a It has two guide ribs 465c and a pivoting hole 465d formed through the proximal end side of the main body 465a.

  The base end side (lower side in FIG. 13A) of the main body 465a is formed in a semicircular shape centering on the axial support hole 465d. The two guide ribs 465c extend parallel to each other along the longitudinal direction of the main body 465a, and when the rack portion 465 is attached to the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430 is covered (see FIG. 7) The rack guide recess 431 (see FIG. 10B) of the first cover body 430 is inserted.

  The standing height of the guide rib 465c (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 12A) is made larger than the recess depth (the dimension in the vertical direction of FIG. 10B) of the rack guide recess 431 of the first cover body 430. Ru. Thus, when the rack portion 465 is displaced to the first cover body 430 side (front side, front side in FIG. 8) due to displacement (swing) of the first effect member 460 to the front side, the guide rib Only the protruding end of the protrusion 465c can be brought into contact with the bottom surface (upper surface of FIG. 10B) of the rack guide recess 431 and the front surface (front surface of FIG. 12A) of the main body 465a of the rack portion 465 It can contact | abut on the back surface (FIG.10 (b) lower side surface) of 1 cover body 430, and it can suppress that contact | abutting area becomes excessive.

  As a result, even if the front side displacement (swing) occurs during the slide movement of the first effect member 460, the sliding resistance can be reduced, and the slide movement of the first effect member 460 can be speeded up. It can be. In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the barycentric position (position G) of the first effect member 460 is positioned on the front side (upper side in FIG. 12B) than the base 461 and the rack portion 465. Since the effect member 460 is easily displaced (swingable) to the front side, the configuration in which the guide rib 465c is provided on the front side of the rack portion 465 is effective.

  The rack portion 465 is attached to the base 461 in a state where the rack support shaft 461 d of the base 461 is inserted into the shaft support hole 465 d. In this attached state, the rack portion 465 is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 465a is parallel to the direction connecting the pair of collars C (support shaft 461a), and the pair of pair The collar C (support shaft 461a) is disposed at a position offset by a distance N2 toward the extension portion 463 with respect to a virtual straight line connecting the collar C (support shaft 461a). The rack portion 465 can be rotated by a predetermined amount to the left and right (FIG. 13 (b) left and right direction) as described above with the parallel position as the center position (see FIG. 13 (b)) .

  Here, the rack portion 465 is rotatably connected to the base portion 461 by a predetermined amount, whereby the assembly workability of the first unit 400 can be improved. That is, when the first effect member 460 is attached to the first base body 420, a pair of collars C disposed on the back side of the base 461 is formed in the guide groove 424 formed in the first base body 420. It is necessary to carry out two processes of the process of inserting and the process of meshing the rack gear 465b of the rack portion 465 with the pinion gear 480 disposed on the first base body 420. In these two processes, it is difficult to simultaneously perform both processes because it is necessary to consider not only positional deviation due to dimensional tolerance but also phase deviation of the pinion gear 480 and the rack gear 465b.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack portion 465 is rotatably connected to the base portion 461 by a predetermined amount, the collar C and the rack portion 465 disposed on the base portion 461 are formed by the rotation. The degree of freedom of the positional relationship with the rack gear 465b can be increased. Thereby, a step of inserting a pair of collars C disposed on the back side of the base portion 461 into the guide groove 424 disposed on the first base body 420, a step of meshing the rack gear 465b with the pinion gear 480, Can be done simultaneously or sequentially. As a result, assembly workability can be improved.

  The mounting of the first effect member 460 to the first base body 420 does not have to be performed in the state in which the rack portion 465 is connected to the base portion 461 as described above, and in the present embodiment, it is performed as follows. It can also be done. That is, first, the rack portion 465 is placed on the slide surface 421a of the first base body 420 while meshing the rack gear 465b with the pinion gear 480, and then the base 461 is guided by the collar C on the back side The rack support shaft 461 d of the base portion 461 is inserted into the shaft support hole 465 d of the rack portion 465 during mounting of the first base body 420. The effect member 460 may be attached. According to this, the meshing of the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480, the insertion of the collar C into the guide groove 424, and the insertion of the rack support shaft 461d into the axial support hole 465d can be sequentially performed one step at a time. Therefore, the assembling workability can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the slide movement of the first effect member 460 in the first unit 400 will be described. Fig.14 (a) is a front view of the 1st unit 400 in the state in which the 1st presentation member 460 was arrange | positioned in the raise position, FIG.14 (b) is the 1st presentation member 460 arrange | positioned in the fall position. It is a front view of the 1st unit 400 in a state. In FIG. 14, a state in which the first cover body 430 is removed from the first base body 420 is illustrated in order to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, in the state where the first effect member 460 is disposed at the raised position, the base 461 (one of the collar C) and the rack portion 465 are the guide groove 424 and the slide of the first base body 420. It is positioned at the upper end (upper side of FIG. 14A) of the surface 421a. Further, at the rising position, the detection plate 461b of the base 461 is disposed in the space facing the light emitting portion Sa and the light receiving portion Sb (see FIG. 9) of the slide position detection sensor S, and the first effect member 460 is at the rising position. Is made detectable.

  When the first drive motor 470 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the state of being disposed at the raised position and the pinion gear 480 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 14A, the rotation of the pinion gear 480 is transmitted to the rack gear 465b. As a result, the rack portion 465 is slid downward (the diagonally lower left side in FIG. 14A) along the extending direction of the guide wall 423 and the rack guide concave portion 431 (see FIG. 10B). At the same time, along with the sliding movement of the rack portion 465, the base portion 461 is guided to the guide groove 424 and the rack guide recess 432 (see FIG. 10B) via the collar C and extends the guide groove 424 and the rack guide recess 432. The sliding movement is performed downward (in a direction parallel to the moving direction of the rack portion 465) along the direction.

  In this case, when the rotation speed of the first drive motor 470 is counted up to a predetermined rotation speed, it is determined that the first effect member 460 has reached the lowered position, and the rotational drive of the first drive motor 470 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 14B, the first effect member 460 is disposed at the lowered position.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, in the state where the first effect member 460 is disposed at the lowered position, one end side (upper side in FIG. 14B) of the rack portion 465 in the longitudinal direction is the wall portion 422 and the guide wall 423. A guide rib 465c is inserted into the rack guide recess 431 while being located between the opposite sides, and the guide effect by the wall portion 422 and the guide wall 423 and the rack guide recess 431 is continued.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), when the first drive motor 470 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction and the pinion gear 480 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 14 (b) from the state of being placed at the lowered position. The rotation of the pinion gear 480 is transmitted to the rack gear 465b, so that the rack portion 465 is upward along the extending direction of the guide wall 423 and the rack guide recess 431 (see FIG. 10B) (FIG. 14B). Slide to the upper right) At the same time, with the sliding movement of the rack portion 465, the base portion 461 is guided to the guide groove 424 and the rack guide concave portion 432 (see FIG. 10B) via the collar C and upward along the extending direction of the guide groove 424. It is slid in the direction (parallel to the moving direction of the rack portion 465).

  In this case, as described above, it is determined that the first effect member 460 has reached the raised position by the detection target plate 461b of the base 461 being detected by the slide position detection sensor S. The rotational drive is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 14A, the first effect member 460 is disposed at the raised position. In the operation process between the raised position and the lowered position, the state in which the guide rib 465c of the rack portion 465 is guided by the rack guide concave portion 431 is continued (maintained).

  As described above, in the first effect member 460, the base portion 461 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and the extended portion 463 is a portion having the largest outer shape and weight among the components of the first effect member 460. However, the extending portion 463 is positioned at a bent portion (upper side in FIG. 14A, the rack portion 465 side) of the base 461 formed in a front view V shape of the pair of collars C. A direction connecting the color C and the other end (upper right in FIG. 14A, standing portion 462 (see FIG. 12)) of the base 461 formed in a V shape in front view (horizontal direction in FIG. 14A) The rack portion 465 extends upward (upper right in FIG. 14A) at a position between the collar C and the extension portion 463.

  Therefore, the weight of the extending portion 463 is in a direction in which the entire first effect member 460 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 14 (a) centering on the collar C (upper side in FIG. 14 (a)) located at the bent portion. Can act. That is, the weight of the extending portion 463 can act on the rack gear 465b of the rack portion 465 in the direction of separating the rack gear 465b from the pinion gear 480 (right side in FIG. 14A).

  As a result, since the rack and pinion can be smoothly operated while avoiding that the surface pressure of the tooth surface between the rack gear 465 b and the pinion gear 480 becomes excessive, the first effect member 460 can be smoothly made. The slide movement can be performed, and the speeding up of the slide movement can be enabled. Further, wear of the teeth of rack gear 465 b and pinion gear 480 can be suppressed.

  Here, in the case where the sliding movement of the first effect member 460 is started from the state of being stopped at the raised position or the lowered position shown in FIG. 14 (a) or FIG. 14 (b) Since the influence is large and the influence of the tooth meshing state is easily generated, it is difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when sliding movement of the first effect member 460 is made, and as a result, the first drive motor 470 The load on the

  On the other hand, as described above, the first effect member 460 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported by the rack portion 465 with respect to the base portion 461 (that is, with rattling) (as shown in FIG. 13C), when the rack portion 465 starts to slide by rotational driving of the first drive motor 470 (pinion gear 480) by the amount of rattling, the rack portion 465 and the base portion 461 are properly set. It can be displaced relative to the position. That is, the rack 465 (rack gear b) itself can be displaced to a position with less resistance relative to the pinion gear 480, and the base 461 can be displaced independently to a position with less resistance relative to the rack 465. Thus, the initial operation can be smoothly performed, and the load on the first drive motor 470 can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, since the base 461 and the rack portion 465 are pivotally supported with rattling (see FIG. 13), a part of the rattling is produced, and the rendering portion 463 of the first rendering member 460 (decorative plate 463a) Since it can be made to slide and move while vibrating (swinging), the rendering effect can be enhanced by the vibration.

  In particular, as described later, the tip portion 464 of the first effect member 460 is supported from below in the direction of gravity by the straight portions 533a and 543a of the support walls 533 and 543 in the steady state (see FIG. 19). While displacement in the upper direction in FIG. 14 is permitted, a gap is formed between the back control rib 532 and the front control rib 542 (see FIG. 19), and displacement in the front-rear direction (vertical direction of FIG. 14). Is allowed, so that the vibration of the effect part 463 at the time of slide movement can be easily formed.

  Furthermore, the base portion 461 and the rack portion 465 are separated, and the shaft support portions of the both members 461 and 465 have rattle (see FIG. 13), whereby the first effect member is provided to the first base body 420. When assembling the 460, dimensional tolerance can be absorbed by the amount of rattling. Therefore, the assemblability at the time of attaching the first effect member 460 to the first base body 420 can be improved. In addition, since the dimensional tolerance required for each part can be relaxed by the amount of rattling, the part cost can be reduced.

  That is, when the first effect member 460 is attached to the first base body 420, a pair of collars C disposed on the back side of the base 461 is formed in the guide groove 424 formed in the first base body 420. It is necessary to make the rack gear 465 b of the rack portion 465 mesh with the pinion gear 480 disposed on the first base body 420 while inserting the rack. In this case, when the base portion 461 and the rack portion 465 are fixed so as not to be displaced relative to each other, the pair of collars C is first inserted through the guide groove 424, whereby the meshing of the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 is achieved. On the other hand, if the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 are engaged first, it may be difficult to insert the pair of collars C into either one of the guide grooves 424.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack portion 465 is connected to the base portion 461 so as to be displaceable (that is, with rattling) by a predetermined amount, and accordingly, the rack portion 465 is disposed on the base portion 461 The degree of freedom in the positional relationship between the collar C and the rack gear 465 b formed in the rack portion 465 can be enhanced. Thus, even if the pair of collars C is inserted into the guide groove 424 first, the rack gear 465b can be positionally adjusted with respect to the pinion gear 480 from that state, so both the gears 465b and 480 can be easily It can be meshed. On the other hand, even if the rack gear 465 b and the pinion gear 480 mesh first, since the base 461 can be adjusted in position relative to the guide groove 424 from that state, each pair of collars C is It can be easily inserted into 424.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the rack portion 465 is connected to the base portion 461 so as to be displaceable (that is, with rattling) by a predetermined amount, thereby providing the first effect on the first base body 420. After assembling the member 460, also in the step of assembling the first cover body 430 to the first base body 420, the pair of collars C disposed on the front side of the base 461 can be guided by the collar of the first cover body 430 Both the step of inserting into the concave portion 432 and the step of inserting the guide rib 465 c of the rack portion 465 into the rack guiding concave portion 431 of the first cover body 430 can be easily performed.

  Next, the second unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20. FIG. 15 is a front perspective view of the second unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 15, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate the understanding, the illustration of the decorative shapes formed on the front side of the second cover body 530 and the support member 540 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the second unit 500 includes a second case 510, a second effect member 560 whose base end is rotatably supported by the second case 510, and a second effect member 560. And driving means (not shown) for generating a driving force for driving.

  The second case 510 has a box-shaped second base body 520 open on one side and a second cover body fastened and fixed to one side of the second base body 520 to close the open portion of the second base body 520. And 530, a support member 540 which is overlapped and fastened on the front side above the second cover body 530, and a decorative member 550 which is overlapped and fastened on the front side below the second cover body 530; Equipped with

  The second base body 520 is provided with a second drive motor (not shown) as a drive means and a crank mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the rotational drive force of the second drive motor to the second effect member 560. Ru.

  To-be-fastened portions 525 and 526 are formed on the second base body 520. The to-be-fastened portion 525 is a portion to be fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 625 (see FIG. 21) of the third base body 620 and the to-be-fastened portion 526 to the pedestal portion 711 f (see FIG. 23) of the fourth case 710. An insertion hole through which the fastening screw is inserted is bored. The fastening screws inserted into the parts to be fastened 525 and 526 are fastened to the pedestal 625 of the third base body 620 in the third unit 600 and the pedestal 711 f of the fourth case 710 in the fourth unit 700, respectively. The second case 510 (second unit 500) is disposed stacked on the third case 610 (third unit 600) and the fourth unit 700 (see FIG. 37).

  The second cover body 530 is formed in a flat plate shape having a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the second base body 520 in a front view. The support member 540 is formed in a flat plate shape having a substantially parallelogram in a front view, and is disposed on an upper portion (above the support shaft 562) of the second cover body 530. The second cover body 530 and the support member 540 are formed of light transmissive resin materials of different colors. The detailed configurations of the second cover body 530 and the support member 540 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18.

  The second effect member 560 is formed in a rod-like arm main body 561 that is bent in a front view-like shape, and on the base end side (the right side in FIG. 15) of the arm main body 561. Mainly including a support shaft 562 rotatably supported by the body 520 and the second cover body 530) and a decorative member 563 disposed on the distal end side of the arm main body 561, and the distal end side (decorative member 563) It is disposed in a posture in which it is projected from the side of the second case body 510 toward the first unit 400 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The second unit 500 rotates the second effect member 560 about the support shaft 562 by the driving force of the above-mentioned driving means, and moves the tip end side of the second effect member 560 (decor member 563) upward or downward Let

  Here, since the arm main body 561 of the second effect member 560 is bent in a V shape convex upward (FIG. 15 upper side), in a state where the second effect member 560 is moved upward (see FIG. 6) to secure a sufficient space for visualizing the back side (the third effect member 660 and the fourth effect member 760) by utilizing the concave portion (lower portion in FIG. 15) of the V Can. In addition, when the arm main body 561 is bent in a V shape to be convex upward in this manner, when rotating (raising) the second effect member 560 centering on the support shaft 562, less rotation is performed. The arm main body 561 can be concealed on the back side of the front plate 531 (the overhanging portion 531 a) of the second cover body 530 by the amount.

  Furthermore, by forming the arm main body 561 in a V-shape, the overall length can be increased and the rigidity can be reduced by having a bent portion. That is, the weight of the decorative member 563 can be shared by the arm main body 563 by suppressing the action of being biased only to the support shaft 562. Thereby, the weight of the decoration member 563 can be dispersed to both the arm main body 563 and the support shaft 562, and the durability can be improved.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the second cover body 530 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.16 (a) is a partial enlarged front view of the 2nd cover body 530, FIG.16 (b) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the 2nd cover body 530 in the XVIb-XVIb line of FIG. 16 (a). .

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second cover body 530 includes a flat front plate 531, a back regulation rib 532 erected from the front of the front plate 531, and side and upper sides of the back regulation rib 532. A support wall 533 erected from the front of the front plate 531 and a plurality of fastened columns 534 dotted around the back restriction rib 532 and the support wall 533 are integrally formed. Be done.

  The front plate 531 is a portion that forms the skeleton of the second cover body 530, and is formed in a substantially flat plate shape. The front plate 531 includes an overhanging portion 531a which is formed to project toward the side (left side in FIG. 16A) on the first unit 400 side (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The overhanging portion 531a projects further toward the first unit 400 than the side edge of the second base body 520 (see FIG. 15), whereby the second effect member 560 is moved upward. The arm body 561 can be concealed on the back side of the overhanging portion 531a while exposing the decoration member 563 of the second effect member 560 (see FIG. 6).

  The back surface control rib 532 contacts the back surface of the front end plate portion 464b when the front end portion 464 (front end plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 is displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16A). It is a part for restricting the displacement to the rear (in the back of the paper surface in FIG. 16A) in contact (see FIG. 19B), and is extended linearly in the front view shown in FIG. It is formed as a projection which is provided to project from the front of the front plate 531.

  The cross-sectional shape of the back surface control rib 532 is, as shown in FIG. 16B, a flat surface parallel to the slide movement plane of the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 14) and the corner on both sides The portion is curved in an arc shape. In the present embodiment, the two back surface control ribs 532 are disposed in parallel to each other, and are inclined in the direction corresponding to the sliding direction of the first effect member 460 in the front view shown in FIG. It will be extended.

  The support wall 533 is a portion for restricting or supporting the displacement or weight of the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 together with the support wall 543 of the support member 540 (see FIG. 19). In the front view shown in (a), a straight portion 533a linearly extended in parallel to the back surface control rib 532 and an upper portion of the straight portion 533a are connected horizontally and extend horizontally (FIG. 16 (a) horizontal direction) And a lower portion 533c opposite to and substantially parallel to the upper portion 533b on the lower side of the straight portion 533a.

  More specifically, the support wall 533 supports the tip end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 from the lower side in the gravity direction by the straight portion 533a. Further, the support wall 533 restricts the displacement of the end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 upward (the upper side in FIG. 16A) by the upper portion 533b, and the first effect by the lower portion 533c. The displacement of the tip end plate portion 464b of the member 460 to the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 16A) is restricted (see FIG. 19A).

  When the first effect member 460 reaches the raised or lowered position by sliding movement (see FIG. 14), the tip end side (tip plate portion 464b) is moved upward or downward by the inertia force when the sliding movement is stopped. It is greatly displaced. In this case, the displacement of the tip end side of the first effect member 460 can be regulated by the abutment of the upper portion 533 b or the lower portion 533 c of the support wall 533 (the stopper function can be exhibited), whereby the excess of the first effect member 460 is excessive. Control the displacement (free vibration) at an early stage, which is more effective than the point of improving the durability. In particular, it is effective to improve the durability of the base portion 461 and the standing portion 462.

  In the steady state in which the first effect member 460 is stopped at the raised position or the lowered position, a predetermined gap is formed between the tip end side (tip plate portion 464b) and the upper portion 533b or lower portion 533c of the support wall 533. Is formed. However, the gap may not be formed.

  The support wall 533 is formed as a rectangular protrusion whose height from the front plate 531 is higher than that of the back surface control rib 532 in a cross-sectional view shown in FIG. It is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front of the face plate 531 (upper side in FIG. 16B). In the front view shown in FIG. 16A, the back regulating rib 532 and the support wall 533 (linear portion 533a) have an inclination angle with the vertical direction as an angle θ1. This angle θ is the same as the inclination angle that the direction of sliding movement of the first effect member 460 (that is, the extending direction of the guide groove 424 and the collar guide recess 432, see FIG. 14) makes with the vertical direction.

  The to-be-fastened column 534 is a cylindrical portion erected from the front plate 531, and supports the fastening seat 544 of the support member 540 by the erected front end surface formed as a flat surface. In addition, an internal thread is engraved on the inner periphery of the concave portion recessed in the standing front end surface of the to-be-fastened column 534, and the fastening seat portion 544 of the support member 540 is fastened and fixed by the fastening screw.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the support member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (a) is a front view of the support member 540, FIG. 17 (b) is a back view of the support member 540, and FIG. 17 (c) is a line XVIIc-XVIIc in FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of a support member 540. In FIG. 17A, the outlines of the front regulating rib 542 and the support wall 543 are illustrated by broken lines.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the support member 540 includes a flat front plate 541, a front restriction rib 542 erected from the back of the front plate 541, and a front plate on the side and above the front restriction rib 542. A support wall 543 erected from the back surface of 541 and a plurality of fastening seats 544 projecting from the outer surface of the support wall 543 are provided, and these portions 541 to 544 are integrally formed.

  The front plate 541 is a portion that forms the framework of the support member 540, and is formed in a flat plate shape having a substantially parallelogram in a front view. The front regulating rib 542 contacts the front of the tip plate portion 464b when the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 is displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 17A). It is a portion for contacting (see FIG. 19 (b)) and restricting forward displacement (in the direction of the front of FIG. 17 (a)), and is linearly extended in a front view shown in FIG. 17 (a). It is formed as a projection which is provided to project from the back of the front plate 541. The cross-sectional shape of the front regulating rib 542 is, as shown in FIG. 17B, a flat surface parallel to the slide movement plane of the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 14) and the corner on both sides The portion is curved in an arc shape. In the present embodiment, the three front restriction ribs 542 are disposed parallel to one another, and are inclined in the direction corresponding to the sliding direction of the first effect member 460 in the front view shown in FIG. It will be extended.

  The support wall 543 is a portion for regulating or supporting the displacement or the weight of the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464 b) of the first effect member 460 together with the support wall 533 of the second cover body 530 (FIG. 19A) 17), in a front view shown in FIG. 17A, a straight portion 543a located on the side of the front regulating rib 532 (right side in FIG. 17A) and extended linearly, and the upper portion of the straight portion 543a And a lower portion 543c connected to the lower side of the straight portion 543a and opposed substantially parallel to the upper portion 543b.

  More specifically, the support wall 543 has its straight portion 543a, together with the straight portion 533a of the support wall 533 (see FIG. 16), support the tip end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 from below in the direction of gravity. The upper portion 543b of the support wall 543, together with the upper portion 533b of the support wall 533, regulates the displacement of the top end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 upward (upper side in FIG. 17A). Similarly, the lower portion 543c of the support wall 543, together with the lower portion 533c of the support wall 533, regulates the downward displacement (the lower side in FIG. 17A) of the end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460. .

  The support wall 543 is formed as a rectangular protrusion whose vertical height is higher than that of the front restriction rib 542 in the cross sectional view shown in FIG. 17C, and the front end surface of the vertical wall is on the back surface of the front plate 541. It is formed as a parallel flat surface. Here, in the support wall 543, the front view shape shown in FIG. 17A is formed to be the same as the front view shape (see FIG. 16A) of the support wall 533 of the second cover 530. When the support member 540 is fastened and fixed to the body 530, the standing front end faces of the support walls 533 and 543 of each other abut. Therefore, the support wall 543, together with the support wall 533 of the second cover body 530, supports the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 from below in the direction of gravity by the straight portion 543a, and similarly The support wall 543, together with the support wall 533 of the second cover body 530, restricts the displacement of the tip plate portion 464b upward and downward (the upper and lower sides in FIG. 17A) by the upper portion 543b and the lower portion 543c. (See FIG. 19 (a)).

  The support member 540 is set to have different inclination angles between the front restricting rib 542 and the support wall 543 (straight portion 543a). Specifically, in the front view shown in FIG. 17A, the front regulation rib 542 has an inclination angle with the vertical direction set to the angle θ2, while the support wall 543 (linear portion 543a) has a vertical direction The inclination angle to be formed is the same angle (angle θ1) as the back surface control rib 532 and the support wall 533 (straight portion 533a). The angle θ1 is set to be larger than the angle θ2 (θ2 <θ1).

  The fastening seat portion 544 is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening post 534 of the second cover body 530, and the fastening seat portion 544 is placed on the standing front end face of the fastening subject column 534 of the second cover body 530. The support member 540 is disposed on the front of the second cover body 530 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw (see FIG. 15).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, a support structure for supporting the tip portion 464 of the first effect member 460 by the second cover body 530 and the support member 540 will be described.

  FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically illustrating the positional relationship between the support walls 533 and 543, the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542. As shown in FIG. FIG. 19A is a front view of the first unit 400 and the second unit 500, and FIG. 19B is a front view of the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 taken along line XIXb-XIXb in FIG. FIG. FIG. 18 corresponds to the perspective view of FIG. 19 (a). In FIG. 19A, a part of the support member 540 is partially omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, in the state where the support member 540 is fastened and fixed to the second cover body 530, the arrangement of the support wall 533 of the second cover body 530 and the support wall 543 of the support member 540 is matched. While the back restriction rib 532 of the second cover body 530 and the front restriction rib 542 of the support member 540 are disposed at different positions (positions which are not completely overlapped with each other in the front view). Ru.

  In this case, the back and front of the end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 (the back and front sides in FIG. 19A) and the front restriction of the back regulation rib 532 of the second cover 530 and the support member 540 A predetermined gap is formed between the rib 542 and the rib 542, respectively. As a result, when the first effect member 460 is slid on the tip end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) with little displacement (swing) in the front-rear direction, the occurrence of frictional resistance is reduced. By sliding the first effect member 460 smoothly, the load on the first drive motor 470 (see FIG. 8) can be reduced. On the other hand, when the displacement (swing) in the front-rear direction at the tip end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 becomes equal to or more than a predetermined amount, the displacement of each rib 532 or 542 causes excessive displacement ( Vibration can be suppressed to improve the durability.

  During an operation in which the first effect member 460 of the first unit 400 is slidingly moved between the raised position and the lowered position (see FIG. 14), the base end side (the base 461) of the first effect member 460 is the first case 410 (on the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430), the tip end side (tip portion 464) of the support wall 533 of the second cover body 530 and the straight portion 533a of the support wall 543 of the support member 540, Since it is supported from the lower side in the direction of gravity (FIGS. 18 and 19 (a) vertical direction) by 543a, the first effect member 460 can be in a double-held state.

  Thereby, the weight of the first effect member 460 can be shared not only on the proximal side (the base 461 and the first case 410) but also on the distal side (the distal end 464 and the support walls 533 and 534), Since the weight of the first effect member 460 can be dispersed by a minute, the proximal end side is compared with the case where only the proximal end side is supported and the distal end side is set as the free end. The burden of the load can be reduced, and the durability can be improved.

  The tip end side (tip end portion 464) of the first effect member 460 is disposed between the second base body 530 (front plate 531) and the support member 540 (front plate 541) facing each other. When the front end side of the head is displaced (swayed) in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide movement (back and forth direction perpendicular to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), vertical direction in FIG. 18 and FIG. The displacement can be regulated by the second base body 530 (front plate 531) and the support member 540 (front plate 541). As a result, the load on the base end side (the base 461 and the first case 410) can be reduced, the durability can be improved, and the first effect member 460 can be slid smoothly.

  Note that displacing the tip end side of the first effect member 460 in the direction (front-rear direction) orthogonal to the direction of the slide movement is not limited to the displacement mode having only a displacement component in the direction completely orthogonal to the direction of slide movement. As described above, the displacement mode (ie, the base portion 461 and the tip end portion 464 as a fixed end and the extension portion 463 as a free end) in which the extension portion 463 swings in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. This is the meaning including the displacement mode of vibration) and the displacement mode in which each of these displacement modes is synthesized.

  In this case, the second base body 530 has its front plate 531 to the back surface control rib 532, the support member 540 has its front surface plate 531 to the front surface control rib 542, and the tip portion 464 of the first effect member 460 (tip plate portion 464b) is erected toward the back and the front respectively. Thereby, as described above, when the first effect member 460 is displaced (swayed) in a direction (a direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 18 and FIG. 19A) orthogonal to the direction of the slide movement, , And the front end of the front restricting rib 542. That is, the protruding tips of the ribs 532 and 542 are partially in contact with the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460, and the contact area is suppressed. It can be reduced. Thus, the first effect member 460 can be slid smoothly, and the load on the first drive motor 470 can be reduced.

  Here, in both the forward path and the return path (up and down movement) of the first effect member 460 during the slide movement, the action direction of gravity is the same direction, while the pinion gear 480 to the rack gear of the rack portion 465 Since the acting direction of the rotational driving force acting on 465b (that is, the rotating direction of the pinion gear 480) is different, the attitude of the first effect member 460 is different in both paths, and as a result, the attitude of the tip end (tip portion 464) (Inclination state and movement trajectory) also change in both routes.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the extension direction of the back surface control rib 532 (inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction = angle θ1) and the extension direction of the front surface control rib 542 (inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction = angle θ2) are different. For example, the first effect member may be set by setting the extension direction of the back surface control rib 532 to the attitude of the forward path and the extension direction of the front surface control rib 542 to the attitude of the return path. When the 460 is displaced while sliding (swinging) in the back and forth direction (FIGS. 18 and 19 (a) front and back direction in the plane of the drawing) orthogonal to the direction of the sliding movement, The tip end portion 464 of the effect member 460 can be smoothly guided using the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542.

  As described above, the second base body 530 and the support member 540 are formed of light transmissive resin materials of different colors. Therefore, the light of the light emitting means (for example, the LED) can be transmitted, and the decorative effect by the light emission can be enhanced. In addition, by forming the second base body 530 and the second base body 530 and the support member 540 having different external dimensions from different colors, the color of the appearance can be enriched and the decorative effect can be enhanced. .

  In this case, the second base body 530 and the support member 540 are formed of light-transmissive resin materials of different colors, so that in the area where the second base body 530 and the support member 540 overlap, color mixing can be performed. The facing space of the second base body 530 and the support member 540 (the facing space between the front plate 531 and the front plate 541) can be made less visible from the outside. That is, the front end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 sandwiched between the front plate 531 and the front plate 541 is difficult to visually recognize from the outside in a front view of the support member 540, The presence of the tip portion 464 of the effect member 460 can be made inconspicuous.

  In the present embodiment, the tip end portion 464 of the first effect member 460 is formed of a black resin material. This can enhance the effect of making the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) less visible and noticeable from the outside in a front view of the support member 540.

  Further, the extending direction of the back surface control rib 532 of the second base body 530 (inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction = angle θ1) and the extension direction of the front surface control rib 542 of the support member 540 (inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction = angle θ2) Are different from one another, so that the formation positions of the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 can be dispersed. As a result, the presence of the respective ribs 532 and 542 can be made inconspicuous as a whole with respect to the player visually recognized from the front of the support member 540, and loss of the appearance can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 are formed at positions not overlapping each other in front view except those closest to the support walls 533 and 543. That is, of the two back surface control ribs 532, one of the back surface control ribs 532 located on the side (left side in FIG. 18) separated from the straight portion 533 a of the support wall 533 and The two front restricting ribs 542 located on the side (left side in FIG. 18) separated from the linear portion 543a of the support wall 543 are formed so as not to overlap with each other in front view. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the formation of an overlapping portion of the two ribs 532 and 542 whose presence is emphasized when the support member 540 is viewed from the front, and it is possible to disperse the formation positions of the two ribs 532 and 542 Therefore, the presence of the respective ribs 532 and 542 can be made inconspicuous to suppress the loss of the appearance.

  As described above, the first effect member 460 is formed in a shape in which the extending portion 463 protrudes to the front side with respect to the base 461 (see FIG. 12B), and the barycentric position of the first effect member 460 as a whole. Is biased to the front side (the front side in FIG. 19A). Therefore, the first effect member 460 is more likely to be displaced (swingable) to the front side than to the back side due to the deviation of the center-of-gravity position. That is, when shaking occurs in the first effect member 460, the tip end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 is more frequently in contact with the front surface regulating rib 542 than the back surface regulating rib 532.

  In this case, first, the number of front restriction ribs 542 is smaller than the number of rear restriction ribs 532 (in this embodiment, the back restriction ribs 532 and 532 are used). Are arranged, while three front restriction ribs 542 are arranged) and secondly, the space size of the front restriction ribs 542 with respect to the space size of the back surface restriction ribs 532 (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 18) (In the present embodiment, the back regulation rib 532 is the interval J1, the front regulation rib 542 is the interval J2, and J1 <J2 is set), and thirdly, the back regulation rib 532 is the front regulation rib The first effect member 460 (the end plate portion 464b) is disposed more on the tip side (right side in FIG. 18) than the portion 542. In the present embodiment, although the case where the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 have the above first to third configurations will be described, it is not necessary to have all the first to third configurations. It is sufficient if it has the configuration of 1.

  Thus, with regard to the front restricting rib 542 in which the tip plate portion 464b frequently abuts, the front restricting rib 542 can be provided by increasing the number of dispositions and enlarging the interval dimension to widen the disposition area. The load generated when the distal end plate portion 464b abuts can be easily dispersed, and the durability can be improved. On the other hand, with regard to the back surface control rib 532 in which the front end plate portion 464b abuts at a low frequency, the presence of the back surface control rib 532 is made inconspicuous with respect to the player visually recognizing the support member 540 from the front. It can be suppressed that the appearance is lost.

  In this case, when the first effect member 460 is displaced to the rear side, only the front end side (the right side in FIG. 18) of the front end plate portion 464 b is in contact with the rear surface restriction rib 532. With regard to 532, it is effective to reduce the spacing dimension and to arrange the tip end of the tip plate portion 464 b in a biased manner. That is, it is wasteful to dispose the back surface control rib 532 on the root side (left side in FIG. 18) of the tip end plate portion 464b, and the tip end side portion effectively receives the tip end plate portion 464b with a small number of placements. Lead to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the positional relationship between the first effect member 460 of the first unit 400 and the second effect member 560 of the second unit 500 in the front-rear direction will be described. FIG. 20 is a schematic view of the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 in the lower view, and corresponds to the view in the arrow XIIb direction of FIG. 12 (a). In FIG. 20, the outer shape of the third unit 600 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 are disposed on the front surface (upper side surface in FIG. 20) of the third unit 600. That is, the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 are disposed on the same plane. In this case, in the first effect member 460, as described above, the extending portion 463 is raised to the front side (upper side in FIG. 20) than the base end 461 by the standing portion 462, and the end plate portion 464b is raised. The position (the position in the vertical direction in FIG. 20) is set between the front surface of the proximal end 461 and the back surface of the extending portion 463.

  Thus, a space can be formed between the rear surface of the extending portion 463 of the first effect member 460 and the front surface of the third unit 600. That is, this space can be used as a space for the second effect member 560 to move. As a result, in front view, the movement locus of the first effect member 460 and the movement locus of the second effect member 560 can be overlapped, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the configuration in which the first effect member 460 is bent (the bulk is raised by the standing portion 462) as described above, the weight of the first effect member 460 is increased, and accordingly, the base end side (the base end 461 side) 20), and the front end side (front end portion 464) in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 20) when sliding moves (longitudinal direction in FIG. 20) orthogonal to the displacement (swing) and sliding movement direction The displacement (swing) of the distal end side (the distal end portion 464) to the In the present embodiment, the tip end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 is supported from below in the gravity direction by the second cover body 530 and the support walls 533 and 543 (linear portions 533a and 543a) of the support member 540. By disposing between the front plates 531 and 541, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the tip end (tip portion 464) in the above-described orthogonal direction (front-rear direction).

  That is, bending the first effect member 460 (bulging by the standing portion 462) increases the weight and increases the load on the base end side (the base end portion 461 side). This can not be adopted in a cantilever state in which the tip end side (tip end portion 464) is a free end, and the tip end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 can be used as the second cover body 530 and the support member. The support walls 533 and 543 (straight portions 533a and 543a) of the 540 can be used for the first time by supporting from the lower side in the direction of gravity and restricting the displacement of the tip side (tip portion 464) in the front and rear direction described above by the front plates 531 and 541 As a result, while improving the durability by reducing the burden on the base end side (the base end 461 side) and enabling the smooth slide movement of the first effect member 460, the first Production which overlap in the movement locus of the output member 460 and the front view and the movement locus of the second effect member 560 becomes possible.

  Next, the third unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 21 is a front exploded perspective view of the third unit 600, and FIG. 22 is a rear exploded perspective view of the third unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the third unit 600 includes a third case 610, a slide shaft 640 disposed in the third case 610, and a rack portion 650 guided along the slide shaft 640. And a pinion gear 680 engaged with the rack gear 651 of the rack portion 650, a third drive motor 670 for rotationally driving the pinion gear 680, and a third effect member 660 connected to the rack portion 650. .

  The third case 610 has a box-shaped third base body 620 whose one side (the front side in FIG. 21) is open, and a third base body 620 which is fastened and fixed to one side of the third base body 620. And the third cover body 630 of the open portion of the third base body 620 is fastened and fixed to one surface side of the third base body 620. And a flat plate cover (not shown) for closing the lower portion (the lower side in FIG. 21) of the lower end. The third base body 620, the third cover body 630, and the flat cover are formed of a colorless light transmitting resin material.

  The third base body 620 is formed in a rectangular frame shape by forming a rectangular opening 621 at the center in a front view, and the rectangular frame shape is rectangular upward from the center of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 21). It is formed in the shape from which the shape part protrudes. The opening 621 corresponds to the position and size corresponding to the opening 711a of the fourth unit 700 (the fourth base body 710) when the third unit 600 is stacked on the fourth unit 700 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The display content of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible through the two openings 621 and 711a.

  A plurality of to-be-fastened portions 624 fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 711 e (see FIG. 23) of the fourth case 710 are formed on the third base body 620. An insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted is bored in each of the to-be-fastened portions 624, and a seat surface (a front side surface in FIG. 22) of each of the to-be-fastened portions 624 is a back surface of the third base body 620 (FIG. 22). It is flush with the front side of the paper). In the present embodiment, in the third base body 620, the to-be-fastened portions 624 are formed at a total of four places of two places on the upper side and two places on the lower side in front view.

  Also, a plurality of pedestals 625 and 635 are formed on the third base body 620 and the third cover body 630. The pedestal portions 625 and 635 are portions to which the to-be-fastened portions 425 and 525 in the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 are fastened and fixed (see FIGS. 36 and 37), and correspond to the respective to-be-fastened portions 425 and 525 Placed in the

  The third cover body 630 is formed in a flat plate shape, and seals a region which is above the upper side of the opening 621 (upper side in FIG. 21) of the open portion of the third base body 620. The slide shaft 640, the rack portion 650, the third drive motor 670, and the pinion gear 680 are disposed on the third base body 620 in the area sealed by the third cover body 630.

  The slide shaft 640 is a member for guiding the slide movement direction of the rack portion 650, and is formed as a rod having a circular cross section having a length equal to the width dimension (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 21) of the third base body 620. It is disposed above the opening 621 in a horizontal posture (that is, a posture parallel to the upper side of the opening 621) with its longitudinal direction directed to the width direction of the third base body 520.

  The rack portion 650 is a box-shaped body having a rectangular cross section which is slid along the longitudinal direction of the slide shaft 640, and the third effect member 660 is disposed on the lower surface (the lower surface in FIG. 21) of the box-shaped body. The rack gear 651 is formed (cut) along the longitudinal direction of the slide shaft 640 on the front side of the box-like body. A pinion gear 680 is engaged with the rack gear 651, and a drive gear 672 fixed to the drive shaft 671 of the third drive motor 670 is engaged with the pinion gear 680.

  The third unit 600 includes a pair of drive mechanisms including the third drive motor 670, the pinion gear 680, the rack portion 650, and the third effect member 660, and the pair of drive mechanisms face both sides in the width direction of the third base body 620. Will be arranged.

  According to this drive mechanism, when the pair of third drive motors 670 are rotationally driven in opposite directions from the retracted position shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, each pinion gear 680 is rotated, and the rotation of the pinion gears 680 By being transmitted to each rack gear 651, each rack portion 650 (the third effect member 660) is slidingly moved toward the center of the opening 621 along the longitudinal direction of the slide shaft 640, and each third effect member 660 is It arrange | positions in the overhang | projection position (not shown) each projected in the formation area of the opening 621. As shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the pair of third drive motors 670 are rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case from the extended position, each rack portion 650 (third effect member 660) is in the longitudinal direction of the slide shaft 640. A retracted position where each third effect member 660 is retracted from the center side of the opening 621 toward both sides (the outer edge of the third base body 620) and out of the formation region of the opening 621 (FIG. 21). And FIG. 22).

  In the present embodiment, since the drive mechanism is provided in a pair, the pair of third effect members 660 can be slid independently. For example, only one of the third effect members 660 of the pair of third effect members 660 is slid by rotating only one of the third drive motors 670 of the pair of third drive motors 670. Can. Alternatively, the pair of third effect members 660 can be slid in the same direction by rotationally driving the pair of third drive motors 670 in the same direction.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the third base body 620 is provided with a third inner rib 622 and a third outer rib 623 on its back surface. The third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 are ribs for guiding the tip side (tip portions 764L and 764R) of the fourth effect member 760 of the fourth unit 700 (see FIG. 23), and has a semicircular cross section. While being projected from the back surface of the third base body 620 as a projection having a shape of a circle, it is curved and extended in an arc shape in a back view of the third base body 620. In a back view of the third base body 620, the right half and the left half of the third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 are curved in a circular arc shape with a different position as the center of curvature.

  The third inner rib 622 is divided into three by the opening 621 at two places in the extending direction. The third inner rib 622 divided into three is gradually lowered as the standing height from the back of the third base body 620 approaches the end near the end located across the opening 621 (ie, standing) The tip (the front side in FIG. 22) is inclined downward toward the end). The downward inclined area is hereinafter referred to as "inclined portion 622a".

  The third outer rib 623 is continuously extended over the entire area from one end (right end in FIG. 22) to the other end (left end in FIG. 22) without being divided halfway. Therefore, the tip portions 764L and 764R of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are always lifted from the back surface of the third base body 620 by an amount corresponding to the protruding height of the third outer rib 623 )be able to.

  Thereby, even when the third inner rib 622 is divided halfway (that is, the tip portions 764L and 764R can not be lifted from the back surface of the third base body 620 at the divided portion, so the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R (the curved portions 761L and 761R may collide with the inner peripheral edge of the opening 621), the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R rotate the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L When rotating between the raised position and the lowered position (see FIGS. 33 to 35), the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R can be prevented from colliding with the inner peripheral edge portion of the opening 621.

  When the third unit 600 is stacked on the fourth unit 700 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), the third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 form the fourth inner rib 714 of the fourth unit 700 and the fourth rib. It is formed in the position (position which overlaps in a plain view) corresponding to the outer rib 715, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 35, the fourth unit 700 will be described. FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the fourth unit 700. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the fourth unit 700 includes a fourth case 710, a fourth effect member 760 whose base end is rotatably supported by the fourth case 710, and a fourth effect member 760. And a fourth drive motor (not shown) for generating a driving force for driving the motor. Here, the detailed configuration of the fourth case will be described with reference to FIG. 24 to FIG.

  FIG. 24 is a front perspective view of the fourth case 710, in which the front cover 716 is removed.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the fourth case 710 includes a bottom plate 711 and a wall portion 712 erected from the outer edge of the bottom plate 711. The bottom plate 711 is formed in a rectangular frame shape by forming a rectangular opening 711a at the center in a front view, and the rectangular shape is formed upward from the upper center of the rectangular frame (upper side in FIG. 23) It is formed in the shape where a portion is projected. That is, the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710 is formed to have substantially the same front view shape as the front view shape of the third base body 620 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) of the third unit 600.

  A plurality of pedestals 711 e are formed on the bottom plate 711. The pedestal portion 711e is a portion to which the to-be-fastened portion 624 of the third case 610 in the third unit 600 is fastened and fixed (see FIGS. 36 and 37), and at a position corresponding to the to-be-fastened portion 624 of the third case 610. Be placed.

  Further, a pedestal 711 f and a plurality of holes to be fastened 712 a are formed in the wall 712. The pedestal portion 711 f is a portion to which the second base body 520 (fastened portion 526) in the second unit 500 is fastened and fixed (see FIGS. 36 and 37), and corresponds to the fasted portion 526 of the second base body 520. Placed in the The to-be-fastened hole 712a is a portion to which the decorative connection plate 450 in the first unit 400 is fastened and fixed (see FIGS. 36 and 37), and is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 451 of the decorative connection plate 450.

  Here, a restriction wall 711fa extending in an L shape in a front view is erected around the pedestal portion 711f. The restriction wall 711Fa is formed corresponding to the outer shape of the to-be-fastened portion 526 (see FIG. 15) of the second base body 520, and when the to-be-fastened portion 526 is fastened and fixed to the pedestal 711f, the to-be-fastened portion The inner wall surface of the restriction wall 711 fa faces (or abuts on) the outer edge (outer side surface) of 526. Thereby, the to-be-fastened portion 526 is placed on the pedestal portion 711 f (that is, the second unit 500 is stacked on the front surface of the third unit 600 in order to connect the second unit 500 to the fourth unit 700, see FIG. 37). In this case, positioning of the fastened portion 526 with respect to the pedestal portion 711 f can be performed using the restriction wall 711 fa. Thus, the assemblability can be improved.

  Further, since the restricting portion 711fa surrounds the two sides of the outer edge of the fastened portion 526, movement (displacement) of the fastened portion 526 on the pedestal portion 711f can be restricted by the restricting portion 711fa. Therefore, the connection strength of the second unit 500 with respect to the fourth unit 700 can be increased, and wobble of the operation unit 300 (displacement of the third unit 600 and the second unit 500 with respect to the fourth unit 700) can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the pedestal portion 711f is formed to project outward (right side in FIG. 24) from the standing end of the wall portion 712 of the fourth case 710, compared to the case where the pedestal portion 711f is provided on the inner wall surface side of the wall portion 712, Not only can the accommodating capacity of each unit 400 to 600 in the fourth case 710 be ensured, but the pedestal portion 711 f functions as a reinforcing rib, whereby the rigidity of the fourth case body 710 itself can be enhanced. As a result, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be enhanced, and the wobbling at the time of operation of each of the effect members 460 to 760 can be suppressed.

  Similarly, the to-be-fastened hole 712a is formed in a portion that is flanged outward from the standing end of the wall portion 712 of the fourth case 710 (upper side in FIG. 24), and thus, the inside of the wall portion 712 is formed. As compared with the case of providing on the wall surface side, not only can the accommodation capacity of each unit 400 to 600 in the fourth case 710 can be secured, but also a portion formed in such a flange shape (a portion where the to-be-fastened hole 712a is formed) By acting as a reinforcing rib, the rigidity of the fourth case body 710 itself can be enhanced. As a result, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be enhanced, and the wobbling at the time of operation of each of the effect members 460 to 760 can be suppressed.

  The bottom plate 711 includes a driving portion disposition concave portion 711 b, a fourth base side rib 713, a fourth inner rib 714 and a fourth outer rib 715. The driving portion disposition concave portion 711b is a portion where driving means for rotationally driving the fourth effect member 760 is disposed, which is at the center of the bottom plate 711 in the width direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 24) and above the opening 711a. And is recessed in the bottom plate 711 as a rectangular recess in a front view.

  A support wall 711c is erected along the outer edge of the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b, and a front cover 716 is fastened and fixed to an erect end of the support wall 711c. The front cover 716 is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in a front view, and is covered only on the upper portion (upper side in FIG. 24) of the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b.

  Accordingly, the lower end side (the opening 711a side, the lower side in FIG. 24) of the front cover 716 is opened (see FIG. 23), and the base side of the fourth effect member 760 is described later The fourth effect member 760 can be rotated about its axially supported portion while being pivotally supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L. In addition, a pair of holding recesses (not shown) having a circular front view are provided on the back of the front cover 716 (the back surface in FIG. 24), and the pair of holding recesses are used for the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L. The tips are respectively fitted and held. Here, with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, the drive means arrange | positioned by drive part arrangement | positioning recessed part 711b is demonstrated.

  FIG. 25 is a partially enlarged front view of the fourth case 710 in which the drive portion disposition concave portion 711 b is partially magnified, and FIG. 26 is a portion in the fourth case 710 where the drive portion concave portion 711 b is partially magnified. It is an expansion front perspective view. In FIG. 26, the state in which the right gear member 790R is removed is illustrated, and the positioning jig JG for positioning the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R in the rotational direction is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, in the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b, the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L, the drive gear 770, the direction conversion gear 780, the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L. And are arranged. The direction conversion gear 780 is rotatably supported by the support shaft (not shown) and the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L by the gear shaft 718 so as to be rotatable on the bottom surface of the drive portion recess 711b. A circumferential groove is recessed at the tip end of the gear shaft 718, and a retaining ring M fitted in the circumferential groove is used as a retainer for the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L.

  The right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L are members for rotatably supporting the base end side of the fourth effect member 760 (see FIGS. 33 to 35), and are formed in a cylindrical shape from a wrought material. Ru. The right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L are disposed at a predetermined interval in the width direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 25) of the fourth case 710, and forward from the bottom of the drive portion recess 711b (FIG. 25). Both are erected vertically toward the front of the paper).

  A fourth drive motor (not shown) is disposed on the back side (the rear side of the paper surface of FIG. 25) of the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b. The direction conversion gear 780 and the right gear member 790R are engaged with the drive gear 770 fixed to the drive shaft of the fourth drive motor, and the left gear member 790L is engaged with the direction conversion gear 780. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the fourth drive motor is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force of the drive shaft is directly transmitted to the right gear member 790R and transmitted to the left gear member 790L via the direction conversion gear 780. Thus, the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L are respectively rotated in opposite directions.

  The drive gear 770 and the direction conversion gear 780 are formed as gears having the same number of teeth. That is, since the direction conversion gear 780 converts the rotation of the drive gear 770 without decelerating and converts the direction only to the left gear member 790L, the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L have the same rotational speed. Is rotated in the reverse direction.

  As shown in FIG. 26, a positioning hole 711h is formed radially outward of the gear shaft 718 in the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b, and a rotational position detection sensor S is formed radially outward of the gear shaft 718. It is arranged. The positioning hole 711h is a hole having a circular cross section into which the insertion portion JGb of the positioning jig JG is inserted, as described later.

  The rotational position detection sensor R is an optical sensor provided with a light emitting portion Ra and a light receiving portion Rb, and an opposing space of the light emitting portion Ra and the light receiving portion Rb is an annular rib 793 of the right gear member 790R (see FIGS. 27 and 28). (That is, the light emitting portion Ra and the light receiving portion Rb are disposed at positions sandwiching the annular rib 793 (see FIG. 27) from the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side). Thus, the rotational position of the right gear member 790 is detected based on the presence or absence of the intermittent portion 793a. Here, with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, the right gear member 790 will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the right gear member 790R. FIG. 28 (a) is a rear view of the right gear member 790R, and FIG. 28 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right gear member 790R taken along line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 28 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the right gear member 790R includes a gear body 791 and a projecting pin 792 projecting from the front side (the lower surface of FIG. 28B) of the gear body 791. An annular rib 793 projecting from the back side of the gear main body opposite to the projecting pin 792 is provided, and the gear main body 791, the projecting pin 792 and the annular rib 793 are integrally formed of a resin material .

  The gear main body 791 is formed in a disk shape, and a support hole 791a through which the gear shaft 718 (see FIG. 26) is inserted is formed in the center along the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 28B). At the same time, a positioning hole 791b, through which the positioning jig JG (see FIG. 26) is inserted, is formed to penetrate along the axial direction at a position eccentric from the pivotal support hole 791a. The shaft support hole 791a and the positioning hole 791b are both formed as holes having a circular cross section. Further, teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear main body 791 over a substantially half circumference. The protruding pin 792 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and protrudes in parallel with the axial center (axial support hole 791a) of the gear main body 791 and is located eccentrically from the axial center of the gear main body 791.

  A sliding cylinder L (see FIG. 26) is rotatably attached to the projecting pin 792. The sliding cylinder L comprises a cylindrical main body having a support hole and a flange-like flange projecting radially outward from an axial end of the main body, and the flange is a gear main body. It is attached to the projecting pin 792 in a posture directed to the front of 791. That is, the sliding cylinder L has a diameter of the flange portion larger than the groove width of the guide grooves 762La and 762Ra (see FIGS. 31 and 32) of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R described later The diameter of the groove is slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide grooves 762La and 762Ra of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R, and the main body portion is slidably inserted into the guide grooves 762La and 762Ra.

  The annular rib 793 is a portion detected by the rotational position detection sensor R, and is formed in a cylindrical shape (that is, an annular shape in a back view shown in FIG. 28A). In the annular rib 793, an intermittent portion 793a is formed by cutting out (dividing) a part of the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, a central angle of 15 degrees).

  Here, when the right gear member 790R is pivotally supported by the gear shaft 718 (see FIGS. 25 and 26), the annular rib 793 is disposed between the facing surfaces of the light emitting portion Ra and the light receiving portion Rb of the rotational position detection sensor R. Be done. Therefore, the rotational position detection sensor R can intercept the light emitted from the light emitting portion Ra by the annular rib 793 and can not receive light by the light receiving portion Rb, or can pass the intermittent portion 793a and receive light by the light receiving portion Rb Therefore, the rotational position of the right gear member 790R can be detected.

  As described above, the gear member 790R has the cylindrical annular rib 793 erected on the back surface of the gear main body 791, and a part of the annular rib 793 is cut away to form the intermittent portion 793a, thereby detecting the rotational position. While enabling detection of the rotational position by the sensor R, the rigidity of the gear member 790R can be simultaneously improved. For example, a plate-shaped plate to be detected is projected radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear main body 791 from which the teeth are not provided, and the plate to be detected is the outer peripheral side of the gear main body 791 A configuration is also conceivable in which detection is performed by the rotational position detection sensor R disposed at.

  However, in this configuration, since it is necessary to secure the movement space of the detection plate projected radially outward around the gear member 790R, the space necessary for disposition of the gear member 790R increases. Further, even if such a plate-like plate to be detected is projected from the outer peripheral surface, improvement in the rigidity of the gear main body 791 can not be expected.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the annular rib 793 is erected on the back surface of the gear main body 791. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure a moving space on the outer peripheral side of the gear main body 791. The required space can be reduced. In addition, the rigidity of the gear main body 791 can be improved by the cylindrical annular rib 793 standingly provided on the rear surface of the gear main body 791.

  The right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L are formed in a symmetrical shape, and the elements have the same configuration. Therefore, the corresponding components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Referring back to FIGS. 25 and 26, a method of assembling the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R, which are formed as described above, into the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b will be described. Positioning jig JG is disposed between gripping portion JGa for gripping by the operator, columnar insertion portion JGb formed coaxially with gripping portion JGa, and gripping portion JGa and insertion portion JGb. A flange portion JGc which is provided and which protrudes radially outward is formed.

  When the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R are assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (axially supported by the gear shaft 718), positioning (phase alignment) of the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R in the rotational direction is performed. There is a need to do. When the rotational direction position (phase) of the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R is deviated from the proper rotational direction position, the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R connected via the projecting pins 792 (see FIG. 33 to 35) (for example, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can not be properly brought into contact with each other in the lowered position (a ).

  In the present embodiment, by using the positioning jig JG, the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R can be assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b at an appropriate rotational direction position (phase). For example, when the right gear member 790R is assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b, first, the insertion portion JGb of the positioning jig JG is inserted into the positioning hole 791b of the right gear member 790R, and the tip of the insertion portion JGb is the right gear It projects from the back of the member 790R (gear main body 791). Then, while inserting the tip of the gear shaft 718 into the insertion hole 791a of the right gear member 790R (gear main body 791), the tip of the insertion portion JGb projecting from the back of the right gear member 790R (gear main 791) It is inserted into the positioning hole 711 of the provided recess 711 b.

  Thereby, it is possible to position the rotational direction position (phase) about the gear shaft 718 of the right gear member 790R, so that the right gear member 790R is meshed with the drive gear 770 while maintaining this posture. Thus, the right gear member 790R can be assembled in a proper state. The method of assembling the left gear member 790L to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b is also the same, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring back to FIG. The fourth base rib 713 is erected from the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710 between the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b and the opening 711a. The fourth base rib 713 is a rib for guiding the base end side of the fourth effect member 760 (see FIG. 23) of the fourth unit 700, and protrudes from the front of the bottom plate 711 as a protrusion having a semicircular cross section. It is curved and extended in an arc shape having a center on the side of the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L.

  The fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 are erected from the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710 on the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 24) of the opening 711 a. Here, the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged front view of the fourth case 710 in which a region where the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 are formed is partially enlarged. As shown in FIG. 29, the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 are ribs for guiding the tip side (tip portions 760L and 760R) of the fourth effect member 760 of the fourth unit 700 (see FIG. 29). 23), which are projected from the front of the bottom plate 411 of the fourth case 710 as a protrusion having a semicircular cross section.

  Here, in the front view of the bottom plate 711 in the fourth case 710, the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 have a right portion (a portion positioned below the right support shaft 717R, right portion in FIG. 29) The left part (the part located below the left support shaft 717L, the left part in FIG. 24) has an arc shape with the right support shaft 717R as a center while being curved and extended in an arc shape with the support shaft 717L as a center It is curved and extended. The central portion is curved and extended in an arc shape in which the right and left portions are smoothly connected. Thereby, the tip side (tip parts 760L and 760R) of the fourth effect member 760 can be guided smoothly.

  Similar to the third inner rib 622 in the third base body 620 (see FIG. 22), the fourth inner rib 714 is divided at two places in the extending direction thereof by the openings 711 a. Further, in the fourth case 710, the fourth outer rib 715 is also divided at two places in the extending direction. The area where the fourth outer rib 715 is divided (the area in which the fourth outer rib 715 is not formed) is hereinafter referred to as "divided area 711 d". Therefore, the divided area 711 d is formed as a flat surface flush with the front surface of the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710.

  Thus, by dividing the two places, the height of the standing height from the bottom plate 711 is directed toward the end in the vicinity of the end where the third inner rib 714 divided into three is located across the opening 711a. (That is, the standing tip (the front side in FIG. 29) is inclined downward toward the end). This downward inclined area is hereinafter referred to as "inclined portion 714a".

  Similarly, by dividing the two portions, the third outer rib 715 divided in three has a vertical height from the bottom plate 711 directed toward the end in the vicinity of the end positioned across the divided region 711d. Gradually lower according to (the erecting tip is inclined downward to the end). This downward inclined area is hereinafter referred to as "inclined portion 715a".

  The width of the forming area of the dividing area 711d (the length in the extending direction in which the fourth outer rib 715 is divided) is the width dimension of the tip portions 760L and 760R of the fourth effect member 760 (FIG. 31A and FIG. It is slightly larger than the horizontal dimension in FIG. 31 (d). The inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714 at the center of the fourth inner rib 714 divided into three is a tip of the fourth effect member 760 when the tip portions 760L and 760R of the fourth effect member 760 are located in the dividing region 711d. The portions 760L and 760R can be supported (the portions overlapping the tip portions 760L and 760R in a front view) (see FIG. 34).

  Here, when the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 are divided, the tip portions 764L and 764R can not be lifted from the front surface of the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710 in the divided region. The effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R (curved portions 761L and 761R) may collide with the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711a. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the tip end portions 764L and 764R are located in the divided region of the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715, the edge of the curved portions 761L and 761R is the opening 711a. It is configured to pass through the inner peripheral edge and overlap the front of the bottom plate 711 in front view (see FIGS. 33 to 35). Therefore, when the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R rotate between the raised position and the lowered position with the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L as a rotation center, the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are Collision with the inner peripheral edge portion of the opening 621 can be suppressed.

  Referring back to FIG. The fourth effect member 760 is supported by being supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L at the base side, and is supported at the tip end side (tip portions 760L, 760R) by the fourth inner rails 714 and the fourth It is disposed on the front side of the outer rail 715 (the front side in FIG. 23). Here, the detailed configuration of the fourth effect member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32.

  FIG. 30 is a front perspective view of the fourth effect member 760. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 30, the fourth effect member 760 includes a left effect member 760L and a right effect member 760R. The left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are pivotally supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L in a state where their base end sides (the upper side in FIG. 30) cross each other (see FIG. 23). Therefore, the shapes of the base end sides (the extending portions 763L and 763R) are different. However, except for the shapes of the extended portions 763L and 763R, the other portions of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are formed substantially in left-right symmetry.

  First, the left effect member 760L of the fourth effect member 760 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 (a) is a front view of the left effect member 760L, and FIG. 31 (b) is a side view of the left effect member 760L in the arrow XXXIb direction view of FIG. 31 (a), FIG. 31 (c) FIG. 31C is a partially enlarged rear view of the left directing member 760L in the arrow XXXIc direction view of FIG. 31 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the left effect member 760L includes a curved portion 761L and a base portion 762L extended upward (upper side in FIG. 31A) from the upper end edge of the curved portion 761L. An extending portion 763L obliquely extending upward from the upper end edge of the base 762L and a lower side opposite to the extending direction of the base 762L from the lower end edge of the curved portion 761L (FIG. 31 (a) And a tip portion 764L extending downward).

  The curved portion 761 L is formed in a C-shape in which the annular body is equally divided into two in left and right in front view (see FIG. 31A), and is disposed at the lowered position (see FIGS. 23 and 35). An annular shape is formed together with the curved portion 761R of the effect member 760R. A geometric decorative shape is provided on the front side of the curved portion 761L. Further, in the curved portion 761L, a mating surface 761La is formed on the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 31A) side surface.

  The base portion 762L is formed in a flat plate shape, and is formed to project horizontally (parallel to the bending portion 761L) from the outer side surface of the bending portion 761L as shown in FIG. 31 (b). The rear surface (the surface on the right side in FIG. 31B) of the base portion 762L is formed flush with the rear surface of the curved portion 761L, and a fourth base rib 713 (a projection on the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710). (See FIG. 24).

  As shown in FIG. 31C, a guide groove 762La is recessed on the back surface of the base 762L. The guide groove 762La is a concave groove having an oblong shape in a front view that is linearly extended along the extending direction of the extending portion 763L, and the protruding pin 792 of the left gear member 790L slides on the guide groove 762La. By being inserted through the movable barrel L, the left effect member 760L and the left gear member 790L are connected.

  The extending portion 763L is a portion formed in a flat plate shape, and is disposed on the tip end side (upper side of FIG. 31A) of the base portion 762L in a state of being raised to the front side (left side of FIG. 31B). . Specifically, the base end side (the lower side in FIG. 31B) of the extended portion 763L is superimposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 31B) of the base portion 762L, whereby the thickness of the base portion 762L (FIG. 31) The back surface of the extended portion 763L is raised from the back surface of the base portion 762L by the thickness of the horizontal dimension). The extended portion 763R of the right rendering member 760R can be disposed in the space on the back side (right side in FIG. 31B) of the extended portion 763L formed by this bulking. That is, the extended portion 763L of the left effect member 760L and the extended portion 763R of the right effect member 760R can intersect (see FIG. 23).

  A shaft support hole 763La, which is circular in a front view, is formed through the tip end side of the extended portion 763L. The right support shaft 717R is inserted into the shaft support hole 763La, whereby the left effect member 760L is rotatably supported (suspended) on the right support shaft 717R. The axial center of the axial support hole 763La is located on a straight line passing through the widthwise center of the guide groove 762La (an extension of the guide groove 762La), as shown in FIG. 31 (c).

  Here, the axial support hole 763La (axial center) of the left effect member 760L passes through the mating surface 761a and the side surface of the base 762L (right side surface in FIG. 31A) in the front view shown in FIG. It is disposed at a position offset by a distance L3 to the opposite side (right side of FIG. 31A) to the bending portion 761L with respect to the virtual straight line M1. Further, the curved portion 761L is curved in a convex arc shape toward the opposite side (left side in FIG. 31A) to the side where the axial support hole 763La is offset, so that the center of gravity of the left effect member 760L is virtual. With respect to the straight line M <b> 1, the curved portion 761 </ b> L side (ie, the side opposite to the right effect member 761 </ b> R, the left side in FIG. 31A) is biased.

  Thus, when the support hole 763L of the extending portion 763L is supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left effect member 760L is suspended, the center of gravity of the left effect member 760L is positioned vertically below the support hole 763La. By the action of gravity, the mating surface 761La is the opposite side of the curved portion 761L (that is, the side of the right producing member 761R side) than the vertical line (line along the direction of gravity) passing through the axial center of the axial support hole 763L. 31 (a) on the right). Therefore, when the fourth effect member 760 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIGS. 23 and 35), the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other as described later.

  On the outer side surface of the extending portion 763L, a relief concave portion 763Lc is recessed in a semicircular shape in a front view. The escape recess 763Lc is a recess for letting the left support shaft 717L escape when the left effect member 760L is disposed at the raised position. Since the left support shaft 717L can be disposed close to the left gear member 790L by the amount of the relief concave portion 763Lc, the space necessary for disposition of the both members 717L and 790L can be reduced.

  The front end portion 764L protrudes from the front of the third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 (both of which are shown in FIG. 22) and the fourth case 710 (bottom plate 711) protruding from the back of the third base body 620. It is a part disposed between the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 (see FIGS. 23 and 24) and is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular shape in a front view.

  A wall is erected along the outer edge of the front surface (the front surface in FIG. 31A) of the front end 764L to improve the rigidity of the front end 764L. The front end surface of the wall provided upright on the front of the front end 764L and the back of the front end 764L are formed as flat surfaces parallel to each other and parallel to the back of the base 762L.

  Next, the right effect member 760R of the fourth effect member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 32. 32 (a) is a front view of the right effect member 760R, and FIG. 32 (b) is a side view of the right effect member 760R in the arrow XXXIIb direction view of FIG. 32 (a), FIG. 32 (c) FIG. 32B is a partially enlarged rear view of the right directing member 760R in the direction of the arrow XXXIIc in FIG. 32 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 32, the right effect member 760R includes a curved portion 761R and a base portion 762R extended upward (upper side in FIG. 32A) from the upper end edge of the curved portion 761R; An extending portion 763R obliquely extending upward from the upper end edge of the base 762R, and a lower side opposite to the extending direction of the base 762R from the lower end edge of the bending portion 761R (FIG. 32 (a) And a tip portion 764R extending downward).

  Here, right directing member 760R differs from left directing member 760L in which extending portion 763L is raised on the front side with respect to base 762 in that extension 763R is not raised in the front side with respect to base 762R. The other configuration (curved portion 761R, base portion 762R and tip portion 764R) is formed in the same (in detail, symmetrical shape) as each configuration (curved portion 761L, base portion 762L and tip portion 764L) of the left effect member 760L. . Therefore, the description of those identical (symmetrical) configurations is omitted.

  The extending portion 763R is formed in a flat plate shape, and the base end side thereof is continuously provided on the side surface of the base 762R. That is, the extending portion 763R is formed as a portion in which the base portion 762R is extended in the same plane. Thus, the extension portion 763R can be disposed in the space on the back side of the raised extension portion 763L. That is, the thickness dimension (the dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 32B) of the extending portion 763R in the right rendering member 760R is the bulk size of the extending portion 763L in the left rendering member 760L (the back surface of the extending portion 763L and the curved portion 761L The distance between it and the back surface (see FIG. 31 (b)) is slightly smaller, so that the extending portion 763L of the left rendering member 760L and the extending portion 763R of the right rendering member 760R intersect with each other. Yes (see FIG. 23).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are between the curved portions 761L and 761R and the extended portions 763L and 763R (axial support holes 763La and 763Ra). Bases 762L and 762R (guide grooves 762La and 762Ra) are disposed to be formed. In this case, the extending portions 763L and 763R (axial support holes 763La and 763Ra) can be disposed and formed between the curved portions 761L and 761R and the bases 762L and 762R (guide grooves 762La and 762Ra). The space between the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R needs to be increased, resulting in poor space efficiency. In addition, the diameter of the drive gear 770 and the direction conversion gear 780 needs to be increased accordingly. On the other hand, according to the arrangement of the present embodiment, the space between the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R can be narrowed, so that the space efficiency can be improved. In addition, the diameter of the drive gear 770 and the direction conversion gear 780 can be reduced accordingly.

  On the outer side surface of the extending portion 763R, a relief concave portion 763Rc is concavely provided in a semicircular shape in a front view. The relief recess 763Rc is a recess for releasing the right support shaft 717R when the right effect member 760R is disposed at the raised position (see FIG. 33), similarly to the release recess 763Lc in the left effect member 760L described above. Since the right support shaft 717R can be disposed close to the right gear member 790R by the amount of the relief concave portion 763Rc, the space required to arrange both members 717R and 790R can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33 to FIG. 35, the holding structure of the fourth effect member 760 arranged at the raised position and the lowered position and the rotational operation of the fourth effect member 760 between the raised position and the lowered position will be described. In addition, since the holding structure and the rotation operation of the fourth effect member 760 are the same in both the right effect member 760R and the left effect member 760L, the right effect member 760R will be described as a representative example.

  Fig.33 (a) is a front schematic diagram of the 4th unit 700 in the state by which the right rendering member 760R is arrange | positioned in the raise position, FIG.33 (b) is the 4th unit in the XXXIIIb part of Fig.33 (a). FIG. 7 is a partial enlarged schematic view of 700.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the present embodiment, when the right effect member 760R is disposed at the raised position, a straight line L1 connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the left support shaft 717L, and the projecting pin 792 And the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the gear shaft 718 is orthogonal (that is, the angle .theta. = 90 degrees).

  Thereby, even if an external force acts on the right effect member 760R, no force component in a direction to rotate the right gear member 790R (ie, a force component in a direction orthogonal to the straight line L2) is generated, and the rotation of the right gear member 790R Can be regulated. Specifically, for example, even if the right directing member 760 tries to rotate clockwise as shown in FIG. 33A about the left support shaft 717L by the gravity acting on the mass of the right directing member 760R itself, the rotation is Since the protrusion pin 792 is pressed toward the gear shaft 718 (that is, in the direction along the straight line L2) on the inner wall surface of the groove 762Ra, the direction to rotate the right gear member 790R (direction orthogonal to the straight line L2) The right gear member 790R can not be rotated.

  As a result, since the right effect member 760R can be mechanically maintained at the raised position shown in FIG. 33A, the driving force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) can be reduced (or released). it can. As a result, it is possible to miniaturize the capacity of the fourth drive motor and to suppress the energy consumption.

  FIG. 34 (a) is a schematic front view of the fourth unit 700 in a state in which the right effect member 760R is disposed between the raised position and the lowered position, and FIG. 34 (b) is a sectional view of FIG. It is a partial expansion schematic diagram of the 4th unit 700 in a XXXIVb part.

  When the fourth drive motor is rotationally driven from the state shown in FIG. 33 and the right gear member 790R is rotated counterclockwise about FIG. 33 (a) about the gear shaft 718 by the rotational drive force, the projecting pins A right effecting member 760R, which is moved toward one end of the guide groove 762Ra (end close to the left support shaft 717L) along the guide groove 762Ra, the centering member 760R located at the rising position is centered on the left support shaft 717L As it is rotated. Thereby, the rotation (lowering) of the right effect member 760R to the lower position is started.

  When rotation (descent) of the right effect member 760R toward the descent position is started, in the process of rotation (descent), the projecting pin 792 is one end of the guide groove 762Ra (the side closer to the left support shaft 717L After being moved towards the end by a predetermined amount, a change of direction of the movement occurs and is moved in the reverse direction. That is, the projecting pin 792 moving toward one end of the guide groove 762Ra changes direction and moves toward the other end of the guide groove 762a (the end remote from the left support shaft 717L).

  Thus, when the direction change of the movement direction of the protrusion pin 792 occurs, the change in the direction of the force acting on the inner wall surface of the guide groove 762Ra from the protrusion pin 792 becomes discontinuous at the time of the direction change. Since the behavior of the effect member 760R becomes unstable, it causes a runaway (flapping) of the tip 764R of the right effect member 760R. Therefore, the tip portion 764R is difficult to move by being locked (sandwiched) between the third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 and the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 facing each other ( Alternatively, it may not be possible to move, and smooth rotation of the right directing member 760R may be impeded.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the right gear member 790R is in the phase (or near the phase in which the direction of movement of the protruding pin 792 is changed in the guide groove 762Ra). Is reached, the tip portion 764R of the right effect member 760R is configured to be located in the divided area 711d. That is, when the front end portion 764R of the right effect member 760R is positioned in the dividing area 711d (or positioned in the dividing area 711d and the inclined portion 715a), the moving direction of the protruding pin 792 is changed. Ru.

  As a result, even if the tipping portion 764R of the right rendering member 760R undergoes a bounce when the direction of movement of the projecting pin 792 is changed, the tip portion 764R is utilized by using the space formed by the dividing region 711d. Can be prevented from being locked between the opposing surfaces of the third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 and the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715. Therefore, movement of the tip portion 764R of the right effect member 760R can be secured, and smooth rotation of the right effect member 760R about the left support shaft 717L can be obtained.

  Further, in this case, when the tip end portion 764R of the right effect member 760R is located at (or near) the dividing region 711d, the tip end portion 764R is the inclined portion 622a of the third inner rib 622 and the fourth inner rib 714. , 714a, the inclination of the inclined portions 622a, 714a can be used to early recover from the flapping of the tip 764R. In particular, since the third inner rib 622 and the fourth inner rib 714 are portions that abut on the root side (the curved portion 761 R side) of the tip portion 764R, the third outer rib 623 and the fourth outer rib 715 described above It is possible to achieve coexistence with the suppression effect of the tip portion 764R being locked (sandwiched) between the facings.

  Here, when the right effect member 760R is further rotated (lowered) from the state where the tip end portion 764R is located in the divided area 711d as shown in FIG. 34 toward the lowered position (see FIG. 35), as described above The tip end portion 764R is first lifted to the inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714, and when the right effect member 760R further rotates (is lowered) to the lowered position, the side edge portion in the advancing direction of the tip portion 764R (FIG. The left side passes through the inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714, and the tip 764R is completely lifted (bulked) from the front of the bottom plate 711 by the fourth inner rib 714.

  In the present embodiment, the joint surface 761Ra of the curved portion 761R is the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711a after at least the side edge (left side in FIG. 34) of the leading end 764R in the advancing direction passes the inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714 When the side edge (the left side in FIG. 34) of the leading end 764R in the advancing direction passes the inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714, the curved portion 761R There is a gap between the mating surface 761Ra and the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711a). Accordingly, when the right effect member 760R is rotated (lowered) from the raised position to the lowered position, it can be suppressed that the mating surface 761Ra of the right effect member 760R collides with the inner peripheral edge portion of the opening 711a. .

  FIG. 35 (a) is a schematic front view of the fourth unit 700 in a state where the right rendering member 760R is disposed at the lowered position, and FIG. 35 (b) is a fourth unit in the XXXVb portion of FIG. 35 (a). FIG. 7 is a partial enlarged schematic view of 700.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the present embodiment, when the right effect member 760R is disposed at the lowered position, a straight line L1 connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the left support shaft 717L, and the projecting pin 792 And the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the gear shaft 718 is orthogonal (that is, the angle .theta. = 90 degrees).

  Thus, even when an external force is applied to the right effect member 760R, a force component in a direction to rotate the right gear member 790R (that is, a force component in a direction orthogonal to the straight line L2) is generated. Therefore, the rotation of the right gear member 790R can be restricted. Therefore, for example, even if the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is shaken by the player, it is possible to suppress rattling of the right effect member 760R in the direction of rotation about the left support shaft 717L. As a result, even in the lowered position, even when affected by the disturbance, the postures of the right effect member 760R and the left effect member 760L are maintained in a state in which the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La are in contact and in close contact with each other (see FIG. 23). be able to.

  Here, when the displacement of the right effect member 760R in the stopped state is started, the load of the fourth drive motor (not shown) is increased due to the influence of the inertial force and the static frictional force. In particular, when rotating (raising) the right effect member 760R in the lowered position toward the raised position, it is necessary to drive against the mass (gravity) of the right effect member 760R, so the load of the fourth drive motor Becomes larger.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when the right directing member 760R is stopped at the lowered position, a straight line L1 connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the left support shaft 717L and the axial center of the projecting pin 792 And the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the gear shaft 718 is orthogonal (that is, the tangential direction of the projecting pin 792 of a circle centered on the gear shaft 718 and the extending direction of the guide groove 762Ra (inner wall surface) Because the reduction gear ratio is large, the right effect member 760R rotates around the left support shaft 717L with respect to a unit rotation angle around the gear shaft 718 of the right gear member 780R. The rotation angle can be reduced. Therefore, when starting the rotation (rising) of the right effect member 760R from the lowered position, the load of the fourth drive motor can be reduced, and the capacity of the fourth drive motor can be reduced.

  Here, in the lowered position shown in FIG. 35, the right effect member 760R and the left effect member 760L abut each other on the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La to form an annular shape by the curved portions 761R and 761L ( See Figure 23). In this case, the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La can not be in close contact with each other, and when a gap is formed, the appearance of the annular shape is not adjusted, and the rendering effect is lost. However, in practice, it is difficult to bring the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La into close contact with each other due to dimensional tolerances of the respective members, shape tolerances, assembly tolerances, control errors of the fourth drive motor, or the like.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the right effect member 760R and the left effect member 760L cross the extended portions 763R and 763L with each other (that is, the right effect member 760R is the left support shaft In 717L, the left effect member 760L is suspended from the right support shaft 717R, respectively, and the suspension support points (the left support shaft 717L and the right support shaft 717R) are curved portions 761R with respect to the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La. , 761 L and offset to the opposite side. Thus, in the lowered position shown in FIG. 35, the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La can be pushed toward each other by the action of gravity that tends to position the center of gravity position vertically below the suspension support point. For example, in the case of the right effect member 760R shown in FIG. 35 (a), the mating surface 761Ra is pushed out to the left in FIG. 35a. As a result, in the lowered position, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other.

  For example, in the right effect member 760R, between the left support shaft 717L and the axial support hole 763Ra, between the guide groove 762Ra and the sliding cylinder L, between the sliding cylinder L and the protruding pin 792, or Since there is a gap between the gear shaft 718 and the insertion hole 791a, the portion of the gap pushes the mating surface 761Ra to the other side (the mating surface 761La side of the left effect member 760L, left side in FIG. 35A). . Therefore, in the lowered position, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other.

  When the right effect member 760R is rotated (raised) from the lowered position to the raised position shown in FIG. 35 (see FIGS. 33 and 34), in the present embodiment, the tip portion 764R is the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth. With the outer rib 715 completely lifted (bulked) from the front of the bottom plate 711, the outer peripheral edge (the side edge in the traveling direction, right side in FIG. 35) of the curved portion 761 R is the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711 a It is formed to pass through.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, at least the side edge (left side in FIG. 35) opposite to the direction of movement of the tip 764R is lifted by at least one of the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715. (Ie, in a state before the side edge opposite to the advancing direction of the tip 764R reaches both the inclined portions 714a and 715a), the outer peripheral edge of the bending portion 761R passes the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711a When the side edge portion (left side in FIG. 35) opposite to the advancing direction of the tip portion 764R reaches the inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714, the curved portion 761R is The outer peripheral edge has already passed through the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711 a). Thus, when the right effect member 760R is rotated (raised) from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer peripheral edge portion of the right effect member 760R can be prevented from colliding with the inner peripheral edge portion of the opening 711a. .

  The assembled state of the first unit 400 to the fourth unit 700 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG.

  36 and 37 are partially exploded front exploded perspective views of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 36 is a front exploded perspective view of the first unit 400, the third unit 600, and the fourth unit 700. 37 is a front exploded perspective view of the second unit 500, the third unit 600, and the fourth unit 700. FIG. In FIGS. 36 and 37, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the respective units 400 to 700 are schematically illustrated, and only the reference numerals necessary for the description of the assembled state are illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the first unit 400, the third unit 600, and the fourth unit 700, the third unit 600 is accommodated in the internal space of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, and the third unit 600. The first unit 400 is stacked on the front side of the second unit 400, and the first unit 400 is assembled to be connected to the fourth unit 700.

  More specifically, the third unit 600 stacks the back surface of the third base body 620 on the front surface of the bottom plate 711 in the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700. Thus, the to-be-fastened portion 624 of the third base body 620 is placed on the pedestal portion 711e of the fourth case 710, so the to-be-fastened portion 624 is fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 711e by a fastening screw (not shown). . As a result, the third unit 600 is disposed (connected) to the fourth unit 700.

  The first unit 400 stacks the back surface of the first base body 420 on the front of the third base body 620 and the third cover body 630 in the third unit 600. Thereby, the to-be-fastened portion 425 of the first base body 420 is placed on the pedestal portion 635 of the third base body 620, so the to-be-fastened portion 425 is fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 635 by a fastening screw (not shown). Do. As a result, the first unit 400 is disposed (connected) to the third unit 600.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative connection plate 450 in the first unit 400 is further inserted into the to-be-fastened hole 712 a of the fourth case 710 in the fourth unit 700 by a fastening screw (not shown) inserted through the insertion hole 451. Fasten and fix. Thus, the first unit 400 is connected to the fourth unit 700. That is, when the third unit 600 and the first unit 400 are accommodated in a state where they are stacked in the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, the first unit 400 at the top layer and the fourth unit 700 at the bottom layer Since connection is possible, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be secured. Thereby, even if each effect member 460, 660, 760 of each unit 400, 600, 700 operates, its wobble (displacement of the third unit 600 and the first unit 400 with respect to the fourth unit 700) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to operate each of the effect members 460, 660, 760 more quickly (speeding up of the operation).

  In addition, as described above, the portion where the to-be-fastened hole 712a is formed is flanged outward from the standing end of the wall portion 712 of the fourth case 710 (upper side in FIG. 36). Not only can the accommodation capacity of each of the units 400 to 600 in the fourth case 710 be ensured, but the flange-like overhanging portion can function as a reinforcing rib to increase the rigidity of the fourth case body 710 itself. As a result, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be enhanced, and the wobbling at the time of operation of each of the effect members 460 to 760 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in the second unit 500, the third unit 600 and the fourth unit 700, the third unit 600 is accommodated in the internal space of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, and the third unit 600 The second unit 500 is stacked on the front side of the second unit 500, and the second unit 500 is assembled to be connected to the fourth unit 700.

  More specifically, as in the case described above, the third unit 600 stacks the back surface of the third base body 620 on the front surface of the bottom plate 711 in the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700. Thus, the to-be-fastened portion 624 of the third base body 620 is placed on the pedestal portion 711e of the fourth case 710, so the to-be-fastened portion 624 is fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 711e by a fastening screw (not shown). . As a result, the third unit 600 is disposed (connected) to the fourth unit 700.

  The second unit 500 stacks the back surface of the second base body 520 on the front surface of the third base body 620 in the third unit 600. Thus, the to-be-fastened portion 525 of the second base body 520 is placed on the pedestal portion 625 of the third base body 620, so the to-be-fastened portion 525 is fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 625 by a fastening screw (not shown). Do. As a result, the second unit 500 is disposed (connected) to the third unit 600.

  In the present embodiment, the to-be-fastened portion 626 of the second base body 520 in the second unit 500 is further fastened and fixed to the pedestal 711 f of the fourth case 710 in the fourth unit 700 by a fastening screw (not shown). Thus, the second unit 500 is connected to the fourth unit 700. That is, when the third unit 600 and the second unit 500 are accommodated in a state where they are stacked in the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, the uppermost second unit 500 and the lowermost fourth unit 700 can be Since connection is possible, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be secured. Thereby, even if each effect member 560, 660, 760 of each unit 500, 600, 700 operates, its wobble (displacement of the third unit 600 and the second unit 500 with respect to the fourth unit 700) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to operate each of the effect members 560, 660, 760 more quickly (speeding up of the operation).

  As described above, the regulation wall 711fa is erected around the pedestal portion 711f, and when stacking the second unit 500, the positioning of the to-be-fastened portion 526 with respect to the pedestal portion 711f is performed using the regulation wall 711fa Can be done. Thus, the assemblability can be improved. Further, the restricting portion 711fa is formed so as to surround two sides of the outer edge of the fastened portion 526, and movement (displacement) of the fastened portion 526 on the pedestal portion 711f can be restricted by the restricting portion 711fa. The connection strength can be increased. As a result, rattling of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the pedestal portion 711 f is formed so as to protrude outward (right side in FIG. 37) from the erected end of the wall portion 712 of the fourth case 710, whereby each unit 400 to the fourth case 710 is formed. Not only can the storable amount of ~ 600 be secured, but also the pedestal portion 711 f can function as a reinforcing rib to increase the rigidity of the fourth case body 710 itself. As a result, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be enhanced, and the wobbling at the time of operation of each of the effect members 460 to 760 can be suppressed.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38 to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the crank mechanism for rotationally driving the right effect member 760R and the left effect member 760L is described by the two members of the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R, but the second embodiment The crank mechanism in is constituted by one member (gear member 2790). The same parts as those in the above embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a partially enlarged front view of the fourth case 2710 in which the drive portion disposition concave portion 2711 b in the second embodiment is partially enlarged. FIG. 39 is a drive portion arrangement in which the vicinity of the gear member 2790 is partially enlarged. It is a partially expanded front schematic diagram of the provided recessed part 2711b. 39 (a) shows a state in which the protruding pin 2792 is in the raised position, and FIG. 39 (b) shows a state in which the protruding pin 2792 is between the raised position and the lowered position in FIG. 39 (c). The figures show the state in which the protruding pin 2792 is in the lowered position.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L, the drive gear 770, the gear member 2790 meshed with the drive gear 770, and the gear member 2790 are provided in the drive portion disposition recess 2711b. The link member 2791 whose lower end (the lower side in FIG. 38) is rotatably connected, the projecting pin 2792 protruding from the upper end (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the link member 2791, and the rear side of the link member 2791 An elongated hole-shaped guide groove 2711g is provided in which a guide pin (not shown) to be provided is inserted.

  A fourth drive motor (not shown) is disposed on the back side (the rear side of the page of FIG. 38) of the drive portion disposition concave portion 2711b, and a drive gear 770 fixed to the drive shaft of the fourth drive motor is disposed. The gear member 2790 is engaged. The gear member 2790 is rotatably supported by the gear shaft 2718 on the bottom surface of the drive portion disposition recess 2711 b. Therefore, when the fourth drive motor is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force is transmitted to the gear member 2790 through the drive gear 770, whereby the gear member 2790 is rotated about the gear shaft 2718. .

  The gear member 2790 has a gear body, a connecting shaft 2790a protruding from the front side (the front side in FIG. 38) of the gear body, and a rear side of the gear body opposite to the connecting shaft 2790a (FIG. 38). The gear main body, the connecting shaft 2790a and the annular rib are integrally formed of a resin material.

  The gear main body is formed in a disk shape, and rotatably supported by the drive portion disposition concave portion 2711 b via a gear shaft 2718 inserted at the center thereof. Teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear main body over substantially a half circumference. The connecting shaft 2790a is formed in a cylindrical shape, protrudes in parallel with the shaft center (gear shaft 2718) of the gear main body, and is eccentrically located from the shaft center of the gear main body.

  The annular rib is a portion detected by a rotational position detection sensor R (see FIG. 26) disposed on the back side of the gear member 2790, and has a similar shape (similar shape) to the annular rib 793 in the first embodiment. It is formed. That is, the intermittent portion is formed in the annular rib by cutting out (dividing) a part in the circumferential direction, and the rotational position of the gear member 2790 is detected based on the presence or absence of the intermittent portion.

  The link member 2791 is a long plate-like member, and the lower end in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 38) is rotatably supported by the connecting shaft 2790a of the gear main body 2790. A projecting pin 2792 is provided on the upper end (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the link member 2791 from the front side (the front side in FIG. 38) and a guide pin (shown in FIG. ) Is projected.

  The protruding pin 2792 is a portion inserted into the guide groove 2762a (see FIGS. 40 to 42) of the right producing member 2760R and the left producing member 2760L, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is disposed parallel to the connecting shaft 2790a. Ru. The guide pin is a portion that is inserted into a guide groove 2711g formed in the drive portion disposition recess 2711b, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is disposed coaxially with the protruding pin 2792.

  The guide groove 2711g has a groove width (dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 38) slightly larger than the diameter of the guide pin of the link member 2791 (that is, guides the moving direction of the guide pin in only one direction) These grooves are recessed in the drive portion installation recess 2711b. The extending direction (longer axis direction of the oval) of the guide groove 2711g is set in a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 38) perpendicular to the direction connecting the axial centers of the left support shaft 717L and the right support shaft 717R. The axial center of the gear shaft 2718 is located on a straight line (an extension of the guide groove 2711g) passing through the center of the guide groove 2711g in the groove width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 38).

  As shown in FIG. 39, in the projecting pin 2792, the rotation of the gear member 2790 around the gear shaft 2718 is transmitted through the link member 2791 to guide grooves between the raised position and the lowered position. Reciprocate along 2711 g.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), the drive gear 770 (see FIG. 38) is driven by the rotational drive force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) from the state where the projecting pin 2792 is arranged at the raised position. When rotated in one direction, the gear member 2790 is rotated about the gear shaft 2718 in one direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 39A). As shown in FIG. 39 (b), as the gear member 2790 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 39 (a), the link member 2791 is pulled down via the connecting shaft 2790a, and the projecting pin 2792 is in the guide groove It is displaced downward along 2711 g. As shown in FIG. 39 (c), when the drive gear 770 (see FIG. 38) is further rotated in one direction by a predetermined amount by the rotational drive force of the fourth drive motor from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b). The projecting pins 2792 are disposed at the lowered position.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 39C, the drive gear 770 is rotated in the other direction by the rotational drive force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) from the state where the protruding pin 2792 is disposed at the lowered position. Then, the gear member 2790 is rotated about the gear shaft 2718 in the other direction (clockwise in FIG. 39C). As shown in FIG. 39 (b), the link member 2791 is pushed upward through the connecting shaft 2790a with the clockwise rotation of the gear member 2790 in FIG. 39 (c), and the projecting pin 2792 is in the guide groove 2711g. Is displaced upward along the As shown in FIG. 39A, when the drive gear 770 (see FIG. 38) is further rotated in the other direction by a predetermined amount by the rotational drive force of the fourth drive motor from the state shown in FIG. 39B. , And the projecting pin 2792 is disposed at the raised position.

  The protruding pins 2792 are inserted through the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra of the fourth effect member 2760 (the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R) as described later, and the protruding pins 2792 are of the gear member 2790. By rotating along the guide groove 2711g between the raised position and the lowered position along with the rotation, the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R rise with the right indication shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L as a rotation center. It is rotated (raised and lowered) between the position and the lowered position (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), in the state where the protruding pin 2792 is disposed at the raised position, the gear on the extension of a virtual straight line connecting the shaft center of the protruding pin 2792 and the shaft center of the connecting shaft 2790a. The axis of axis 2718 is located. Further, as shown in FIG. 39C, in a state where the protruding pin 2792 is disposed at the lowered position, the gear shaft 2718 is on an imaginary straight line connecting the shaft center of the protruding pin 2792 and the shaft center of the connecting shaft 2790a. The axis of is located.

  In this case, a guide pin (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the link member 2791 is inserted into the guide groove 2711g, and the movement direction is regulated by the guide groove 2711g. Therefore, the extending direction of the guide groove 2711g Only movement in the (up and down direction in FIG. 39) is permitted. Therefore, only the movement of the protruding pin 2792 disposed coaxially with the guide pin in the extending direction of the guide groove 2711g is permitted.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 39 (a) or 39 (c), in a state where the protruding pin 2792 is disposed at the raised position or the lowered position, an external force in any direction acts on the protruding pin 2792. Even if the force acting on the connecting shaft 970a from the protruding pin 2792 via the link member 2791 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the gear member 2790, the rotation of the gear member 2790 may be restricted. it can.

  FIG. 40 (a) is a front view of the left effect member 2760L, and FIG. 40 (b) is a side view of the left effect member 2760L in the direction of the arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 41 (a) is a front view of the right effect member 2760R, and FIG. 41 (b) is a side view of the right effect member 2760R in the arrow XLIb direction view of FIG. 41 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R constituting the fourth effect member 2760 in the second embodiment are different from the first in that the formation positions of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra are different. It is configured in the same manner as the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R in the embodiment.

  Specifically, in the left effect member 760L of the first embodiment, the guide groove 762La is recessed on the back surface of the base 762L (see FIG. 31C), but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A guide groove 2763La is formed through the extended portion 763L. Similarly, in the right effect member 760R of the first embodiment, the guide groove 762Ra is recessed on the back surface of the base 762R (see FIG. 32 (c)), but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A guide groove 2763Ra is formed through the provided portion 763R.

  When the shaft support hole 763La of the left effect member 2760L is axially supported by the right support shaft 717R and the shaft support hole 763Ra of the right effect member 2760R is supported by the left support shaft 717L, the guide groove 2763La and the guide groove 2763Ra cross each other. The protruding pins 2792 are inserted through the intersections of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra (see FIG. 42). Thereby, the two members of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are connected to the gear member 2790 via the link member 2791 and the projecting pin 2792.

  The guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra are formed in an oval shape in a front view, and the groove widths (the distance between the inner wall surfaces) of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra are the outer diameter of the protruding pins 2792 (see FIG. 38). Slightly larger than. In the state where the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L (see FIG. 42), the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra are imaginary straight lines M1 (see FIG. 40A). It is formed in the shape which becomes line symmetry which makes a symmetry axis.

  Then, referring to FIGS. 39, 42 and 43, the holding structure of left directing member 2760L and right directing member 2760R (fourth directing member 2760) arranged at the rising position and the lowering position, and the raising position and the lowering position. The rotation operation of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R in the interval will be described.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a schematic front view of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R in the state of being disposed at the ascending position, and FIG. 42 (b) is disposed between the ascending position and the descending position. It is a front schematic diagram of left production member 2760L and right production member 2760R in a state. FIG. 43 is a schematic front view of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R in the state of being disposed at the lowered position.

  As shown in FIG. 39, FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, when the projecting pin 2792 is raised toward the raised position, the projecting pin 2792 is moved toward the upper end of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra, and the left effect member The 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are pushed up. That is, the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are rotated (raised) around the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L and arranged at the raised position (see FIGS. 39 (a) and 42 (a)). .

  On the other hand, when the protruding pin 2792 is lowered toward the lowered position, the protruding pin 2792 is moved toward the lower end of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra, and the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are pulled down. . That is, the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are rotated (lowered) about the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L and arranged at the lowered position (see FIGS. 39C and 43).

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 42 (a), in the state where the projecting pin 2792 is disposed at the raised position, as described above, the external force in any direction is applied to the projecting pin 2792. No force component in the direction of rotating the gear member 2790 is generated by the force acting on the connecting shaft 970a from the projecting pin 2792 via the link member 2791 even if can do.

  Specifically, due to the gravity acting on the mass of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R, the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R rotate (fall) around the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L. Since the force acting in the direction to rotate the gear member 2790 does not occur even if the inner wall surfaces of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra try to push the protrusion pin 79 downward due to the action to be performed (see FIG. 39A). , The gear member 2760 can not be rotated.

  As a result, since the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R can be mechanically maintained at the raised position shown in FIG. 42A, the driving force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) is reduced (or released). Can). As a result, it is possible to miniaturize the capacity of the fourth drive motor and to suppress the energy consumption.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 39 (c) and 43, even when the projecting pin 2792 is disposed at the lowered position, as described above, an external force acts on the projecting pin 2792 in any direction. Even if the force acting on the connecting shaft 970a from the protruding pin 2792 via the link member 2791 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the gear member 2790, the rotation of the gear member 2790 may be restricted. it can.

  Thus, for example, even if the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is shaken by the player, etc., in the direction of rotation about the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R. It can suppress rattling. As a result, even in the lowered position, the postures of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are maintained in a state in which the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La are in contact with each other and in close contact with each other. be able to.

  Further, in the lowered position shown in FIG. 43, the right producing member 2760R and the left producing member 2760L abut each other on the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La to form an annular shape by the curved portions 761R and 761L (FIG. 23). According to the present embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, the right rendering member 2760R and the left rendering member 2760L are in a state in which the extending portions 763R and 763L cross each other (that is, the right rendering member 2760R The left effect member 2760L is suspended from the right support shaft 717R to the left support shaft 717L, and the suspension support points (the left support shaft 717L and the right support shaft 717R) with respect to the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La. It is offset to the opposite side to the curved portions 761R and 761L.

  Thus, in the lowered position shown in FIG. 43, the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La can be pushed toward each other by the action of gravity that tends to position the center of gravity position vertically below the suspension support point. As a result, in the lowered position, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra are made to intersect, and the protruding pin 2792 is inserted through the intersections, thereby forming one crank mechanism (gear member 2790, link member The rotation (raising and lowering) of the two members (the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R) can be achieved by the mechanism including the 2791 and the protruding pin 2792. That is, it is possible to mechanically maintain the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R in the raised position and the lowered position, thereby reducing the capacity of the fourth drive motor and suppressing the consumed energy, and the number of crank mechanisms The cost can be reduced to reduce the cost of parts.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. In the first embodiment, the positioning jig JG is used to position the rotational direction position (phase) of the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R. However, the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member in the third embodiment The 3790R can be positioned in the rotational direction (phase) without using the positioning jig JG. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a partial enlarged front view of the fourth case 3710 in which the drive portion disposition concave portion 711 b in the third embodiment is partially magnified. FIG. 45 is a fourth enlarged view of the drive portion concave portion 711 b. 15 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of a four case 3710. FIG. In FIG. 45, the state in which the right gear member 3790R is removed is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, a pair of positioning pieces 3719 are disposed radially outward (upper in FIGS. 44 and 45) of the gear shaft 718 in the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b. The pair of positioning pieces 3719 is a portion for positioning the rotational direction position (phase) of the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718), and the drive portion disposition An erected portion 3719a erected from the front (the front side in FIG. 44) of the concave portion 711b, and an overhanging portion 3719b projected toward the gear shaft 718 from the erected tip of the erected portion 3719a. That is, the positioning piece 3719 is formed in an L-shape in a side view in which the standing front end side is bent toward the gear shaft 718 (see FIG. 46).

  In the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R, notches 3794 are respectively formed on the outer peripheral edge. The notch 3794 is a notch for passing the overhanging portion 3719b of the positioning piece 3719 when the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R are assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718), The outer peripheral peripheral edge portion of the gear main body 791 is cut out in a U-shape in a front view.

  In the positioning piece 3719, the distance between the axial center of the gear shaft 718 and the wall surface on the gear shaft 718 side of the overhanging portion 3719b is left in front view (view in the axial direction of the gear shaft 718) shown in FIG. The maximum radius of the gear body 3790L and the gear main body 791 of the right gear member 3790R is smaller (see FIG. 46 (b)). The width dimension (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 44) of the notch 3794 is equal to or slightly larger than the width dimension (the dimension in the lateral direction in FIG. 44) of the projecting portion 3719b of the positioning piece 3719. Thus, when the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R are assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718), the overhanging portion 3719b passes through the notch portion 3794, whereby the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790L The rotational direction position (phase) of the gear member 3790R is positioned at a predetermined position.

  In the positioning piece 3719, the distance between the axial center of the gear shaft 718 and the wall surface on the gear shaft 718 side of the standing portion 3719a is made larger than the maximum radius of the gear body 791 of the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R. And the facing distance between the front of the driving portion disposition concave portion 711b and the rear surface (the rear side of the paper surface of FIG. 44) of the overhang portion 3719b is determined by the thickness dimension of the gear main body 391 of the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member Is also enlarged (see FIG. 46 (c)). Therefore, after the overhanging portion 3719b passes through the notch portion 3794, the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R (the gear main body 391) are rotated about the gear shaft 718 without being hindered by the overhanging portion 3719b. It can be rotated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a method of assembling the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718) will be described. Since the method of assembling to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b is common to the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R, the method of assembling the right gear member 3790R will be described, and the method of assembling the left gear member 3790L will be described. Omit.

  46 (a) to 46 (c) are cross-sectional views of the right gear member 3790R and the drive portion installation concave portion 711b along the line XLVI-XLVI in FIG. 44, in the drive portion installation concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718). A state transition when assembling the right gear member 3790R is illustrated.

  When the right gear member 3790R is assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718), first, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), the tip of the gear shaft 718 is inserted into the insertion hole 791a of the right gear member 3790R. Let Then, the right gear member 3790R is rotated about the gear shaft 718, and the rotational direction position (phase) of the notch 3794 is made coincident with the positioning piece 3719 (the overhang 3729b). By pushing in the left direction in FIG. 46B, as shown in FIG. 46B, the protruding portion 3719b of the positioning piece 3719 is inserted into the notch 3794.

  Thus, the rotational direction position (phase) about the gear shaft 718 of the right gear member 3790R can be positioned at a predetermined position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46C, this posture is maintained. The right gear member 3790R is further pushed in the axial direction (left direction in FIG. 46 (b)). As a result, the right gear member 3790R and the drive gear 770 can be engaged with each other, and the right gear member 3790R can be assembled in an appropriate state.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide groove 424 of the first base body 420 is formed to have a constant groove width along the extending direction has been described, but the first base body 4420 in the fourth embodiment The guide groove 4424 is formed such that the groove width increases from the upper end or the lower end toward the center in the extending direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 47 is a front exploded perspective view of the first base body 4420 and the first cover body 4430 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 47, the guide groove 4424 of the first base body 4420 is formed in the shape of an elongated hole in a front view, and the groove width changes along its extending direction (that is, in the extending direction (longitudinal direction) Along the way, the groove width is maximized, and the groove width is gradually reduced from the maximum groove width portion toward the upper end or the lower end).

  Specifically, in the guide groove 4424, the inner wall surface 4424R on the right side in a front view on the extension direction side of the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 14) is continuously formed in a straight line in front view in parallel to the guide wall 423. On the other hand, the inner wall surface 4424L on the left side in a front view facing the inner wall surface 4424R is formed in a shape of a front view that is convex in the direction of separating from the inner wall surface 4424R.

  In the guide groove 4424, a wall similar to that of the first embodiment is erected toward the front side (the front side of the drawing sheet of FIG. 47) along the opening edge. Further, in the assembled state of the first case body 410 (see FIG. 7), the inner wall surface of the collar guide recess 4432 of the first cover body 4430 overlaps the inner wall surface 4424R, 4424L of the guide groove 4424 in a front view. It is formed.

  A process of assembling the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 8) to the first base body 4420 and the first cover body 4430 thus formed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a partially enlarged schematic view of the guide groove 4424 and the first effect member 460, and FIG. 48 (a) shows the state before the collar C is inserted into the guide groove 4424, FIG. And in FIG.48 (c), the state after the collar C is penetrated by the guide groove 4424 is illustrated.

  When attaching the first effect member 460 to the first base body 4420, the pair of collars C disposed on the back side of the base 461 is inserted through the guide groove 4424 of the first base body 4420 and the rack It is necessary to mesh the rack gear 465b of the portion 465 with the pinion gear 480 disposed on the first base body 420 (see FIG. 8). In this case, when the groove width of the guide groove 4424 is constant along the extending direction, when the pair of collars C is first inserted through the guide groove 4424, the meshing between the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 is performed. On the other hand, if the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 are engaged first, it may be difficult to insert the pair of collars C into either one of the guide grooves 4424.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove width of the guide groove 4424 is changed along the extending direction, as shown in FIGS. 48 (b) and 48 (c), the groove width (inner wall surface 4424L, The degree of freedom of the insertion position of the collar C with respect to the guide groove 4424 can be enhanced by utilizing a portion where the facing distance 4424R is increased. Therefore, since the position of the base 461 can be adjusted, the degree of freedom of the positional relationship of the rack gear 465b with respect to the pinion gear 480 can be increased accordingly (see FIG. 8).

  Thus, even if the pair of collars C is first inserted into the guide groove 4424, the pinion gear 480 can be adjusted by adjusting the position of the base 461, as shown in FIGS. 48 (b) and 48 (c). Since the position of the rack gear 465b with respect to the above can also be adjusted, these two gears 465b and 480 can be easily meshed. On the other hand, even if the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 are engaged first, the flexibility of the position where the collar C can be inserted is high because the width of the guide groove 4424 is wide. Each can be easily inserted into the guide groove 4424.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the rack guide recess 4431 (inner wall surface) of the first cover body 4430 is formed in the same shape as the guide groove 4424 (inner wall surface 4424L, 4424R) of the first base body 4420, After assembling the first effect member 460 to the first base body 4420, also in the process of assembling the first cover body 4430 to the first base body 4420, the first base body 4420 may be covered only by covering the first cover body 430, The pair of collars C disposed on the front side of the base portion 461 can be easily inserted into the collar guide recess 4432 of the first cover body 4430.

  Here, according to the present embodiment, the guide groove 4424 and the rack guide concave portion 4432 are provided so that the inner wall surface 4424R on the side of the first effect member 460 is continuously extended in a straight line in a front view. It is possible to stably exhibit the guiding effect of the first effect member 460 via the color C by the guiding concave portion 4432. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability and to speed up the slide movement of the first effect member 460. can do.

  That is, the sliding direction of the first effect member 460 is inclined in the direction closer to the second unit 500 side as it is raised, and the extending direction of the first effect member 460 is also on the second unit 500 side ( 5 and 6), the weight of the first effect member 460 is applied to the guide groove 4424 and the inner wall surface 4424R side of the rack guide recess 4432. Therefore, when the first effect member 460 is slid, the pair of collars C is mainly pressed toward the inner wall surface 4424R by the weight of the first effect member 460. Therefore, by continuously extending the inner wall surface 4424R linearly in a front view, the guiding effect of the collar C can be stabilized, and the improvement of the durability and the speeding up of the slide movement can be achieved. it can.

  On the other hand, the guide groove 4424 and the inner wall surface 4424L of the rack guide recess 4432 are straight lines in a front view between the upper end and the portion where the groove width is maximum and between the lower end and the portion where the groove width is maximum When the first effect member 460 slides, the sway occurs, and the collar C is displaced toward the inner wall surface 4424L (when the collar C is pressed against the inner wall surface 4424L). However, the collar C can be smoothly guided in the sliding direction by the inner wall surface 4424L. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability and speed up the slide movement of the first effect member 460.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. Although in the first embodiment, the guide groove 424 of the first base body 420 is formed to have a constant groove width along the extending direction, the first base body 5420 in the fifth embodiment is described. The guide groove 5424 is partially formed with a widening portion 5424a for widening the groove width in a part in the extending direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 49 is a front exploded perspective view of the first base body 5420 and the first cover body 430 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 49, the guide groove 5424 of the first base body 5420 is formed in the shape of a long hole in a front view, and a wide portion 5424a in a front view and a semicircular shape is formed in a part in the extension direction.

  Specifically, the guide groove 5424 is continuously formed in a straight line in a front view in which the inner wall surface is parallel to the guide wall 423. That is, it is formed similarly to the guide part 424 in 1st Embodiment. However, a part of the inner wall surface 4424 positioned on the opposite side (left side in FIG. 49) of the first effect member 460 to the extension direction is bulging outward in a semicircular shape, and the groove width is widened. This front view semicircular portion is taken as a widened portion 5424 a. Further, the lower end side of the guide groove 5424 is extended downward with respect to the guide groove 424 in the first embodiment. That is, when the first effect member 460 is disposed at the lowered position, the dimension of the gap formed between the collar C and the lower ends of the guide grooves 424 and 5424 is the fifth embodiment than in the case of the first embodiment. The case is larger.

  A process of assembling the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 8) to the first base body 5420 and the first cover body 430 thus formed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a partially enlarged schematic view of the guide groove 5424 and the first effect member 460. FIG. 50 (a) shows the state before the collar C is inserted into the guide groove 4424, and FIG. 50 (b) shows the state after the collar C is inserted into the guide groove 4424. . Moreover, in FIG. 50 (c), a state in which the first effect member 460 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated, and in FIG. 50 (d), a state in which the first effect member 460 is disposed at the raised position is illustrated. .

  As described above, when the first effect member 460 is attached to the first base body 5420, the pair of collars C disposed on the back side of the base 461 is attached to the guide groove 5424 of the first base body 5420. It is necessary to make the rack gear 465 b of the rack portion 465 mesh with the pinion gear 480 disposed on the first base body 420 while inserting the gear (see FIG. 8). In this case, if the groove width of the guide groove 4424 is constant along the extending direction, it is difficult to mesh the rack gear 465b with the pinion gear 480 if the pair of collars C is inserted into the guide groove 5424 first. On the other hand, when the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 are meshed first, it may be difficult to insert the pair of collars C into either one of the guide grooves 5424.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the widened portion 5424a is formed in a part of the guide groove 5424 and the groove width is increased in the portion where the widened portion 5424a is formed, as shown in FIG. The widening portion 5424a can be used to increase the degree of freedom of the insertion position of the collar C with respect to the guide groove 5424. Therefore, since the position of the base 461 can be adjusted, the degree of freedom of the positional relationship of the rack gear 465b with respect to the pinion gear 480 can be increased accordingly (see FIG. 8).

  Thus, even if the pair of collars C is first inserted into the guide groove 5424, the pinion gear 480 can be adjusted by adjusting the position of the base 461 using the region where the groove width is increased by the widening portion 5424a. Since the position of the rack gear 465b with respect to the above can also be adjusted, these two gears 465b and 480 can be easily meshed. On the other hand, even if the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 are meshed first, the guide groove 5424 is widened by the widened portion 5424a, so the degree of freedom in the position where the collar C can be inserted is high. Each of the collars C can be easily inserted into the guide groove 5424.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), when the collar C is inserted into the guide groove 5424 using the widening portion 5424a, the base 461 (first effect member 460) is lifted or The collar C is lowered to be positioned in the non-forming area of the widened portion 5424a as shown in FIG. 50 (c) or FIG. 50 (d). Thereby, the first cover body 430 can be easily attached to the first base body 5420.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment described above, the groove widths of the guide groove 4424 and the collar guide concave portion 4432 are not constant but are changed along the extending direction, so the change (increase or decrease) of the groove width changes the collar C The guiding state becomes unstable, and the first effect member 460 is apt to shake when sliding.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first effect member 460 slides between the lowered position and the raised position, an area (hereinafter referred to as "areas T1, T2") in which a pair of collars C pass through the guide groove 5424. The widening portion 5424a is formed outside the region of. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50 (c) and 50 (d), since the widened part 5424a is formed in the area between the area T1 and the area T2, the pair of collars C is formed in the area T1, T1. It can only be guided by T2 (i.e. the area with a constant groove width). Thereby, the guiding state of the color C can be stabilized, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the shaking when the first effect member 460 slides. As a result, it is possible to speed up the slide movement of the first effect member 460.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. In the first embodiment, the left presentation member 760L and the right presentation member 760R are pivotally supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L in a suspended manner (see FIGS. 33 to 35). The left effect member 6760L and the right effect member 6760R in the sixth embodiment are axially supported by the left support shaft 717L and the right support shaft 717R in a standing posture. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  51 and 52 are schematic front views of a fourth unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment. In FIGS. 51 and 52, only the main configuration is illustrated in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. Further, in FIG. 51, the state in which the left effect member 6760L and the right effect member 6760R are disposed in the raised position is illustrated, and in FIG. 52, the state in which the left effect member 6760L and the right effect member 6760R are disposed in the lowered position is illustrated. .

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the drive gear 770, the direction conversion gear 780, and the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the fourth case 710 It is disposed on the bottom plate 711 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). However, in the present embodiment, these members 770, 780, 790R, and 790L are disposed at positions below the opening 711a (the lower side in FIG. 51).

  The direction conversion gear 780 and the right gear member 790R are respectively meshed with the drive gear 770 fixed to the drive shaft of the fourth drive motor (not shown), and the direction change gear 780 is provided with the left gear member 790L. Be engaged. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the fourth drive motor is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force of the drive shaft is directly transmitted to the right gear member 790R and is transmitted to the left gear member 790L via the direction conversion gear 780, Thereby, the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L are respectively rotated in opposite directions.

  The left support shaft 717L and the right support shaft 717R are disposed laterally of the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R in the present embodiment. Further, in the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710, the fourth base side rib 713, the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 sandwich the opening 711a in the front view with respect to the case of the first embodiment. It is arranged in the posture that the heavens and the earth are reversed. However, the illustration is omitted in FIGS. 51 and 52.

  Since the left effect member 6760L and the right effect member 6760R are formed in symmetrical shapes, only the left effect member 6760L will be described, and the description of the right effect member 6760R will be omitted. The left effect member 6760L is directed from the lower end edge of the base 6762L to the side (left side in FIG. 51) from the lower end edge of the base 6762L extending obliquely downward (lower left side in FIG. 51) from the lower end edge of the curved portion 761L. And an extending portion 6763L extending horizontally.

  The base portion 6762L is formed in a flat plate shape, and is formed so as to protrude horizontally (parallel to the bending portion 761L) from the outer side surface of the bending portion 761L. The rear surface (surface on the rear side in the vertical direction in FIG. 51) of the base 6762L is formed flush with the rear surface of the curved portion 761L, and a fourth base side rib 713 protruding from the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710. (See FIG. 24).

  The extended portion 6763L is a portion formed in a flat plate shape, and a guide groove 6763La is recessed in the back surface (surface on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 51). The guide groove 6763La is a concave groove having an oblong shape in a front view that is linearly extended along the extending direction of the extending portion 763L, and a protruding pin 792 of the left gear member 790L slides on the guide groove 6763La. By being inserted through the movable barrel L (see FIG. 26), the left effect member 6760L and the left gear member 790L are connected.

  From the front end side of the extending portion 6763L, a support hole having a circular shape in a front view is formed to penetrate. The left support shaft 717L is inserted into the shaft support hole, whereby the left effect member 6760L is rotatably supported by the left support shaft 717L. The axial center of the axial support hole is located on a straight line passing through the widthwise center of the guide groove 6763La (an extension of the guide groove 6763La).

  Next, the holding structure of the left effect member 6760L arranged at the raised position and the lowered position and the rotation operation of the left effect member 6760L between the raised position and the lowered position will be described. In addition, since the holding structure and rotation operation of the right rendering member 6760R are the same as the left rendering member 6760L, the description of the right rendering member 6760R is omitted.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, when the left effect member 6760L is disposed at the raised position, a direction connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the left support shaft 717L (straight line L1, FIG. And FIG. 35) and the direction connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the gear shaft 718 (straight line L2, see FIGS. 33 and 35) are orthogonal to each other. Thereby, even if an external force acts on left rendering member 6760L, a force component in the direction of rotating left gear member 790L (that is, a direction connecting the axial center of projecting pin 792 and the axial center of gear shaft 718 (straight line L2, (See FIGS. 33 and 35), and the rotation of the left gear member 790L can be restricted.

  Therefore, for example, even if the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is shaken by the player, it is possible to suppress rattling of the left effect member 6760L in the rotational direction about the left support shaft 717L. As a result, as shown in FIG. 51, the postures of the left effect member 6760L and the left effect member 760L in a state in which the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La are in contact with each other and in close contact with each other as shown in FIG. Can be maintained.

  As described above, also in the present embodiment, since the left effect member 6760L can be mechanically maintained at the raised position, the driving force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) can be reduced (or released). it can. As a result, it is possible to miniaturize the capacity of the fourth drive motor and to suppress the energy consumption.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity of the left effect member 6760L is located closer to the counterpart member (right effect member 6760R) than the vertical line (vertical line in FIG. 51) passing the axis of the left support shaft 717L. Thereby, in the raised position shown in FIG. 51, the left directing member 6760L tends to lean toward the other member (right directing member 6760R) by its own weight, and the mating surface 761La of the left directing member 6760L is It can be pushed out to the other party side (the mating surface 761Ra side of the right effect member 7670R). As a result, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other at the raised position.

  When the fourth drive motor is rotationally driven from the state shown in FIG. 51 and the left gear member 790L is rotated clockwise about FIG. 51 about the gear shaft 718 by the rotational drive force, the projecting pin 792 is in the guide groove The left directing member 6760L, which is moved along the 6763La and located at the raised position, is rotated about the left support shaft 717L. Thus, the rotation (lowering) of the left effect member 6760L to the lower position is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52, the left effect member 6760L is disposed at the lower position.

  When rotation (descent) of the left effect member 6760L toward the descent position is started, in the process of rotation (descent), the protruding pin 792 is one end of the guide groove 6732La (the side closer to the left support shaft 717L After being moved by a predetermined amount toward the end portion of the sensor, a change in direction of the movement occurs, and the finger is moved in the reverse direction (the direction away from the left support shaft 717L). That is, the projecting pin 792 moving toward one end of the guide groove 6763 La turns and moves toward the other end of the guide groove 6763 a.

  In this case, as described above, when the direction of movement of the protruding pin 792 is changed, the behavior of the left effect member 6760L may become unstable, and the smooth rotation may be impeded. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the movement direction of the protruding pin 792 is left in the phase (or in the vicinity of the phase to be changed) in the guide groove 6763La. When the gear member 790R reaches, the tip end portion 764R of the left effect member 6760L is configured to be positioned in the dividing area 711d (see FIG. 34). Thereby, as in the case of the first embodiment, it is possible to obtain smooth rotation of the left effect member 6760L centering on the left support shaft 717L.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the present embodiment, when the left effect member 6760L is disposed at the lowered position, a direction connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the left support shaft 717L (straight line L1, FIG. And FIG. 35) and the direction connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the gear shaft 718 (straight line L2, see FIGS. 33 and 35) are orthogonal to each other.

  Thereby, as in the case of the raised position, even if an external force acts on left rendering member 6760L, a force component in the direction of rotating left gear member 790L (ie, the axial center of projecting pin 792 and the axis of gear shaft 718 The rotation of the left gear member 790L can be restricted without generating a force component (a force component in a direction orthogonal to the straight line L2 (see FIGS. 33 and 35)) connecting the hearts.

  As a result, even in the lowered position, the left effect member 6760L can be mechanically maintained, so that the driving force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) can be reduced (or released). It is possible to reduce the size and the consumption energy.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on each above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited at all to the above-mentioned form, and it is easy to be able to various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention It can be guessed that.

  In the above embodiments, the base end sides of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are made to intersect with each other, and the left effect member 760L is axially supported by the right support shaft 717R and the right effect member 760R is supported by the left support shaft 717L. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the left effect member 760L is used as the left support shaft 717L and the right effect member 760R without crossing the base end sides of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R. The right support shaft 717R may be axially supported. In this case, only the shapes of the extension portions 763L and 763R may be changed from the above embodiment. Specifically, the extension portions 763L and 763R are extended on the extension of the base portions 762L and 762R without being inclined. Even in this modification, the position of the center of gravity is located outside the virtual straight line M1 (see FIG. 31), so that in the lowered position, the position of the center of gravity is located vertically below the suspension support point. Since the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La can be pushed to the other side by the action, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the axially supported hole 465d of the rack portion 465 is a circular hole in a front view has been described (see FIG. 13), but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It is possible. As another shape, the long hole shape which makes the longitudinal direction (sliding direction guided by the guide wall 423) of the rack part 465 a long diameter is illustrated.

  When the axial support hole 465d of the rack portion 465 is formed into a long hole shape, the linear portion of the rack restricting wall 461e is extended with respect to the configuration of the above embodiment, and the rack portion 465 is the axial support hole 465d with respect to the base 461. It is configured to be movable along the major axis direction of the (long hole shape).

  According to this configuration, since rattling of the rack portion 465 with respect to the base portion 461 can be enlarged in the long diameter direction of the long hole shape as compared with the case of the above embodiment, the first effect on the first base body 420 Assemblability at the time of assembling the member 460 can be improved. In addition, since the dimensional tolerance required for each part can be relaxed by the amount of rattling, the part cost can be reduced.

  Here, an example of a method of driving the rack portion 465 in this configuration will be described. As a first method, the state in which the first effect member 460 is stopped (disposed) in the lowered position (that is, the state in which the base 461 is lowered to the lowermost end of the guide groove 424). The clearance in the sliding direction between the rack support shaft 461d and the shaft support hole 465d is lower than the lower end of the rack support shaft 461d (FIG. 13C). The form formed on the side is illustrated.

  According to this embodiment, when starting to ascend the first effect member 460 stopped (disposed) at the lowered position (see FIG. 14B), the gap in the sliding direction is below the rack support shaft 461d. Being formed, first, only the rack portion 465 is raised (ie, the base 461 is kept stationary). Next, the gap formed under the rack support shaft 461d between the rack support shaft 461d and the shaft support hole 465d is clogged (embedded) by the elevation of the rack portion 465, and the shaft support hole 465d is formed by the rack support shaft 461d. By being lifted upward, the rack portion 465 and the base portion 461 (and the extension portion 463 or the like) starts to be raised.

  That is, when raising the first effect member 460 from the lowered position, first, only the lightweight rack portion 465 is raised to apply momentum, and then the remaining portion where the weight is increased (the entire first effect member 460 It is possible to obtain a two-step form of raising). Thereby, the load on the first drive motor 470 at the start of the rise can be reduced.

  As a second method, in the state where the first effect member 460 is stopped (arranged) in the lowered position, the gap in the sliding direction between the rack support shaft 461 d and the axial support hole 465 d corresponds to the case of the first method On the contrary, the configuration formed on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 13C) of the rack support shaft 461d is exemplified.

  In this embodiment, the rack portion 465 is further lowered after the base 461 is lowered to the lower end of the guide groove 424 and the lower collar C abuts on the lower end (lower end in FIG. 9) of the guide groove 424. Since a gap is formed below the rack support shaft 461d (the lower side in FIG. 13C), the rack portion 465 is raised at one end to form the lower side of the rack support shaft 461d (the lower side in FIG. 13C). The gaps to be inserted are filled (filled) in advance (that is, the gaps are formed above the rack support shaft 461d (upper side in FIG. 13C)).

  According to this aspect, when the effect of raising the first effect member 460 arranged (stopped) at the lowered position to the raised position is started, the instruction of the effect is received immediately after the effect of the effect is received. You can start rising. As a result, the slide movement of the first effect member 460 can be speeded up, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 are continuously formed from one end on the upper portion 533b, 543b side of the support wall 533, 543 to the other end on the lower portion 533c, 543c side Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 may be formed in an intermittent shape by dividing one or more places from the one end to the other end. .

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the heights of the back surface regulating rib 532 and the front surface regulating rib 542 from the front plates 531 and 541 are constant. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The height at which the front restricting rib 542 and the front restricting rib 542 from the front plates 531 and 541 may be changed. As a form of change, for example, a form in which the standing heights of the back restriction rib 532 and the front restriction rib 542 are changed in a wave shape (sinusoidal) along the extending direction of the back restriction rib 532 and the front restriction rib 542 It is exemplified by a form to be changed into a shape, a form to be changed into a rectangular wave (square wave), a form combining some or all of the respective forms, and the like. Thereby, when the first effect member 460 slides, the effect part 463 (the decoration plate 463a) can be easily vibrated, and the effect of the vibration can be enhanced.

  It is preferable that the change form of the standing height of the back surface regulating rib 532 and the change form of the standing height of the front restricting rib 542 have the same cycle and amplitude and be in opposite phase. That is, along the slide movement direction of the first effect member 460 (tip portion 464), the facing distance between the back restriction rib 532 and the front restriction rib 542 is constant (one of the back restriction rib 532 and the front restriction rib 542 is a mountain) It is preferable that the other is a valley).

  In this manner, by changing the standing heights of the back surface regulating rib 532 and the front surface regulating rib 542 from the front plates 531 and 541 and vibrating the tip side (tip portion 464) of the first effect member 460, the first The first effect member 460 (decorative plate 463a) can be vibrated efficiently as compared with the case where the base end side (base 461) of the effect member 460 is vibrated. That is, it is difficult to vibrate the base 461 side restrained by the guide groove 424 and the collar guide concave part 432 because the rigidity is high as compared with the tip end 464 side which is the free end. On the other hand, the tip end portion 464 is a position farthest from the base portion 461 and is a portion where the amplitude is the largest. Therefore, the first effect member 460 (the decoration plate 463a) can be easily vibrated largely by changing the standing heights of the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 from the front plates 531 and 541.

  In the above embodiments, the tip end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 is in contact with the straight portions 533a and 543a of the support walls 533 and 543, and the tip end plate portion 464b is a straight portion when the first effect member 460 slides. Although the case of sliding on 533a and 543a has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the gap between the end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 and the linear portions 533a and 543a of the support walls 533 and 543 is described. The first effect is produced when a shake of a predetermined amplitude or more (a shake of more than the gap between the tip plate portion 464b and the linear portions 533a and 543a) occurs on the tip side of the first effect member 460. The linear portions 533a and 543a of the support walls 533 and 543 are configured to receive the tip plate portion 464b of the member 460 (support from the direction of gravity). And it may be.

  In each of the above embodiments, the annular rib 793 of the right gear member 790R is cut away from its standing end to its base end (that is, the entire standing height of the annular rib 793 is cut) to form the intermittent portion 793a. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and only the front end of the upright may be cut away to form the intermittent portion. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a rear perspective view of a modified right gear member 2790. FIG. The same parts as those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the right gear member 2790, the intermittent portion 2793a is formed by cutting out only the tip end side in the standing direction in a part of the circumferential rib 793 in the circumferential direction. In this modification, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a in the axial direction is 20 degrees (therefore, the central angle in the axial direction of the remaining portion where the intermittent portion 2793a is not formed is 340 degrees). .

  According to the right gear member 2790, the base end side (the gear main body 791 side) of the annular rib 793 is left in the formation portion of the intermittent portion 2793a, and the annular rib 793 continues in the circumferential direction on the base end side. Accordingly, the rigidity of the right gear member 2790 can be secured.

  Although the case where the intermittent part 793a of 1 was formed in the annular rib 793 was demonstrated in said each embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this and you may form two or more intermittent parts. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a rear perspective view of a modified right gear member 3790. FIG. The same parts as those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the right gear member 3790, an intermittent portion 2793a and an intermittent portion 3793a are formed at two places in the circumferential direction of the annular rib 793. In this modification, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a in the axial direction is 20 degrees, and the central angle of the intermittent portion 3793a in the axial direction is 10 degrees (therefore, the intermittent portions 2793a and 3793a are not formed. The total of the central angles in the axial direction of the remaining two places is assumed to be 330 degrees).

  According to the right gear member 3790, the circumferential lengths (central angles in the axial direction) of the intermittent portion 2793a and the intermittent portion 3793a are different from each other, so that two or more rotational positions can be detected.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 53, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a is smaller than the central angle in the axial direction of the remaining portion where the intermittent portion 2793a is not formed. Instead, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a may be larger than the central angle in the axial direction of the remaining portion where the intermittent portion 2793a is not formed. For example, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a is set to 340 degrees, and the central angle in the axial direction of the remaining portion where the intermittent portion 2793a is not formed is set to 20 degrees. A projecting piece with a corner of 20 degrees (remaining part where the intermittent part 2793a is not formed) is illustrated.

  The same applies to the modification shown in FIG. For example, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a is 285 degrees and the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a is 45 degrees, and the central angles in the axial direction of two remaining portions where the intermittent portions 2793a and 3793a are not formed are 10 degrees and The form with 20 degrees (that is, the form in which two projecting pieces with a central angle of 10 degrees and 20 degrees (remaining portions where the intermittent portion 2793a is not formed) is projected to the tip side of the annular rib 793 in the standing direction) It is illustrated.

  In the fourth embodiment, of the guide grooves 4424 and the inner wall surfaces 4424l and 4424R of the collar guide recess 4432, the case where the inner wall surface 4424R on the side where the first effect member 460 is projected is formed linearly in a front view However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and conversely, while the inner wall surface 4424L is formed in a straight shape in a front view, the inner wall surface 4424R is convex in the front view convex on the opposite side to the inner wall surface 4424L. You may form in the shape of a letter. That is, the relationship between the weight of the first effect member 460, the inclination angle of the guide groove 4424 and the color guide recess 4432 with respect to the gravity direction, or the center of gravity of the first effect member 460 with respect to the arrangement position of the pair of collars C In some cases, a pair of collars C may be mainly pressed to the inner wall surface 4424L side. In this case, the inner wall surface 4424L is continuously extended in a straight line in a front view. This is because the guiding effect of the color C can be stabilized, and the improvement of the durability and the speeding up of the slide movement can be made possible.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  A game machine comprising: a base member; a moving member whose base end is slidably supported by the base member; and driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member. A game machine A1 comprising: a support member extending along a movement trajectory on the tip end side of the support member and supporting the tip end side of the moving member from below in the direction of gravity.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a moving member whose proximal end is slidably supported by the base member, and a driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member There is a gaming machine which slides the moving member relative to the base member by the driving force of the driving means (see, for example, JP-A-2010-200914). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the weight of the moving member is supported on the proximal side, the burden on the proximal side is large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member is slid relative to the base member by the driving force generated by the driving means. In this case, the movable member has the proximal end side slidably supported by the base member and the distal end side is supported by the support member from below in the direction of gravity, so that the movable member can be held in a double-held state. As a result, the weight of the moving member can be shared not only on the proximal side (i.e., the base member) but also on the distal side (supporting member), and the weight of the moving member can be dispersed. Compared with the state, the load on the proximal side can be reduced, and the durability can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the shaking on the tip end side of the moving member, the moving member can be slid and moved smoothly.

  The sliding movement of the moving member is exemplified by linear movement in a direction inclined to the vertical (gravity) direction, linear movement in a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction, and the like.

  The gaming machine A1 includes one side member and the other side member oppositely disposed across the tip end side of the moving member from one side and the other side of the plane formed by the movement trajectory of the tip side of the moving member, the moving member The game machine A2 is characterized in that the base end is supported by the base member so as to be slidable in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction and the tip end is supported by the support member from below in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, when the moving member is slid in the direction inclined with respect to the vertical (gravity) direction, the tip end side of the moving member is lowered by the support member in the gravity direction. By supporting from the side, it is possible to hold the moving member in a double-held state in the direction of gravity. In this case, the end of the moving member is in the direction orthogonal to the sliding movement (that is, the direction toward the one side or the other side of the plane formed by the movement trajectory of the moving end). In the case of displacement (swing), the displacement (swing or rattling) can be regulated by the one side member and the other side member. As a result, the load on the proximal end side can be reduced, the durability can be improved, and the moving member can be slid smoothly.

  In the gaming machine A2, the one side member is provided with a one side rib erected toward the leading end side of the moving member from the opposing surface facing the other side member, and the other side member is the one side The apparatus further includes a rib on the other side which is erected toward the tip side of the movable member from an opposing surface facing the member, and the extending direction of the one rib is different from the extending direction of the other rib. Game machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2, the one side rib and the other side rib are respectively provided upright on the opposing surfaces of the one side member and the other side member. In the case of displacement (swing) in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide movement, the displacement (swing) can be regulated by the erected tips of the one side rib and the other side rib. That is, since the frictional resistance generated between the moving member and the tip end side can be reduced, the moving member can be slid smoothly.

  Here, since the action direction of gravity is the same in both the forward path and the return path (when ascending and descending), the moving member has a different acting direction of the driving force acting from the driving means, so The attitude on the tip side (movement locus) changes in both routes. In this case, in the gaming machine A3, since the extending direction of the one side rib and the extending direction of the other side rib are different, for example, the extending direction of the one side rib is set to the attitude of the forward path and the extending direction of the other side rib The movement member is moved in both the forward path and the return path when it is slid while being displaced (shaking) in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the slide movement by making each correspond to the attitude of the return path. The tip side of the member can be slid smoothly.

  Preferably, the one side rib and the other side rib extend linearly. This is because the effect of smoothly guiding the tip end side of the moving member in the direction of slide movement can be more effectively exhibited by the protruding tip.

  In the gaming machine A3, a gaming machine A4 characterized in that the one side member and the other side member are formed of a light transmitting material.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the one side member and the other side member are formed of the light transmitting material, so that the decorative effect can be enhanced. In particular, when a light emitting means such as an LED is provided, the light from the light emitting means can be transmitted, so that the decorative effect by the light emission can be enhanced.

  In this case, since the extending direction of the one side rib and the extending direction of the other side rib are different from each other, even when the one side member and the other side member are formed of the light transmitting material, The formation positions of the side ribs and the other side ribs can be dispersed, and the presence thereof can be made inconspicuous as a whole, so that the appearance can be prevented from being impaired.

  In the gaming machine A2, the one side member and the other side member are formed of a light transmitting material, and the one side member is erected from the opposing surface facing the other side member toward the tip side of the moving member And the other side member is provided with the other side rib erected from the opposite surface facing the one side member to the tip end side of the movable member, and the one side member and the other side A game machine A5 characterized in that, in a front view of the members, the one side rib and the other side rib are formed so as not to overlap with each other.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the one side rib and the other side rib are respectively provided upright on the opposing surface of the one side member and the other side member. In the case of displacement (swing) in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide movement, the displacement (swing) can be regulated by the erected tips of the one side rib and the other side rib. That is, since the frictional resistance generated between the moving member and the tip end side can be reduced, the moving member can be slid smoothly.

  Moreover, since the one side member and the other side member are formed of the light transmitting material, the decorative effect can be enhanced. In particular, when a light emitting means such as an LED is provided, the light from the light emitting means can be transmitted, so that the decorative effect by the light emission can be enhanced.

  In this case, in a front view of the one side member and the other side member, the one side rib and the other side rib are formed so as not to overlap each other, so the one side member and the other side member are formed of a light transmitting material Even in this case, the overlapping portion of the one side rib and the other side rib where the presence is emphasized is not formed, and since the formation position of the one side rib and the other side rib can be dispersed, It can be made inconspicuous to suppress the loss of the appearance.

  A game machine A6 characterized in that, in the game machines A2 to A5, the one side member and the other side member are formed of light transmissive materials of different colors.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the one-side member and the other-side member are formed of the light transmitting material. The light of the light emitting means can be transmitted to enhance the decorative effect by the light emission. In particular, by making the one side member and the other side members different colors, it is possible to enhance the color of the appearance and enhance the decorative effect.

  In this case, by forming the one side member and the other side member from light transmissive materials of different colors, in the region where the one side member and the other side member overlap, the one side member and the other side member are mixed It can be made difficult to visually recognize the opposite space. That is, the distal end side of the moving member sandwiched between the opposing sides of the one side member and the other side member is less likely to be visible from the outside of the one side member or the other side member, thereby making the presence of the distal end side of the moving member inconspicuous be able to. In addition, it is preferable that the tip end side of the moving member be dark color such as black. This is because it is possible to make the tip end side of the moving member less visible and enhance the effect of making it less noticeable.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A6, the moving member includes an intermediate portion formed by connecting the proximal end and the distal end and bending the region, and a region from the bent portion of the intermediate portion to the distal end A game machine A7, characterized in that the game machine is located on one side of a plane formed by the movement trajectory on the base end side.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 to A6, the area from the bent portion of the intermediate portion to the tip side is separated to one side from the plane formed by the movement trajectory on the base end side. Since it is located, the space formed by this separation can be used as a space for other members to move. That is, in front view, since the movement locus of the moving member and the movement locus of the other member can be overlapped, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the configuration in which the intermediate portion is bent in this manner, the weight of the moving member is increased by that amount, and the load on the proximal end side is increased by that amount and the direction orthogonal to the sliding movement during sliding movement The displacement (swing) on the tip side of the Therefore, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the tip end side of the moving member is supported by the support member from below in the direction of gravity, or in addition to this, the displacement on the tip end side in the orthogonal direction is restricted by the one side member Especially effective.

  That is, bending the middle part is not suitable for use in a cantilevered state in which the distal end side of the moving member is a free end because the weight is increased and the load on the proximal end side is increased. The distal end side of the moving member is supported from below in the weight direction, or in addition to this, it can be adopted for the first time by restricting the displacement of the distal end side in the orthogonal direction by the one side member and the other side member. By this (the bending of the middle part), the burden on the proximal end side is reduced, and the durability is improved, and the moving member can be slid smoothly, while the moving locus of the moving member and the other It is possible to overlap the movement trajectory of the member.

  A game machine comprising: a base member; a moving member whose base end is slidably supported by the base member; and driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member. The game comprises a driven part to which a driving force is applied from the driving means, and a connecting part which is connected to the driven part so as to be movable relative to it and is guided and moved by the base member. Machine B1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a moving member whose proximal end is slidably supported by the base member, and a driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member There is a gaming machine which slides the moving member relative to the base member by the driving force of the driving means (see, for example, JP-A-2010-200914). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when the sliding movement of the moving member is started by the driving force applied from the driving means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the movable member is provided with the driven portion to which the driving force is applied from the driving means, and the connecting portion which is connected to the driven portion so as to be relatively movable and guided by the guide portion. Thus, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when the sliding movement of the moving member is started by the driving force applied from the driving means. Further, since the driven part and the connecting part are connected so as to be able to move relative to each other, the connected members and the connecting part move while causing relative movement (for example, operation such as shaking or causing shaking). Since the member can be slid, its effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, the driven part and the connecting part are connected so as to be able to move relative to each other, thereby improving the assemblability of the moving member (for example, the assembling property of the connecting part to the base member) by the relative movement. it can.

  In the gaming machine B1, the driven portion and the connecting portion are connected so as to be relatively rotatable by pivoting.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the driven portion and the coupling portion are connected rotatably relative to each other by pivotal support, so that the relative movement of the both can be performed smoothly. The relative movable amount can be easily secured. As a result, the initial operation of the moving member can be smoothly performed. Moreover, while improving a rendering effect, the improvement of attachment property can be aimed at.

  In the gaming machine B2, an axis pivotally supporting the driven portion and the connecting portion so as to relatively rotate is orthogonal to a plane when the moving member slides.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the axis pivotally supporting the driven portion and the connecting portion relative to each other is orthogonal to the plane when the moving member slides, so The portion and the connecting portion can be relatively rotated in parallel to a plane when the moving member slides. Therefore, with the slide of the moving member, the driven part and the connecting part can be easily moved relative to each other. As a result, as a result, the initial operation of the moving member can be smoothly performed. Moreover, while improving a rendering effect, the improvement of attachment property can be aimed at.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the shaft and the shaft hole rotatably supporting the driven portion and the connection portion relative to each other have a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the shaft and the inner peripheral surface of the shaft hole. A game machine B4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, the shaft and the shaft hole for pivotally supporting the driven portion and the connecting portion relatively rotatably are the outer peripheral surface of the shaft and the inner peripheral surface of the shaft hole In addition to the relative rotation, the relative movement in the horizontal direction is also possible because of the clearance. Therefore, with the sliding of the moving member, the driven part and the connecting part can be further easily moved relative to each other.

  The shaft and the shaft hole do not have to be circular in cross section, and may be oval, elliptical, polygonal or the like. That is, it is not intended that one rotation (360 degrees) of rotation is required, but it is sufficient if relative rotation is possible using a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the shaft and the inner peripheral surface of the shaft hole. The shape of the shaft and the shaft hole is not limited as long as the rotation angle (for example, 5 degrees) is secured.

  In the gaming machine b2 to B4, a gaming machine B5 characterized in that one of the driven part and the connecting part is in contact with the other of the driven part and the connecting part to regulate the relative displacement thereof.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines B2 to B4, one of the driven portion and the connecting portion includes a restricting portion that abuts on the other of the driven portion and the connecting portion to restrict its relative displacement. Therefore, the load at the time of restricting the relative displacement of the driven portion and the connecting portion can be shared by the restricting portion by suppressing the bias to the shaft and the shaft hole. Thereby, the load on the shaft and the shaft hole can be reduced, and the durability can be improved.

  A game machine comprising: a base member; a moving member whose base end is slidably supported by the base member; and driving means for generating a driving force for sliding movement of the moving member. And the moving member are engaged by a gear, and the moving member causes the weight to act in a direction to separate the tooth flank of the gear of the driving means and the tooth flank of the gear of the moving member Machine C1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a moving member whose proximal end is slidably supported by the base member, and a driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member There is a gaming machine in which the driving means and the moving member are meshed by a gear, and the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the moving member via the gear to slide the moving member (for example, See 2010-200914). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the surface pressure of the tooth surface is increased, the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member can not be smoothly performed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the weight of the moving member can be made to act in the direction of separating the tooth flank of the gear of the driving means and the tooth flank of the gear of the moving member. Can be smoothly transmitted to the moving member from the driving means. In addition, it is possible to suppress wear of the tooth surface of the drive means and the gear of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gear comprises a pinion gear disposed in the driving means and a rack gear disposed in the moving member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven by the driving means, and the rotation of the pinion gear is the rack gear The game machine C2 is characterized in that the moving member is slidingly moved by being converted into a linear motion.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the gear comprises a pinion gear disposed in the driving means and a rack gear disposed in the moving member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven by the driving means Since the rotation of the pinion gear is converted into linear movement by the rack gear, the moving member is slid and moved, so that the sliding movement of the moving member can be speeded up.

  In the gaming machine C2, one of the base member and the moving member includes a guide groove extending along the sliding direction of the moving member, and the other of the base member and the moving member is guided by the guide groove. A gaming machine C3 comprising: a guided member disposed at a position where the rack gear is offset with respect to the guiding groove.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine C2, one of the base member and the moving member is provided with a guide groove extending along the sliding direction of the moving member, and the other of the base member and the moving member Since the guided member is guided by the guiding groove, the sliding movement of the moving member can be stably performed by the guided member being guided by the guiding groove by the guiding groove. Therefore, speeding up of the slide movement of the moving member can be achieved.

  In this case, since the rack gear is disposed at a position offset with respect to the guide groove, the weight of the moving member acts in a direction to separate the tooth surfaces of the driving means and the gear (pinion gear and rack gear) of the moving member. It can be made easy. As a result, it is possible to suppress the surface pressure of the tooth surface from being excessive, increase the speed of sliding movement of the moving member, and suppress the wear of the tooth surface.

  In the gaming machine C3, the moving member includes a driven portion in which the rack gear is disposed, and a connecting portion in which one of the guide groove or the guided member is disposed, and the driven portion and the connecting portion Are connected so as to be movable relative to each other.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C3, the moving member includes a driven portion in which the rack gear is disposed, and a connecting portion in which one of the guide groove or the guided member is disposed. Since the driven portion and the connecting portion are connected so as to be movable relative to each other, the assemblability of the moving member to the base member can be improved. That is, when assembling the moving member to the base member, for example, when the rack gear of the driven portion is meshed with the pinion gear of the driving means due to dimensional tolerance etc., the guided member to the guide groove in the connecting portion In some cases, it is difficult to arrange the guided member in the guide groove, and it may be difficult to mesh the rack gear with the pinion gear in the driven portion. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, since the driven portion and the connecting portion are connected so as to be movable relative to each other, the relative movement of both is used to arrange the rack gear for the pinion gear and the guided member for the guiding groove. You can increase your freedom. As a result, the assemblability of the movable member to the base member can be improved.

  In the game machine C3 or C4, the guide groove is characterized in that a portion in which the groove width is widened is formed in a part in the extending direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the guide groove is formed with a portion in which the groove width is widened in a part in the extending direction. The guided member can be easily arranged in the guiding groove. As a result, the assemblability of the movable member to the base member can be improved.

  In a gaming machine provided with a plurality of movable units, a box-like case body having one side open is provided, the plurality of movable units are stacked on the case body, and a movable unit located on the top layer is the case pair. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is connected to an opening edge.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a box-like case body open on one side and a movable unit having a movable body, the movable unit being disposed on the bottom of the case body. (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-125543). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the plurality of movable units are stacked in the case body, wobble tends to occur during operation of the movable body.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rigidity as a whole can be enhanced. That is, in the structure in which a plurality of movable units are stacked in order on the case body and accommodated, the movable units of the uppermost layer are connected to the opening edge of the case body while each movable unit is easily wobbled with respect to the case body when the movable body As a result, the rigidity as a whole can be enhanced, and the wobble of the movable body at the time of operation can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to operate the movable body more quickly (speeding up of the operation).

  In the gaming machine D1, the case body has a bottom forming a box-like bottom with the one side open, and a wall standing upright from the edge of the bottom and forming a box-like side with the one side open. And a flange portion projecting outward from a standing end of the wall portion, and the movable unit of the uppermost layer is connected to the flange portion.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the case body has a bottom forming a box-like bottom with one face open and a box standing from the edge of the bottom and having one face open. The movable unit of the top layer is connected to the wall portion forming the side face of the upper portion and the flange portion protruding outward from the standing end of the wall portion, so that the capacity of the movable unit can be reduced. It is possible to firmly connect the case body and the movable unit while securing the same. Moreover, the rigidity of the case body can be secured by the flange portion. As a result, the rigidity as a whole can be increased, and wobble at the time of operation of the movable body can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D2, the uppermost movable unit includes a connected portion mounted and connected to the flange portion of the case body, and the flange portion of the case body is formed along the outer edge of the connected portion. A game machine D3 characterized by comprising a restricted member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the uppermost movable unit is provided with a connected portion which is mounted on and connected to the flange portion of the case body, and the flange portion of the case body is connected Since the restriction member formed along the outer edge of the part is provided, the positioning of the mounting position of the coupled portion is restricted when the coupled portion is mounted on the flange portion (the uppermost movable unit is stacked). It can be performed using a member. Thus, the assemblability of the uppermost movable unit can be improved. In addition, since the movement of the coupled portion mounted on and connected to the flange portion on the flange portion can be restricted by the restricting member, the connection strength between the uppermost movable member and the case body can be enhanced.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, at least one movable unit of the plurality of movable units has a receiving hole for receiving a head of a fastening bolt projected from a lower movable unit on which the movable units are stacked. A game machine D4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, at least one movable unit of the plurality of movable units is provided with the receiving hole, so that the fastening is projected from the lower movable unit The head of the bolt can be released by the receiving hole. As a result, the movable units can be brought into close contact with the lower movable units without being hampered by the head of the fastening bolt, so these movable units can be stacked without bulking in the stacking direction, and the overall stack size can be reduced. It can be made smaller.

  In the gaming machine D4, the movable unit having the receiving hole includes a claw portion for holding an electrical wiring, and the claw portion is disposed at a position facing the receiving hole. D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the claw portion is disposed at a position facing the receiving hole, so external access to the head of the fastening bolt received in the receiving hole The manipulation of the head can be made more difficult by the claws. Further, since the claw portion is a portion for holding the electrical wiring, the electrical wiring can make it difficult to access the head of the fastening bolt from the outside.

  In a gaming machine provided with a moving member rotated between a first position and a second position around a first axis, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member, the driving force of the driving means A rotating body rotated about two axes, and a pin member protruding from the rotating body and located eccentrically to the second axis, the moving member including a guide portion for guiding the pin member, A game machine E1 characterized in that at least one of the first position and the second position, the direction in which the first axis and the pin member are connected is orthogonal to the direction in which the second axis and the pin member are connected.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first shaft, a moving member rotated about the first shaft, and driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member, and the driving force of the driving means Accordingly, there is a gaming machine which rotates the moving member between the first position and the second position with the first axis as a rotation center (see, for example, JP-A-2011-120640). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the mobile unit is held at the first position or the second position, the consumption energy is bulky because the driving force of the driving means is used.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one of the first position and the second position, the direction in which the first axis and the pin member are connected is orthogonal to the direction in which the second axis and the pin member are connected. The pin member can be positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the rotating body and the moving member. As a result, even if the driving force from the driving means is unnecessary, the rotating body and the moving member can be mechanically held at at least one of the first position or the second position, so energy consumption of the driving means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E1, the moving member is a member in which the first position is raised upward in the direction of gravity than the second position, and is stopped at the first position, and in the first position A game machine E2 characterized in that the direction in which the first axis and the pin member are connected is orthogonal to the direction in which the second axis and the pin member are connected.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the moving member is held at the first position which is above the second position in the direction of gravity, but at the first position, the first axis and pin Since the direction connecting the member is orthogonal to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, it is possible to mechanically maintain the moving member at the first position by using the dead center. Therefore, for example, even when the gaming machine is shaken, even if it is affected by a disturbance, the moving member starts moving (descending) downward in the direction of gravity from the position (first position) to be stopped. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a pair of the moving members is disposed, and the pair of moving members are in contact with each other at the second position to connect the first shaft and the pin member at the second position. A game machine E3 characterized in that the direction is orthogonal to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the pair of moving members are in contact with each other at the second position, but in the second position, the direction connecting the first axis and the pin member Is orthogonal to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, so that the dead point can be used to mechanically maintain the pair of moving members at the first position. Thus, for example, even when the gaming machine is shaken, the pair of moving members can be kept in contact with each other even when being influenced by disturbance, and the formation of a gap can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machines E1 to E3, the moving member is provided with a decorative portion that performs decoration by moving the game area with decoration, and between the decorative portion and the axial hole pivotally supported by the first axis. And a guide unit for guiding the pin member.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E3, the moving member is provided with a guiding portion for guiding the pin member between the decorative portion and the axial hole pivotally supported on the first axis. Therefore, the arrangement positions of the first shaft and the rotating body can be made close to each other, and accordingly, the space required for the arrangement of the first shaft and the rotating body can be reduced.

  A first member and a second member rotatably supported on the first shaft and the second shaft, respectively, in an abutting position where the first member and the second member abut on each other and in a separated position where the first and second members are mutually separated In the game machine which can be arranged, in the contact position, the positions of the first axis and the second axis are set such that the weights of the first member and the second member act in a direction to make them approach each other. The game machine F1 to be characterized.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first shaft and a second shaft, and a first member and a second member rotatably supported on the first shaft and the second shaft, respectively. There is a gaming machine which is disposed at an abutting position where one member and a second member abut on each other and in a separated position where they are separated from each other (see, for example, JP-A-2012-075813). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to bring the first member and the second member into contact with each other in an appropriate state in the contact position when having dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances, and the like.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, at the contact position, the positions of the first axis and the second axis are set such that the weights of the first member and the second member act in the direction to make them approach each other. For example, even in the case of having dimensional tolerances or assembly tolerances, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the two appropriately abut each other by utilizing its own weight.

  In the gaming machine F1, a gaming machine F2 characterized in that the first member and the second member are pivotally supported by the first axis and the second axis in a suspended state.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, since the first member and the second member are pivotally supported by the first shaft and the second shaft, the first shaft and the second shaft are The distance between the first axis and the second axis can be reduced as compared with the case where the first and second members pivotally supported are positioned above the first axis and the second axis in the gravity direction. Therefore, the space required for the arrangement can be reduced.

  A gaming machine F3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine F2, the first member and the second member cross each other in a suspended state on the first shaft and the second shaft in a state where the first member and the second member intersect.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, since the first member and the second member are pivotally supported by the first shaft and the second shaft in a crossing state, in the contact position The force acting in the direction of bringing the first member and the second member closer to each other can be made larger. Therefore, the state in which both contact | abut can be formed more reliably.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the first and second members are pivotally supported on the first and second shafts in a state where the first and second members intersect, and the second and second shafts of the first and second members are A game machine F4 characterized in that relief portions for releasing the second shaft and the first shaft are recessed at positions facing the first shaft.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first member and the second member are pivotally supported by the first shaft and the second shaft in a cross state, At positions facing the second axis and the first axis of the two members, since the relief portions for releasing the second axis and the first axis are respectively recessed, the portions of the relief portions, the first member and the second The member and the second axis and the first axis can be disposed closer to each other. Therefore, the space required for the arrangement can be miniaturized.

  A rotating body rotated about a first axis, a pin member projecting from the rotating body and located eccentrically to the first axis, and a guide for guiding the pin member and having a second axis And a driving unit for applying a driving force to the rotating body, and the rotating body is rotated about the first axis by the driving force of the driving unit, thereby the pin In a gaming machine in which a member is reciprocated on the guide portion and the movable body is rotated about the second axis, the gaming machine includes a support member extending along a movement trajectory of the movable member and supporting the movable member. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that the amount of support of the movable member by the support member is reduced at a position where the direction of movement of the pin member reciprocating in the guide portion is changed in direction.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a rotary body rotated about a first axis, a pin member projected from the rotary body and located eccentrically to the first axis, and a pin member are guided. A moving member having a guide portion and rotating about a second axis, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the rotating body, the rotating body being rotated about the first axis by the driving force of the driving means Thus, there is a gaming machine in which the pin member is reciprocated in the guide portion and the movable body is rotated about the second axis (see, for example, JP-A-2004-350919). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the movement of the moving member becomes unstable at the position where the pin member which reciprocates the guide moves, and it is difficult to smoothly rotate the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, at the position where the moving direction of the pin member changes direction, the amount of support of the moving member by the support member is reduced, so the moving member moves smoothly (with the first axis as the center). Can be rotated). That is, when the pin member changes the direction of movement, the behavior of the moving member becomes unstable. When this behavior becomes unstable, the amount of support of the support member is reduced. The movable range of the support member can be secured, and the movement of the movable member (rotation around the first axis) can be prevented from being hindered by the support member. Thus, the moving member can be moved smoothly.

  In the gaming machine G1, the support member is formed in the shape of a rib extending along the movement trajectory of the moving member, and corresponds to the position where the moving direction of the pin member reciprocating the guide portion changes direction A gaming machine G2 comprising a divided area which is formed and at least the height of which is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the support member is formed in a rib shape extending along the movement trajectory of the moving member, so resistance is suppressed and the moving member is smoothed. Can be moved to In this case, the support member is provided with a divided area in which at least the height is lowered at a position where the direction of movement of the pin member that reciprocates the guide portion is changed. The movable range can be secured. Therefore, when the pin member changes the moving direction and the behavior of the moving member becomes unstable, it is possible to avoid that the movement of the moving member (rotation around the first axis) is inhibited by the support member. Thus, the moving member can be moved smoothly.

  In the gaming machine G2, the support member has a plurality of rows formed along the movement trajectory of the movable member, and the parting region is formed on the support member at a position most distant from the first axis of the plurality of rows of support members. A game machine G3 characterized in that it is formed.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the supporting members are formed in a plurality of rows along the movement trajectory of the moving member and are most separated from the first axis of the plurality of rows of supporting members. Since the dividing area is formed in the support member at the position, the dividing area can be passed to the tip end side (the opposite side to the first axis) of the moving member. Therefore, the action by the divided area can be more effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine G3, the support member adjacent to the support member at a position farthest from the first axis of the support members of the plurality of examples has an inclined region whose height is changed along the extending direction, A game machine G4 characterized in that the inclined area is formed at a position corresponding to the divided area.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the height of the supporting member adjacent to the supporting member at a position farthest from the first axis among the plurality of supporting members is the extending direction Since the sloped area is changed along the sloped area and the sloped area is formed at a position corresponding to the divided area, when the movement area is stabilized using the divided area, the inclined area is moved By passing through, it is possible to facilitate early recovery of the displacement on the tip side of the moving member by utilizing the inclination of the inclined area.

  In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body rotating about a first axis and a rotational position detection sensor detecting a rotational position of the rotating body, the rotating body stands on an end face in a direction along the first axial direction. An annular member in the axial direction provided and an intermittent portion formed by cutting out a part of the annular member, the annular member being a detected portion to be detected by the rotational position detection sensor Game machine H1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a rotating body that rotates about a first axis, a detection target that protrudes radially outward from an outer peripheral surface of the rotating body, and a rotation that detects the detection target There is a gaming machine provided with a position detection sensor, and detecting the rotational position of the rotating body based on the detection of the detected portion by the rotational position detection sensor (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307197). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the detected portion protrudes outward in the radial direction, it is necessary to secure the moving space of the detected portion along the outer peripheral side of the rotating body, and the space required for the arrangement. It was bulky.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the annular member in the axial direction viewed from the axial direction end face of the rotating body is the detected portion to be detected by the rotational position detection sensor. As compared with the case where the projection projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body, the movement space to be secured can be suppressed, and the space required for the arrangement can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, while reducing the space required for the arrangement, detection of the rotational position of the rotating body is enabled, and the rigidity of the rotating body can be enhanced by the annular member.

  In the gaming machine H1, a gaming machine H2 characterized in that the intermittent portion is formed in two or more places in the circumferential direction, and the circumferential lengths thereof are different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, two or more intermittent portions having different circumferential lengths are formed, so that two or more rotational positions of the rotating body can be detected.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, only the front end side of the annular member in the standing direction is cut away, and the intermittent portion is formed with the base side remaining.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, since the base side of the annular member is left, the rigidity of the rotating body can be secured by that amount.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the rotating body includes an insertion hole through which the first shaft is inserted, and a retaining means is attached to the tip of the first shaft inserted into the insertion hole. Thus, the gaming machine H4 is mounted on the first shaft, and the annular member is disposed on an axial end surface of the rotating body opposite to the retaining means. .

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the annular member is disposed on the end face in the axial direction opposite to the retaining means of the rotating body. Assemblability can be improved. That is, by disposing the rotational position detection sensor on the base side of the first axis, detection by the rotational position detection sensor is possible only by the operation of inserting the rotating body into the first axis from the side where the annular member is formed. It is possible to assemble the rotating body while forming a proper state.

  A gaming machine J1 characterized in that in any one of gaming machines A1 to A17, B1, C1, D1, E1, and F1 to F3, G1, G2, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine J2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A17, B1, C1, D1, E1, and F1 to F3, G1, G2, and H1 to H3. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A17, B1, C1, D1, E1 and F1 to F3, G1, G2 and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A game machine J3 that features. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
400 1st unit (movable unit)
410 first case (base member)
460 1st effect member (moving member)
461 base (connection part)
463 Extension part (middle part)
465 rack part (driven part)
465c Rack gear (gear)
470 1st drive motor (drive means)
480 Pinion gear (gear)
500 Second unit (movable unit)
510 Second case (base member)
530 Second cover member (one side member or other side member)
532 Back control rib (one side rib or the other side rib)
540 Support member (other side member or one side member)
542 Front restraint rib (other side rib or one side rib)
560 Second effect member (moving member)
600 Third unit (movable unit)
610 third case (base member)
660 3rd effect member (moving member)
670 3rd drive motor (drive means)
700 4th unit (movable unit)
710 fourth case (base member, case body)
715 Fourth outer rib (support member)
717R Right support shaft (1st axis, 2nd axis)
717L Left support shaft (1st axis, 2nd axis)
718 Gear shaft (1st shaft, 2nd shaft)
760 4th effect member (moving member)
760R right effect member (first member or second member)
760L Left effect member (second member or first member)
790R right gear member (rotary body)
790L Left gear member (Rotary body)
793 annular rib (annular member)
793a Intermittent part R Rotational position detection sensor

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a rotary body rotated about a first axis, a pin member which protrudes from the rotary body and is eccentrically positioned on the first axis, and a guide portion for guiding the pin member And a driving unit for applying a driving force to the rotating body, wherein the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the driving force of the driving unit. There is a gaming machine in which the pin member is reciprocated in the guide portion and the movable body is rotated about the second axis.

JP 2004-350919 A

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the movement of the moving member becomes unstable at the position where the pin member which reciprocates the guide moves, and it is difficult to smoothly rotate the moving member. The

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of smoothly rotating a moving member at a position where a pin member reciprocating a guide moves. The purpose is

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a rotating body rotated about a first axis, and a pin member projecting from the rotating body and eccentrically positioned on the first axis. A moving member having a guide portion for guiding the pin member and rotating around a second axis, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the rotating body, the rotating body by the driving force of the driving means Is rotated about the first axis, the pin member is reciprocated in the guide portion, and the movable body is rotated about the second axis, and a movement locus of the movable member Supporting member for supporting the moving member, the supporting amount of the moving member by the supporting member is reduced at a position where the direction of movement of the pin member reciprocating the guide portion changes direction .

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, at the position where the moving direction of the pin member changes direction, the amount of support of the moving member by the support member is reduced, so the moving member is moved smoothly (with the first axis as the center). Can be rotated). That is, when the pin member changes the direction of movement, the behavior of the moving member becomes unstable. When this behavior becomes unstable, the amount of support of the support member is reduced. The movable range of the support member can be secured, and the movement of the movable member (rotation around the first axis) can be prevented from being hindered by the support member. Thus, the moving member can be moved smoothly.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 1st unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 1st base body and a 1st cover body. (A) is a partial expanded sectional view of the 1st base body in the Xa-Xa line of FIG. 9, (b) is a sectional view of the 1st cover body in the Xb-Xb line of FIG. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 1st presentation member. (A) is a front view of a 1st presentation member, (b) is a side view of the 1st presentation member in the arrow XIIb direction view of Fig.12 (a). (A) is a rear view of a 1st presentation member, (b) and (c) is a partial expanded rear view of the 1st presentation member in the XIIIb part of Fig.13 (a). (A) is a front view of the first unit in a state in which the first effect member is disposed in the raised position, and (b) is a front view of the first unit in a state in which the first effect member is disposed in the lowered position FIG. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd unit. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of a 2nd cover body, (b) is a partially expanded sectional view of the 2nd cover body in the XVIb-XVIb line of Fig.16 (a). (A) is a front view of a support member, (b) is a rear view of a support member, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the support member taken along line XVIIc-XVIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the positional relationship of a support wall, a back control, and a front control rib typically. (A) is a front view of a 1st unit and a 2nd unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit and 2nd unit in the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). It is a schematic diagram of the 1st unit and 2nd unit in a downward view. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 3rd unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a 3rd unit. It is a front perspective view of the 4th unit. It is a front perspective view of a 4th case. It is a partial enlarged front view of the 4th case which expanded a drive part disposition concave part. It is a partially expanded front perspective view of the 4th case which partially expanded drive part arrangement | positioning recessed part. It is a rear perspective view of the right gear member. (A) is a rear view of a right gear member, (b) is sectional drawing of the right gear member in the XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb line | wire of Fig.28 (a). FIG. 18 is a partially enlarged front view of a fourth case in which a region where the fourth inner rib and the fourth outer rib are formed is partially enlarged. It is a front perspective view of a 4th effect member. (A) is a front view of the left effect member, (b) is a side view of the left effect member in the direction of arrow XXXIb in FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is in FIG. 31 (b) It is a partially expanded rear view of the left effect member in arrow XXXIc direction view. (A) is a front view of the right effect member, (b) is a side view of the right effect member in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is in FIG. 32 (b) It is a partial expansion rear view of the right production member in arrow XXXIIc direction view. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the 4th unit in the state to which the right production member was arrange | positioned in the raising position, (b) is a partial enlargement schematic diagram of the 4th unit in the XXXIIIb part of Fig.33 (a). is there. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the 4th unit in the state by which the right production member was arranged between the rise position and the fall position, (b) is the 4th unit in the XXXIVb part of Fig.34 (a). FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the 4th unit in the state where the right effect member was arranged at the descent position, (b) is a partial enlarged schematic diagram of the 4th unit in the XXXVb part of FIG. is there. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 1st unit, a 3rd unit, and a 4th unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 2nd unit, a 3rd unit, and a 4th unit. FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged front view of a fourth case in which a drive unit disposition concave portion in the second embodiment is partially enlarged. It is a partially expanded front schematic diagram of the drive part arrangement recessed part which partially expanded the gear member vicinity. (A) is a front view of a left presentation member, (b) is a side view of the left presentation member in the arrow XLb direction view of Fig.40 (a). (A) is a front view of a right production member, (b) is a side view of the right production member in the arrow XLIb direction view of Fig.41 (a). (A) is a front schematic diagram of the left effect member and the right effect member in the state of being disposed at the rising position, and (b) is the left effect member in the state of being disposed between the raising position and the lowering position and It is a front schematic diagram of the right effect member. It is a front schematic diagram of the left effect member and the right effect member in the state where it is arranged at the lowered position. FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged front view of a fourth case in which a drive unit disposition concave portion in the third embodiment is partially enlarged. It is a partially expanded front perspective view of the 4th case which partially expanded drive part arrangement | positioning recessed part. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the right gear member and drive part arrangement | positioning recessed part in the XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. It is a front disassembled perspective view of the 1st base body and the 1st cover body in a 4th embodiment. (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged schematic view of a guide groove and a first effect member. It is a front disassembled perspective view of the 1st base body and the 1st cover body in a 5th embodiment. (A) to (d) is a partially enlarged schematic view of a guide groove and a first effect member. It is a front schematic diagram of the 4th unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of a 4th unit. It is a rear perspective view of the right gear member as a modification. It is a rear perspective view of the right gear member as a modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61, 62, The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. It is attached to the back side of reference). The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is being fixed by a wood screw etc. from the front side of 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by means of a resin arc member (not shown) formed by providing two rails 61, 62 and an arc connecting the rails on the inner side. The region is a substantially circular area (a region where a winning opening etc. is disposed and a shot ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. Further, in the state of the pachinko machine 10, a resin formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. An arc member made of a metal is abutted against and fixed to the base plate 60.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Bb.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady state or not or in a short time or in a normal state by a lighted state, or indicates by a lighted state whether or not it is fluctuating. It indicates whether the symbol corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or the outlier symbol is displayed by the lighting state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37Aa and 37Ba are comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, and may suggest the various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are entered. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second entry ball opening It refers to the state of the game where it is easy for the ball to enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only is the probability of hitting the second symbol up, but also the time for which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is open is changed, which is longer than normal. Is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (opened state), the ball enters the second entrance 640 compared to the case where the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to ball. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite change or time, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time during a definite change or during a short time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is open during the time and one hit when the electric symbol 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during definite period of time or during a short time, the time when the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened or the number of times the motorized symbol 640a is opened at one time is not the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed to be increased relative to the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (start winning) as a trigger while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. 3 With the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of symbols, and LEDs that show the second symbol in a variable display triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. While the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) by the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display thereof A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 640 a of the second entrance 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite variation and during time saving.

  In addition, the second ball exit 640 during positive or negative time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the motorized symbol 640a per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board is configured to be passable. . When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown) Is displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display, as well as the variable display of the second symbol, is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. In addition, since the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first ball entrance 64 in a front view, a second ball entrance 640 where a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball is hit. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is ball entering the second entrance 640 is five. May be

  The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The motorized accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the motorized accessory 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and time.

  Here, in the case where the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the probability of becoming a big hit is in the low probability state or the high probability state It is the same. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is that the ball entered the first entrance 64 in the case where the ball entered the second entrance 640 It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can enter the ball at all times.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory is entered. Aim the ball 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and entering the first entrance 64 has many chances for a big hit lottery It is advantageous for the player to obtain and aim to be a big hit.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite change or time, and it is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Since it is in the state, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second entrance 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and it passes through the through gate 67 It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by entering the second entrance ball port 640 while opening the object.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right of the first ball entrance 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is made after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B is lighted to become a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. Both have and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LEDs 37Aa and LED 37Ba corresponding to the large hit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined time, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a special gaming state. Further, the specific winning hole 65a is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, two) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first entrance 64, for example, a variable display unit It may be the left of 80.

  Sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking certificates and identification labels etc. are provided in the central part and right corner of the lower side of the game board 13, and the test cards etc. stuck on the sticking space K1 It can be viewed through the small windows 35 (see FIG. 1) of the frame 14.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided through the out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Do.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a front side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected to the side, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. Do.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. The other device 228 includes a first drive motor 470, a second drive motor, a third drive motor 670, and a fourth drive motor.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the detailed configuration of the operation unit 300 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 6 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 300 is disposed to face the first unit 400 for sliding the first effect member 460 and the side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the first unit 400. And the second unit 500 for rotating the second effect member 560, and a direction in which the pair of third effect members 660 are disposed close to each other on the back side of the first unit 400 and the second unit 500. And a fourth unit 700 disposed on the back side of the third unit 600 and rotating the pair of fourth effect members 760 in directions approaching and separating from each other.

  The fourth unit 700 includes a box-shaped fourth case 710 whose one side (the front side in FIGS. 5 and 6) is open, and in the internal space of the fourth case 710, a first unit 400 and a second unit. 500 and a third unit 600 are accommodated respectively.

  The fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 711a at the center. The central opening 711a is formed in a rectangular shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the display content can be visually recognized). The pair of fourth effect members 760 has a lowered position (see FIG. 23) in which the mating surfaces are in contact with each other in the front of the opening 711a (see FIG. 5) and an elevated position (FIG. 5 and FIG. 6) and is rotated.

  The third unit 600 includes a third case 610 that forms the outer shape of the third unit 600. The third effect member 660 and the like are accommodated (disposed) in the third case 610. The third case 610 has an outer shape substantially equal to the inner shape (the space formed by the inner wall surface of the wall portion 712) of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, and has an opening 711a at the center. By forming the opening 621 corresponding to the outer shape, it is formed in a frame shape having a rectangular shape in front view. The third unit 600 is housed in the internal space of the fourth unit 700 in a posture in which the back surface of the third case 610 (third base body 620) is parallel to the bottom surface of the fourth case 710 (front of the bottom plate 711). Will be installed.

  A plurality of pedestals 711e are erected from the bottom surface of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, and a plurality of fastening portions formed on the outer edge of the third case 610 of the third unit 600 on the respective pedestals 711e The third unit 600 is disposed (fixed) in the fourth unit 700 by fastening and fixing the respective 624. That is, the third unit 600 (third case 610) is raised from the bottom surface of the fourth case 710 by the height at which the pedestal 711e is provided, and the space formed by the increase (fourth case) The space between opposing surfaces between the bottom surface 710 (the front of the bottom plate 711) and the back surface of the third case 610 is a space for the fourth effect member 760 to rotate.

  The first unit 400 and the second unit 500 are the front side (the front side of the sheet in FIGS. 5 and 6) of the third unit 600 and one of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700 (the left side in FIGS. ) And the wall 712 of the other (right side in FIGS. 5 and 6). That is, the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 are disposed to be opposite to each other across the openings 621 and 711 a of the third case 610 and the fourth case 710.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the first unit 400, the first effect member 460 is formed to project on the front side (the front side in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6), and the tip end side (tip portion 464 of the first effect member 460). ) Are disposed on the front side of the second unit 500. Here, the first unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 14.

  FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the first unit 400, and FIG. 8 is a front exploded perspective view of the first unit 400. 7 and 8, the state in which the first effect member 460 is disposed at the raised position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the first unit 400 includes a first case 410, a first effect member 460 whose proximal end is slidably supported by the first case 410, and a first effect member A first drive motor 470 is mainly provided to generate a driving force for sliding the slide 460.

  The first case 410 includes a box-shaped first base body 420 open on one side and a first cover body fastened and fixed to one side of the first base body 420 to close an open portion of the first base body 420. 430, a front side member 440 which is overlapped on the front side of the first cover body 430 and fastened and fixed, and a decorative connection plate 450 which is overlapped and fastened on the front side of the front side member 440.

  A substrate (not shown) is accommodated inside the front side member 440 (while facing the front side of the first cover body 430), and a plurality of light emitting means (in the present embodiment) is accommodated on the front side of the substrate. , LEDs) are scattered over the entire surface. The front side member 440 and the decorative connection plate 450 are formed of a light transmissive resin material, and the light emission of the LED is visible from the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIGS. 7 and 8). In the front side member 440, rectangular openings in a front view are formed at a plurality of places, and the light emitting means are respectively exposed at the plurality of openings, so that the light emitting means can be directly viewed from the outside.

  The front side member 440 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the first cover body 430 in a front view, and is overlapped at a position where the outer edges thereof coincide with each other. It is formed to have a slightly smaller outer shape as viewed, and a part of the decorative connection plate 450 is overlapped at a position where it protrudes (projects upward) from the outer edge of the front side member 440 (upper side in FIGS. 7 and 8).

  A portion of the decorative connection plate 450 protruding upward from the outer edge of the front side member 440 (upper side in FIG. 7) is a fastening hole 712 a of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700 by a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 451. (See FIG. 23). Thereby, even when the third unit 600 and the first unit 400 are accommodated in the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700 in a stacked state, the rigidity as a whole is secured, and each unit 400, It is possible to suppress wobble when the effect members 460 and 660 of 600 operate.

  In an internal space formed by the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430, a first drive for applying a driving force to the base end side (base 461) of the first effect member 460 and the first effect member 460 A motor 470 is provided. Here, the detailed configuration of the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.

  FIG. 9 is a front exploded perspective view of the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430. As shown in FIG. FIG. 10A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the first base body 420 taken along line Xa-Xa in FIG. 9, and FIG. 10B is a cross section taken along line Xb-Xb in FIG. FIG. Note that FIG. 9 shows a state in which the first drive motor 470 and the drive gear 472, the pinion gear 480, and the slide position detection sensor S are attached to the first base body 420. 10A, the first base body 420 is stacked on the third case 610 of the third unit 600 (see FIG. 5) to facilitate understanding, and the first effect member 460 and the slide position detection A state in which the electrical wiring S of the sensor S is wired is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first base body 420 is formed in a plate shape, and a bottom plate 421 which forms the bottom surface of the first base body 420, a wall 422 erected from the bottom plate 421, and its wall A guide wall 423 erected from the bottom plate 421 at the same vertical height as the portion 422, and a guide groove formed in the bottom plate 421 as an oval shaped hole extending in parallel with the extending direction of the guide wall 423 And 424.

  The bottom plate 421 is formed in a front view trapezoid shape in which the upper base is in the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 9), and the wall portion 422 is formed in a vertically elongated front view parallelogram shape. In the wall portion 422, notches 422a, 422b, and 422c are respectively recessed on opposite sides of the trapezoidal shape in which the length of the two opposite sides is increased. The notch 422a is a notch for securing the movement space of the first effect member 460, and is formed in an area including the movement locus (see FIG. 14) of the first effect member 460 (the base 461). The cutouts 422 b and the cutouts 422 c are cutouts for passing (wrapping) the electrical wiring S of the first effect member 460 and the slide position detection sensor S.

  The guide wall 423 and the guide groove 424 are portions for guiding the movement of the first effect member 460 (in one direction). The guide wall 423 extends in parallel with a part of the wall 422 (the right side in FIG. 9) at a predetermined distance, and the space between the part of the wall 422 and the guide wall 423 is A rack portion 465 (see FIG. 8) of the one effect member 460 is disposed. The guide groove 424 is extended in parallel with the guide wall 423, and a collar C (see FIGS. 8 and 12) attached to the base 461 of the first effect member 460 is inserted.

  The bottom plate 421 is a side (right side in FIG. 9) of the guide wall 423 and the guide groove 424, and a slide surface 421a is formed between the both portions 423, 424 and the wall portion 422 (and the notch portion 422a). Prepare. The slide surface 421 a is a portion for slidably supporting the bottom surfaces of the base 461 and the rack portion 465 of the first effect member 460, and is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pinion gear 480.

  In the guide groove 424, a wall is erected toward the front along the opening edge, and the area of the inner wall surface of the guide groove 424 is enlarged. Thereby, when guiding the slide movement of the first effect member 460, the surface pressure acting from the collar C (see FIGS. 11 and 12) can be reduced, and the durability can be improved, and the guiding effect can be improved. As a certainty, speeding up of the slide movement of the first effect member 460 can be enabled.

  In addition, the wall erected along the opening edge of the guide groove 424 is formed to have the same erecting height as the wall 422 and the guide wall 423. Therefore, when the first effect member 460 is inclined in the front-rear direction (the front direction or the back direction in FIG. 9) or in the plane of the slide movement, the color of the base 461 of the first effect member 460 is Both C and the rack 465 can be simultaneously supported by both of the wall erected along the opening edge of the guide groove 424 and the wall 422 or the guide wall 423. Thereby, the inclination of the first effect member 460 can be suppressed, and the speeding up of the slide movement can be made possible.

  The facing distance between a part of the wall 422 (right side in FIG. 9) and the guide wall 423 is slightly larger than the width of the rack 465, and a gap is formed between the wall 422 or the guide wall 423 and the rack 465 Be done. Similarly, the groove width (the facing distance of the inner wall surfaces) of the guide groove 424 is slightly larger than the diameter of the collar C (main body portion), and the inner wall surface of the guide groove 424 and the outer peripheral surface of the collar C (main body portion) A gap is formed between them. Thereby, it is possible not only to absorb the dimensional tolerance of each part and to improve the assemblability, but as described later, smooth the initial operation when the movement of the first effect member 460 is started (that is, While suppressing the biting, it is possible to speed up the sliding movement, and the surface pressure of the tooth surface of the rack portion 465 (rack gear 465 b) and the pinion gear 480 can be made appropriate to suppress the wear of the tooth surface .

  A drive gear 472 and a pinion gear 480 engaged with the drive gear 472 are disposed between the guide wall 423 and the guide groove 424. The drive gear 472 is fixed to the drive shaft 471 of the first drive motor 470, and the pinion gear 480 is disposed at a position where it can mesh with the rack gear 465b in the rack portion 465 of the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 14). .

  A slide position detection sensor S is disposed on the side of the guide groove 424. The slide position detection sensor S is an optical sensor provided with a light emitting portion Sa and a light receiving portion Sb, and a space between the light emitting portion Sa and the light receiving portion Sb is a plate to be detected 461b in the base 461 of the first effect member 460 11) detects the slide position of the first effect member 460 (whether or not it is positioned at the rising position) based on the presence or absence of the detection target plate 461b.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10B, the first cover body 430 has an outer shape corresponding to the formation region of the wall portion 422 of the first base body 420 in a front view (that is, a vertically elongated parallelogram shape) A rack guide recess 431 and a collar guide recess 432 are formed in the back of the first cover body 430.

  The rack guide recess 431 and the color guide recess 432 are linearly extended in order to guide the movement of the first effect member 460 (in one direction), and the rack guide recess 431 is a first effect member. The guide rib 465c (see FIG. 11) of the rack portion 465 of 460 and the collar C (main portion, see FIG. 11) of the base 461 of the first effect member 460 are inserted into the collar guide recess 432, respectively.

  In the assembled state in which the first cover body 430 is fastened and fixed to the first base body 420, the rack guide recess 431 faces the slide surface 421a of the first base body 420 (ie, the guide rib 465c of the rack portion 465). The collar guide recesses 432 are respectively formed facing the guide grooves 424 of the first base body 420).

  The direction of movement of the first effect member 460 is one direction by the guiding effect of the rack guide recess 431 and the collar guide recess 432 of the first cover body 430 and the guide wall 423 and the guide groove 424 of the first base body 420 The extending direction of the recess 431 and the collar guide recess 432, the guide wall 423 and the guide groove 424) is restricted (see FIG. 14).

  In the thickness dimension of the first cover body 430 (vertical dimension in FIG. 10B), as shown in FIG. 10B, the thickness dimension of the formation region of the rack guide concave portion 431 is different from that in the other region (color guide It is larger (thicker) than the thickness dimension of the region opposite to the rack guide concave portion 431 with respect to the concave portion 431 (left side in FIG. 10B). In the present embodiment, along the outer edge of the first cover body 430 (right end in FIG. 10B) and the opening edge of the collar guide groove 432 (the opening edge near the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 8)) The thickness dimension is increased in the region up to the imaginary straight line.

  As described above, by enlarging only the thickness dimension of the range including the formation region of the rack guiding concave portion 431, in the first cover body 430, only the thickness dimension of the region where the load acting from the first effect member 460 is large is partially Can be enlarged. Thus, while the durability of the first cover body 430 is improved, it is possible to suppress the thickness dimension of the entire first cover body 430 from becoming unnecessarily large, thereby achieving weight reduction and material cost reduction. it can.

  Further, in this manner, the thickness dimension of the first cover body 430 is increased in the formation region of the rack guide recess 431 in which the groove width (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 10B) is smaller than the collar guide recess 432. Thus, the rack guide recess 431 can be recessed without projecting to the front surface (upper side surface in FIG. 10B) of the first cover body 430 like the collar guide recess 432. By making the thickness of the mold uniform, moldability at the time of injection molding using a resin mold can be improved.

  In the collar guide recess 432, a wall is erected along the opening edge, and the area of the inner wall surface of the collar guide recess 432 is enlarged. The erected end of the wall is flush with the portion where the thickness dimension is increased as described above. Thereby, when guiding the slide movement of the first effect member 460, the surface pressure acting from the collar C (see FIGS. 11 and 12) can be reduced, and the durability can be improved, and the guiding effect can be improved. As a certainty, speeding up of the slide movement of the first effect member 460 can be enabled.

  Further, as in the case of the first base body 420 described above, the groove width of the rack guide recess 431 (the distance between the inner wall surfaces, the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 10B) is the guide rib 465c of the rack portion 465 (FIG. It is set to a size larger than the thickness size of the reference), and the groove width of the collar guide recess 432 (the distance between the inner wall and the width in FIG. 10B) is larger than the diameter of the collar C That is, it is set to the same dimension as the groove width of the guide groove 424). Thereby, it is possible not only to absorb the dimensional tolerance of each part and to improve the assemblability, but as described later, smooth the initial operation when the movement of the first effect member 460 is started (that is, While suppressing the biting, it is possible to speed up the sliding movement, and the surface pressure of the tooth surface of the rack portion 465 (rack gear 465 b) and the pinion gear 480 can be made appropriate to suppress the wear of the tooth surface .

  In the bottom plate 421 of the first base body 420, a plurality of to-be-fastened portions 425, claw portions 426, and a receiving hole 427 are formed in a portion that is outward of the region surrounded by the wall portion 422. The to-be-fastened portion 425 is a portion fastened and fixed to the pedestal 635 (see FIG. 21) of the third case body 630, and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted is bored. The first case 410 (first unit 400) is the third case 610 by the fastening screws inserted into the respective to-be-fastened portions 425 being respectively fastened to the pedestal portion 635 of the third case body 630 in the third unit 600. (The third unit 600) is disposed in a stacked state (see FIG. 36).

  The claw portion 426 is a claw-like portion for holding the electrical wiring S, and a base extending from the bottom plate 421 and an extension extending horizontally from the standing end of the base to the bottom plate 421 And a bent portion formed by bending the extending end of the extended portion toward the bottom plate 421. A gap necessary for passing the electrical wiring S is secured between the bent tip of the bent portion and the bottom plate 421.

  The receiving hole 427 is a hole formed through the bottom plate 421 and is a position facing the extending portion and the bending portion of the claw portion 426, and the third base body 620 and the third base body of the third case 610. It arrange | positions in the position corresponding to the head of the fastening bolt B which fastens the cover body 630. That is, when the first case 410 (the first base body 420) is stacked on the front of the third case 610 (the third cover body 630) (see FIGS. 5 and 6), the third cover body in the third case 610. The head of the fastening bolt B projected from the front of 630 can be received (inserted) into the receiving hole 427 of the first base body 420. Therefore, even if the head of the fastening bolt B is protruded, the back surface of the first base body 420 can be brought into close contact with the front surface of the third cover body 630. As a result, the first case 410 and the third case 610 can be stacked without bulking in the thickness direction, and the overall thickness dimension (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 10A) can be reduced.

  In this case, since the receiving hole 427 is formed at a position facing the claw portion 426, the opening of the receiving hole 427 can be closed (hidden) by the claw portion 426. Thereby, the head of the fastening bolt B is prevented from being exposed to the outside through the opening of the receiving hole 427, and the access from the outside to the head of the fastening bolt B (operation of the head) Can be difficult. Furthermore, since the claw portion 426 is a portion for holding the electrical wiring S, the electrical wiring S can also close (hide) the opening of the receiving hole 427.

  In particular, since the electrical wiring S is wired along the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the claws 426 (the vertical direction in FIG. 10A), it is difficult to close (hide) the claws 426. The space on both sides (upper and lower sides in FIG. 9) of the portion 426 can be effectively closed by the electrical wiring S. That is, forming the receiving hole 427 at a position facing the claw portion 426 makes it difficult for the head portion of the fastening bolt B to be accessed from the outside (hard to operate the head portion). S can be synergistically enhanced.

  Referring back to FIG. 7 and FIG. The first effect member 460 is disposed slidably in the first case 410 (the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430). The base end side of the first effect member 460 is supported by the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430, and the front end side is from the side of the first case 410 (the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430). It is arranged in the posture which was projected horizontally. Here, the detailed configuration of the first effect member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13.

  FIG. 11 is a front exploded perspective view of the first effect member 460. FIG. Fig.12 (a) is a front view of the 1st presentation member 460, FIG.12 (b) is a side view of the 1st presentation member 460 in the arrow XIIb direction view of Fig.12 (a). Fig.13 (a) is a rear view of the 1st presentation member 460, FIG.13 (b) and FIG.13 (c) are the partial enlarged rear views of the 1st presentation member 460 in the XIIIb part of FIG. 13 (a). It is. 12 (a), 12 (b), 13 (a) and 13 (b), a state in which the rack portion 465 is attached to the base 461 is illustrated, while FIG. 13 (c). Then, the state in which the rack portion 465 is removed from the base 461 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 11 to FIG. 13, the first effect member 460 has a base 461 and a side (FIG. 12 (a) and FIG. 12 (b) right) edge of the base 461 front (FIG. 12 (b) A standing portion 462 standing upright, an extending portion 463 extending horizontally from the standing end of the standing portion 462 with the base 461, and an extending end of the extending portion 463 And a rack portion 465 connected to the upper (FIG. 12 (a) upper) edge of the base portion 461.

  The base 461 is formed of a resin material into a flat plate shape in a front view (see FIG. 12A), and is slidably supported by the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430. In the base portion 461, a support shaft 461a for supporting the collar C and a detection plate 461b which is a portion detected by the slide position detection sensor S are integrally formed.

  The support shaft 461a is a cylindrical portion, and a pair is erected from the front of the base 461 and a pair is erected from the back of the base 461 opposite to the front. . The front set is located coaxial to the back set. The collar C is rotatably supported by the base 461 by the support shaft 461 a being inserted into a shaft support hole formed through the center of the collar C.

  Each set of collars C is disposed along the side edge of the base 461 (the left side in FIG. 12A) opposite to the side on which the standing portion 462 is formed. Be done. More specifically, one support shaft 461a of each set is located at one end (the lower left side in FIG. 12 (a) of FIG. 12) of the base 461 formed in a front view, and the other support shaft 461a is viewed from the front It is located at a bent portion (upper left side in FIG. 12A) of the base portion 461 formed in a V shape.

  The collar C is integrally formed of a resin material with a cylindrical main body having an axial support hole and a flange-like flange projecting radially outward from an outer peripheral surface at an axial end of the main body. And attached to the support shaft 461a with the flange portion directed to the front or back of the base 461. That is, the diameter of the flange portion of the collar C is made larger than the groove width of the guide groove 424 of the first base body 420 and the collar guide recess 432 of the first cover body 430 (see FIGS. 9 and 10 (b)) The main body portion is inserted in the guide groove 424 and the collar guide recess 432 in a displaceable manner, and the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion is guided by the guide groove 424 and the inner wall surface of the collar guide recess 432.

  In this embodiment, a fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a support shaft 461a erected from the back surface (the lower side surface in FIG. 12B) of the base 461. The diameter of the head of the fastening screw is a collar C (body portion Larger than the diameter of the insertion hole of. Thus, the collar C attached to the support shaft 461a on the back of the base 461 is restricted from axial movement (ie, the collar C is held by the head of the fastening screw). On the other hand, the collar C mounted on the support shaft 461a erected from the front surface (the upper side surface in FIG. 12B) of the base 461 is omitted in the fastening and fixing by the fastening screw and can be removed from the support shaft 461a .

  As a result, by omitting the front side fastening screw, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and to reduce the part cost. As described above, even in the case where the fastening screw is omitted in order to reduce the cost of parts, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the assembly workability.

  That is, in the assembly of the first unit 400, the base 461 of the first effect member 460 is on the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 9) on the open side of the first base body 430 (the front side of FIG. And the first cover body 420 is covered, and then fastened and fixed. Therefore, while the collar C on the back side of the base 461 needs to be held by a fastening screw to prevent falling off from the support shaft 461 a, the collar C on the front side of the base 461 is in the assembly process, Since it is always located at the upper side, it is not necessary to prevent falling off from the support shaft 461a. Further, since the collar C on the front side of the base portion 461 is held by the collar guide concave portion 432 if the first cover body 430 is put over, from this point as well, it is necessary to prevent the falling off from the support shaft 461a by the fastening screw. There is no As described above, even if the fastening of the fastening screw to the support shaft 461a on the front side is omitted, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the assembly workability.

  The base 461 is, as shown in FIG. 13C, a rack shaft support surface 461c, a cylindrical rack support shaft 461d erected from the center of the rack shaft support surface 461c, and the rack support shaft 461d. And a rack regulation wall 461 e standing around the The rack shaft bearing surface 461c is a portion for supporting the base end side of the main body 465a of the rack portion 465, and is formed as a flat surface.

  The rack support shaft 461d is a circular cross section shaft for rotatably supporting the rack 465 (main body 465a), and is inserted into a cross section circular support hole 465d formed through the main body 465a of the rack portion 465. . The outer diameter of the rack support shaft 461d is set to be smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 465d. Therefore, the rack portion 465 (main body 465a) is rotatably supported by the rack support shaft 461d with slight rattling.

  The rack restricting wall 461 e is a portion for restricting rotation of the rack portion 465 within a predetermined rotation angle when the rack portion 465 rotates about the rack support shaft 461 d, and in the rear view shown in FIG. It includes a semicircular portion formed in a semicircular shape centering on the support shaft 461d, and a straight portion extending linearly in parallel from both ends of the semicircular portion. That is, the rack restricting wall 461 e is formed in a shape in which a part of an oval shape is cut away in the rear view. The straight portion of the rack restricting wall 461 e is extended in parallel with the direction connecting the axial centers of the pair of collars C.

  The inner diameter r1 of the semicircular portion of the rack regulation wall 461e is larger than the outer diameter r2 of the base end side (lower side in FIG. 13C) of the main body 465a of the rack portion 465 (r2 <r1), and the rack regulation The facing distance w1 of the straight portions of the wall 461e is larger than the width dimension w2 of the base end side of the main body 465a of the rack portion 465 (w2 <w1). The facing distance w1 is twice the inner diameter r1 (w1 = 2 × r1), and the width w2 is twice the outer diameter r2 (w2 = 2 × r2).

  The rack portion 465 can be rotated about the rack support shaft 461d by a predetermined amount by the difference in dimension between the facing distance w1 and the width dimension w2. Further, the dimensional difference between the outer diameter (radius) of the rack support shaft 461d and the inner diameter (radius) of the axial support hole 465d is equal to or slightly larger than the dimensional difference (r1-r2) between the inner diameter r1 and the outer diameter r2. . Thus, the rack portion 465 can move horizontally by a predetermined amount with respect to the base portion 461 in the plane of the rack shaft bearing surface 461c. In this case, when the rotation or horizontal movement of the rack portion 465 exceeds a predetermined amount, the side wall of the rack portion 465 (main body 465a) can be received by the inner peripheral wall of the rack restricting wall 461e to restrict further rotation or horizontal movement. That is, the load due to rotation or horizontal movement can be distributed to the rack restricting wall 461e instead of being carried by only the rack support shaft 461d and the shaft support hole 465d, so that the durability can be improved accordingly. Can.

  The height of the rack regulation wall 461e from the rack shaft seating surface 461c (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 13C) corresponds to the base end side (FIG. 13C) of the main body 465a of the rack portion 465. Slightly larger than the thickness dimension of FIG. 13 (c). Therefore, the first effect member 460 is attached to the first base body 420 (see FIG. 8), and the standing front end face of the rack restricting wall 461e is abutted against the slide surface 421a (see FIG. 9) of the first base body 420. Then, the rack portion 465 is rotatably held at its base end side between the slide surface 421 a and the rack shaft bearing surface 461 c.

  The standing portion 462 is a side edge (upper right side in FIG. 12A) of the base portion 461 in order to raise the position of the extending portion 463 to the front side (upper side in FIG. 12B) of the base 461. An erected portion 462a erected from the side edge of the base 461 to the front side (upper side in FIG. 12B), and an erected portion of the erected portion 462a. A base portion 461 and a flat plate portion 462b horizontally extended from the tip to the opposite side to the base 461 (right side in FIG. 12B) are provided.

  The erected portion 462a is formed in a U-shape in which the cross-sectional shape cut along a virtual plane parallel to the base portion 461 is opened with the extended portion 463 side (right side in FIG. 12A) to achieve weight reduction At the same time, the bending rigidity is improved in the direction in which the extension portion 463 is inclined with respect to the base portion 461 (the vertical direction in FIG. 12B). The flat plate portion 462a is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the proximal end side (the left side in FIG. 12B) of the extending portion 463.

  The extending portion 463 is a portion having the largest outer shape and weight among the components of the first effect member 460, and is formed in a hollow box shape. Inside the rim portion 463, light emitting means (for example, an LED) and a circuit board (both not shown) are accommodated. As shown in FIG. 12A, the extending portion 463 connects the collar C located on the rack 465 side (upper side in FIG. 12A) of the pair of collars C with the standing portion 462 It extends along (the left and right direction in FIG. 12 (a)). Therefore, in the front view (FIG. 12A), the extending portion 463 is extended along a direction inclining with respect to the direction connecting the pair of collars C (support shafts 461a).

  A decoration plate 463 a is disposed in front of the extending portion 463. The decorative plate 463a is a member on which a predetermined character string (for example, a character string indicating the name of the pachinko machine 10) is formed, and a portion on the front side (in the present embodiment, a shape portion corresponding to each character of the character string Is formed of a light transmissive material. The player can visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, the LED) disposed inside through the portion made of the light transmitting material of the extending portion 463.

  The tip end portion 464 is a portion formed on the tip end side of the first effect member 460 and supported by the second unit 500 from below in the direction of gravity (see FIG. 19A), and the tip end side of the extending portion 463 An attachment portion 464a to be fastened and fixed to the back surface (FIG. 12 (b) right side), and a tip end plate portion 464b that protrudes outward from the attachment portion 464a and is formed in a flat plate shape in front view and horizontal Equipped with

  The front end plate portion 464b connects the collar C located on the rack 465 side (upper side in FIG. 12A) of the pair of collars C in a front view shown in FIG. It is extended in parallel with the direction (that is, the extending direction of the extending portion 463, the left and right direction in FIG. 12A).

  Further, in the side view shown in FIG. 12 (b), the distal end plate portion 464 b is disposed in a posture parallel to the proximal end 461, and the extended portion 463 side (front side) relative to the proximal end 461. It is disposed at a position offset by a distance N1 (ie, a position raised to the front side). Thereby, the durability of the tip portion 464 can be improved.

  That is, since the first effect member 460 has a shape in which the extending portion 463 protrudes to the front side (upper side in FIG. 12B) with respect to the base portion 461, the first effect in the side view shown in FIG. The barycentric position of the member 460 as a whole is located closer to the extending portion 463 than the plane including the base portion 461 as illustrated as a position G in FIG. 12B (in the present embodiment, the back surface of the extending portion 463 (Located near the lower side in FIG. 12B), when the first effect member 460 slides (or even while the first effect member 460 is stopped) the up-down direction of the extending portion 463 12 (b) shaking in the vertical direction of the drawing in the front view shown in FIG. 12 (a). That is, the shaking in which the extending portion 463 is displaced in the vertical direction in FIG. Free vibration with the extension portion 463 as the free end) Easy to. The tip end plate portion 464b is a portion supported by the restriction ribs 532 and 542 and the support walls 533 and 543 (all refer to FIG. 19) of the second unit 500, as described later. When a sway in the direction occurs, the sway (that is, the weight of the extension portion 463) needs to be supported by the tip 464, and the durability of the tip 464 is concerned.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the distal end plate portion 464b is offset by the distance N1 toward the extending portion 463 side relative to the proximal end 461, the barycentric position (position is compared with the case where the distance N1 is not offset). The distance between G) and the tip plate portion 464b can be reduced. As a result, even if swinging of the extending portion 463 in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 12B) (a free vibration with the tip 464 as the fixed end and the extending portion 463 as the free end) is generated, The moment acting on the end plate portion 464 b due to the shaking (the weight of the extended portion 463 portion) can be reduced, and the durability of the end portion 464 can be improved. In addition, since the distance between the position of the center of gravity and the tip end plate portion 464b is reduced as described above, the vertical movement of the extending portion 463 can be converged early.

  A wall is erected along the outer edge of the front surface of the end plate portion 464b (the front side in the drawing of FIG. 12A) to improve the rigidity of the end plate portion 464b. The standing front end surface of the wall portion erected in front of the front end plate portion 464 b and the back surface of the front end plate member 464 b are formed as flat surfaces parallel to the base 461. Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the bulking position (the position in the vertical direction in FIG. 12) of the distal end plate portion 464b is set between the front surface of the proximal end 461 and the rear surface of the extending portion 463.

  The rack portion 465 is a portion which is combined with the pinion gear 480 disposed on the first base body 420 to constitute a rack and pinion, and the rotational force of the first drive motor 470 is a straight line of the first effect member 460. Convert to movement (slide movement). The rack portion 465 is erected on a long plate-like main body 465a, a rack gear 465b engraved on the side surface of the main body 465a and meshed with the pinion gear 480, and a front surface of the main body 465a It has two guide ribs 465c and a pivoting hole 465d formed through the proximal end side of the main body 465a.

  The base end side (lower side in FIG. 13A) of the main body 465a is formed in a semicircular shape centering on the axial support hole 465d. The two guide ribs 465c extend parallel to each other along the longitudinal direction of the main body 465a, and when the rack portion 465 is attached to the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430 is covered (see FIG. 7) The rack guide recess 431 (see FIG. 10B) of the first cover body 430 is inserted.

  The standing height of the guide rib 465c (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 12A) is made larger than the recess depth (the dimension in the vertical direction of FIG. 10B) of the rack guide recess 431 of the first cover body 430. Ru. Thus, when the rack portion 465 is displaced to the first cover body 430 side (front side, front side in FIG. 8) due to displacement (swing) of the first effect member 460 to the front side, the guide rib Only the protruding end of the protrusion 465c can be brought into contact with the bottom surface (upper surface of FIG. 10B) of the rack guide recess 431 and the front surface (front surface of FIG. 12A) of the main body 465a of the rack portion 465 It can contact | abut on the back surface (FIG.10 (b) lower side surface) of 1 cover body 430, and it can suppress that contact | abutting area becomes excessive.

  As a result, even if the front side displacement (swing) occurs during the slide movement of the first effect member 460, the sliding resistance can be reduced, and the slide movement of the first effect member 460 can be speeded up. It can be. In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the barycentric position (position G) of the first effect member 460 is positioned on the front side (upper side in FIG. 12B) than the base 461 and the rack portion 465. Since the effect member 460 is easily displaced (swingable) to the front side, the configuration in which the guide rib 465c is provided on the front side of the rack portion 465 is effective.

  The rack portion 465 is attached to the base 461 in a state where the rack support shaft 461 d of the base 461 is inserted into the shaft support hole 465 d. In this attached state, the rack portion 465 is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 465a is parallel to the direction connecting the pair of collars C (support shaft 461a), and the pair of pair The collar C (support shaft 461a) is disposed at a position offset by a distance N2 toward the extension portion 463 with respect to a virtual straight line connecting the collar C (support shaft 461a). The rack portion 465 can be rotated by a predetermined amount to the left and right (FIG. 13 (b) left and right direction) as described above with the parallel position as the center position (see FIG. 13 (b)) .

  Here, the rack portion 465 is rotatably connected to the base portion 461 by a predetermined amount, whereby the assembly workability of the first unit 400 can be improved. That is, when the first effect member 460 is attached to the first base body 420, a pair of collars C disposed on the back side of the base 461 is formed in the guide groove 424 formed in the first base body 420. It is necessary to carry out two processes of the process of inserting and the process of meshing the rack gear 465b of the rack portion 465 with the pinion gear 480 disposed on the first base body 420. In these two processes, it is difficult to simultaneously perform both processes because it is necessary to consider not only positional deviation due to dimensional tolerance but also phase deviation of the pinion gear 480 and the rack gear 465b.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack portion 465 is rotatably connected to the base portion 461 by a predetermined amount, the collar C and the rack portion 465 disposed on the base portion 461 are formed by the rotation. The degree of freedom of the positional relationship with the rack gear 465b can be increased. Thereby, a step of inserting a pair of collars C disposed on the back side of the base portion 461 into the guide groove 424 disposed on the first base body 420, a step of meshing the rack gear 465b with the pinion gear 480, Can be done simultaneously or sequentially. As a result, assembly workability can be improved.

  The mounting of the first effect member 460 to the first base body 420 does not have to be performed in the state in which the rack portion 465 is connected to the base portion 461 as described above, and in the present embodiment, it is performed as follows. It can also be done. That is, first, the rack portion 465 is placed on the slide surface 421a of the first base body 420 while meshing the rack gear 465b with the pinion gear 480, and then the base 461 is guided by the collar C on the back side The rack support shaft 461 d of the base portion 461 is inserted into the shaft support hole 465 d of the rack portion 465 during mounting of the first base body 420. The effect member 460 may be attached. According to this, the meshing of the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480, the insertion of the collar C into the guide groove 424, and the insertion of the rack support shaft 461d into the axial support hole 465d can be sequentially performed one step at a time. Therefore, the assembling workability can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the slide movement of the first effect member 460 in the first unit 400 will be described. Fig.14 (a) is a front view of the 1st unit 400 in the state in which the 1st presentation member 460 was arrange | positioned in the raise position, FIG.14 (b) is the 1st presentation member 460 arrange | positioned in the fall position. It is a front view of the 1st unit 400 in a state. In FIG. 14, a state in which the first cover body 430 is removed from the first base body 420 is illustrated in order to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, in the state where the first effect member 460 is disposed at the raised position, the base 461 (one of the collar C) and the rack portion 465 are the guide groove 424 and the slide of the first base body 420. It is positioned at the upper end (upper side of FIG. 14A) of the surface 421a. Further, at the rising position, the detection plate 461b of the base 461 is disposed in the space facing the light emitting portion Sa and the light receiving portion Sb (see FIG. 9) of the slide position detection sensor S, and the first effect member 460 is at the rising position. Is made detectable.

  When the first drive motor 470 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the state of being disposed at the raised position and the pinion gear 480 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 14A, the rotation of the pinion gear 480 is transmitted to the rack gear 465b. As a result, the rack portion 465 is slid downward (the diagonally lower left side in FIG. 14A) along the extending direction of the guide wall 423 and the rack guide concave portion 431 (see FIG. 10B). At the same time, along with the sliding movement of the rack portion 465, the base portion 461 is guided to the guide groove 424 and the rack guide recess 432 (see FIG. 10B) via the collar C and extends the guide groove 424 and the rack guide recess 432. The sliding movement is performed downward (in a direction parallel to the moving direction of the rack portion 465) along the direction.

  In this case, when the rotation speed of the first drive motor 470 is counted up to a predetermined rotation speed, it is determined that the first effect member 460 has reached the lowered position, and the rotational drive of the first drive motor 470 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 14B, the first effect member 460 is disposed at the lowered position.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, in the state where the first effect member 460 is disposed at the lowered position, one end side (upper side in FIG. 14B) of the rack portion 465 in the longitudinal direction is the wall portion 422 and the guide wall 423. A guide rib 465c is inserted into the rack guide recess 431 while being located between the opposite sides, and the guide effect by the wall portion 422 and the guide wall 423 and the rack guide recess 431 is continued.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), when the first drive motor 470 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction and the pinion gear 480 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 14 (b) from the state of being placed at the lowered position. The rotation of the pinion gear 480 is transmitted to the rack gear 465b, so that the rack portion 465 is upward along the extending direction of the guide wall 423 and the rack guide recess 431 (see FIG. 10B) (FIG. 14B). Slide to the upper right) At the same time, with the sliding movement of the rack portion 465, the base portion 461 is guided to the guide groove 424 and the rack guide concave portion 432 (see FIG. 10B) via the collar C and upward along the extending direction of the guide groove 424. It is slid in the direction (parallel to the moving direction of the rack portion 465).

  In this case, as described above, it is determined that the first effect member 460 has reached the raised position by the detection target plate 461b of the base 461 being detected by the slide position detection sensor S. The rotational drive is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 14A, the first effect member 460 is disposed at the raised position. In the operation process between the raised position and the lowered position, the state in which the guide rib 465c of the rack portion 465 is guided by the rack guide concave portion 431 is continued (maintained).

  As described above, in the first effect member 460, the base portion 461 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and the extended portion 463 is a portion having the largest outer shape and weight among the components of the first effect member 460. However, the extending portion 463 is positioned at a bent portion (upper side in FIG. 14A, the rack portion 465 side) of the base 461 formed in a front view V shape of the pair of collars C. A direction connecting the color C and the other end (upper right in FIG. 14A, standing portion 462 (see FIG. 12)) of the base 461 formed in a V shape in front view (horizontal direction in FIG. 14A) The rack portion 465 extends upward (upper right in FIG. 14A) at a position between the collar C and the extension portion 463.

  Therefore, the weight of the extending portion 463 is in a direction in which the entire first effect member 460 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 14 (a) centering on the collar C (upper side in FIG. 14 (a)) located at the bent portion. Can act. That is, the weight of the extending portion 463 can act on the rack gear 465b of the rack portion 465 in the direction of separating the rack gear 465b from the pinion gear 480 (right side in FIG. 14A).

  As a result, since the rack and pinion can be smoothly operated while avoiding that the surface pressure of the tooth surface between the rack gear 465 b and the pinion gear 480 becomes excessive, the first effect member 460 can be smoothly made. The slide movement can be performed, and the speeding up of the slide movement can be enabled. Further, wear of the teeth of rack gear 465 b and pinion gear 480 can be suppressed.

  Here, in the case where the sliding movement of the first effect member 460 is started from the state of being stopped at the raised position or the lowered position shown in FIG. 14 (a) or FIG. 14 (b) Since the influence is large and the influence of the tooth meshing state is easily generated, it is difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when sliding movement of the first effect member 460 is made, and as a result, the first drive motor 470 The load on the

  On the other hand, as described above, the first effect member 460 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported by the rack portion 465 with respect to the base portion 461 (that is, with rattling) (as shown in FIG. 13C), when the rack portion 465 starts to slide by rotational driving of the first drive motor 470 (pinion gear 480) by the amount of rattling, the rack portion 465 and the base portion 461 are properly set. It can be displaced relative to the position. That is, the rack 465 (rack gear b) itself can be displaced to a position with less resistance relative to the pinion gear 480, and the base 461 can be displaced independently to a position with less resistance relative to the rack 465. Thus, the initial operation can be smoothly performed, and the load on the first drive motor 470 can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, since the base 461 and the rack portion 465 are pivotally supported with rattling (see FIG. 13), a part of the rattling is produced, and the rendering portion 463 of the first rendering member 460 (decorative plate 463a) Since it can be made to slide and move while vibrating (swinging), the rendering effect can be enhanced by the vibration.

  In particular, as described later, the tip portion 464 of the first effect member 460 is supported from below in the direction of gravity by the straight portions 533a and 543a of the support walls 533 and 543 in the steady state (see FIG. 19). While displacement in the upper direction in FIG. 14 is permitted, a gap is formed between the back control rib 532 and the front control rib 542 (see FIG. 19), and displacement in the front-rear direction (vertical direction of FIG. 14). Is allowed, so that the vibration of the effect part 463 at the time of slide movement can be easily formed.

  Furthermore, the base portion 461 and the rack portion 465 are separated, and the shaft support portions of the both members 461 and 465 have rattle (see FIG. 13), whereby the first effect member is provided to the first base body 420. When assembling the 460, dimensional tolerance can be absorbed by the amount of rattling. Therefore, the assemblability at the time of attaching the first effect member 460 to the first base body 420 can be improved. In addition, since the dimensional tolerance required for each part can be relaxed by the amount of rattling, the part cost can be reduced.

  That is, when the first effect member 460 is attached to the first base body 420, a pair of collars C disposed on the back side of the base 461 is formed in the guide groove 424 formed in the first base body 420. It is necessary to make the rack gear 465 b of the rack portion 465 mesh with the pinion gear 480 disposed on the first base body 420 while inserting the rack. In this case, when the base portion 461 and the rack portion 465 are fixed so as not to be displaced relative to each other, the pair of collars C is first inserted through the guide groove 424, whereby the meshing of the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 is achieved. On the other hand, if the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 are engaged first, it may be difficult to insert the pair of collars C into either one of the guide grooves 424.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack portion 465 is connected to the base portion 461 so as to be displaceable (that is, with rattling) by a predetermined amount, and accordingly, the rack portion 465 is disposed on the base portion 461 The degree of freedom in the positional relationship between the collar C and the rack gear 465 b formed in the rack portion 465 can be enhanced. Thus, even if the pair of collars C is inserted into the guide groove 424 first, the rack gear 465b can be positionally adjusted with respect to the pinion gear 480 from that state, so both the gears 465b and 480 can be easily It can be meshed. On the other hand, even if the rack gear 465 b and the pinion gear 480 mesh first, since the base 461 can be adjusted in position relative to the guide groove 424 from that state, each pair of collars C is It can be easily inserted into 424.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the rack portion 465 is connected to the base portion 461 so as to be displaceable (that is, with rattling) by a predetermined amount, thereby providing the first effect on the first base body 420. After assembling the member 460, also in the step of assembling the first cover body 430 to the first base body 420, the pair of collars C disposed on the front side of the base 461 can be guided by the collar of the first cover body 430 Both the step of inserting into the concave portion 432 and the step of inserting the guide rib 465 c of the rack portion 465 into the rack guiding concave portion 431 of the first cover body 430 can be easily performed.

  Next, the second unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20. FIG. 15 is a front perspective view of the second unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 15, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate the understanding, the illustration of the decorative shapes formed on the front side of the second cover body 530 and the support member 540 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the second unit 500 includes a second case 510, a second effect member 560 whose base end is rotatably supported by the second case 510, and a second effect member 560. And driving means (not shown) for generating a driving force for driving.

  The second case 510 has a box-shaped second base body 520 open on one side and a second cover body fastened and fixed to one side of the second base body 520 to close the open portion of the second base body 520. And 530, a support member 540 which is overlapped and fastened on the front side above the second cover body 530, and a decorative member 550 which is overlapped and fastened on the front side below the second cover body 530; Equipped with

  The second base body 520 is provided with a second drive motor (not shown) as a drive means and a crank mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the rotational drive force of the second drive motor to the second effect member 560. Ru.

  To-be-fastened portions 525 and 526 are formed on the second base body 520. The to-be-fastened portion 525 is a portion to be fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 625 (see FIG. 21) of the third base body 620 and the to-be-fastened portion 526 to the pedestal portion 711 f (see FIG. 23) of the fourth case 710. An insertion hole through which the fastening screw is inserted is bored. The fastening screws inserted into the parts to be fastened 525 and 526 are fastened to the pedestal 625 of the third base body 620 in the third unit 600 and the pedestal 711 f of the fourth case 710 in the fourth unit 700, respectively. The second case 510 (second unit 500) is disposed stacked on the third case 610 (third unit 600) and the fourth unit 700 (see FIG. 37).

  The second cover body 530 is formed in a flat plate shape having a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the second base body 520 in a front view. The support member 540 is formed in a flat plate shape having a substantially parallelogram in a front view, and is disposed on an upper portion (above the support shaft 562) of the second cover body 530. The second cover body 530 and the support member 540 are formed of light transmissive resin materials of different colors. The detailed configurations of the second cover body 530 and the support member 540 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18.

  The second effect member 560 is formed in a rod-like arm main body 561 that is bent in a front view-like shape, and on the base end side (the right side in FIG. 15) of the arm main body 561. Mainly including a support shaft 562 rotatably supported by the body 520 and the second cover body 530) and a decorative member 563 disposed on the distal end side of the arm main body 561, and the distal end side (decorative member 563) It is disposed in a posture in which it is projected from the side of the second case body 510 toward the first unit 400 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The second unit 500 rotates the second effect member 560 about the support shaft 562 by the driving force of the above-mentioned driving means, and moves the tip end side of the second effect member 560 (decor member 563) upward or downward Let

  Here, since the arm main body 561 of the second effect member 560 is bent in a V shape convex upward (FIG. 15 upper side), in a state where the second effect member 560 is moved upward (see FIG. 6) to secure a sufficient space for visualizing the back side (the third effect member 660 and the fourth effect member 760) by utilizing the concave portion (lower portion in FIG. 15) of the V Can. In addition, when the arm main body 561 is bent in a V shape to be convex upward in this manner, when rotating (raising) the second effect member 560 centering on the support shaft 562, less rotation is performed. The arm main body 561 can be concealed on the back side of the front plate 531 (the overhanging portion 531 a) of the second cover body 530 by the amount.

  Furthermore, by forming the arm main body 561 in a V-shape, the overall length can be increased and the rigidity can be reduced by having a bent portion. That is, the weight of the decorative member 563 can be shared by the arm main body 563 by suppressing the action of being biased only to the support shaft 562. Thereby, the weight of the decoration member 563 can be dispersed to both the arm main body 563 and the support shaft 562, and the durability can be improved.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the second cover body 530 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.16 (a) is a partial enlarged front view of the 2nd cover body 530, FIG.16 (b) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the 2nd cover body 530 in the XVIb-XVIb line of FIG. 16 (a). .

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second cover body 530 includes a flat front plate 531, a back regulation rib 532 erected from the front of the front plate 531, and side and upper sides of the back regulation rib 532. A support wall 533 erected from the front of the front plate 531 and a plurality of fastened columns 534 dotted around the back restriction rib 532 and the support wall 533 are integrally formed. Be done.

  The front plate 531 is a portion that forms the skeleton of the second cover body 530, and is formed in a substantially flat plate shape. The front plate 531 includes an overhanging portion 531a which is formed to project toward the side (left side in FIG. 16A) on the first unit 400 side (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The overhanging portion 531a projects further toward the first unit 400 than the side edge of the second base body 520 (see FIG. 15), whereby the second effect member 560 is moved upward. The arm body 561 can be concealed on the back side of the overhanging portion 531a while exposing the decoration member 563 of the second effect member 560 (see FIG. 6).

  The back surface control rib 532 contacts the back surface of the front end plate portion 464b when the front end portion 464 (front end plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 is displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16A). It is a part for restricting the displacement to the rear (in the back of the paper surface in FIG. 16A) in contact (see FIG. 19B), and is extended linearly in the front view shown in FIG. It is formed as a projection which is provided to project from the front of the front plate 531.

  The cross-sectional shape of the back surface control rib 532 is, as shown in FIG. 16B, a flat surface parallel to the slide movement plane of the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 14) and the corner on both sides The portion is curved in an arc shape. In the present embodiment, the two back surface control ribs 532 are disposed in parallel to each other, and are inclined in the direction corresponding to the sliding direction of the first effect member 460 in the front view shown in FIG. It will be extended.

  The support wall 533 is a portion for restricting or supporting the displacement or weight of the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 together with the support wall 543 of the support member 540 (see FIG. 19). In the front view shown in (a), a straight portion 533a linearly extended in parallel to the back surface control rib 532 and an upper portion of the straight portion 533a are connected horizontally and extend horizontally (FIG. 16 (a) horizontal direction) And a lower portion 533c opposite to and substantially parallel to the upper portion 533b on the lower side of the straight portion 533a.

  More specifically, the support wall 533 supports the tip end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 from the lower side in the gravity direction by the straight portion 533a. Further, the support wall 533 restricts the displacement of the end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 upward (the upper side in FIG. 16A) by the upper portion 533b, and the first effect by the lower portion 533c. The displacement of the tip end plate portion 464b of the member 460 to the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 16A) is restricted (see FIG. 19A).

  When the first effect member 460 reaches the raised or lowered position by sliding movement (see FIG. 14), the tip end side (tip plate portion 464b) is moved upward or downward by the inertia force when the sliding movement is stopped. It is greatly displaced. In this case, the displacement of the tip end side of the first effect member 460 can be regulated by the abutment of the upper portion 533 b or the lower portion 533 c of the support wall 533 (the stopper function can be exhibited), whereby the excess of the first effect member 460 is excessive. Control the displacement (free vibration) at an early stage, which is more effective than the point of improving the durability. In particular, it is effective to improve the durability of the base portion 461 and the standing portion 462.

  In the steady state in which the first effect member 460 is stopped at the raised position or the lowered position, a predetermined gap is formed between the tip end side (tip plate portion 464b) and the upper portion 533b or lower portion 533c of the support wall 533. Is formed. However, the gap may not be formed.

  The support wall 533 is formed as a rectangular protrusion whose height from the front plate 531 is higher than that of the back surface control rib 532 in a cross-sectional view shown in FIG. It is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front of the face plate 531 (upper side in FIG. 16B). In the front view shown in FIG. 16A, the back regulating rib 532 and the support wall 533 (linear portion 533a) have an inclination angle with the vertical direction as an angle θ1. This angle θ is the same as the inclination angle that the direction of sliding movement of the first effect member 460 (that is, the extending direction of the guide groove 424 and the collar guide recess 432, see FIG. 14) makes with the vertical direction.

  The to-be-fastened column 534 is a cylindrical portion erected from the front plate 531, and supports the fastening seat 544 of the support member 540 by the erected front end surface formed as a flat surface. In addition, an internal thread is engraved on the inner periphery of the concave portion recessed in the standing front end surface of the to-be-fastened column 534, and the fastening seat portion 544 of the support member 540 is fastened and fixed by the fastening screw.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the support member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (a) is a front view of the support member 540, FIG. 17 (b) is a back view of the support member 540, and FIG. 17 (c) is a line XVIIc-XVIIc in FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of a support member 540. In FIG. 17A, the outlines of the front regulating rib 542 and the support wall 543 are illustrated by broken lines.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the support member 540 includes a flat front plate 541, a front restriction rib 542 erected from the back of the front plate 541, and a front plate on the side and above the front restriction rib 542. A support wall 543 erected from the back surface of 541 and a plurality of fastening seats 544 projecting from the outer surface of the support wall 543 are provided, and these portions 541 to 544 are integrally formed.

  The front plate 541 is a portion that forms the framework of the support member 540, and is formed in a flat plate shape having a substantially parallelogram in a front view. The front regulating rib 542 contacts the front of the tip plate portion 464b when the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 is displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 17A). It is a portion for contacting (see FIG. 19 (b)) and restricting forward displacement (in the direction of the front of FIG. 17 (a)), and is linearly extended in a front view shown in FIG. 17 (a). It is formed as a projection which is provided to project from the back of the front plate 541. The cross-sectional shape of the front regulating rib 542 is, as shown in FIG. 17B, a flat surface parallel to the slide movement plane of the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 14) and the corner on both sides The portion is curved in an arc shape. In the present embodiment, the three front restriction ribs 542 are disposed parallel to one another, and are inclined in the direction corresponding to the sliding direction of the first effect member 460 in the front view shown in FIG. It will be extended.

  The support wall 543 is a portion for regulating or supporting the displacement or the weight of the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464 b) of the first effect member 460 together with the support wall 533 of the second cover body 530 (FIG. 19A) 17), in a front view shown in FIG. 17A, a straight portion 543a located on the side of the front regulating rib 532 (right side in FIG. 17A) and extended linearly, and the upper portion of the straight portion 543a And a lower portion 543c connected to the lower side of the straight portion 543a and opposed substantially parallel to the upper portion 543b.

  More specifically, the support wall 543 has its straight portion 543a, together with the straight portion 533a of the support wall 533 (see FIG. 16), support the tip end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 from below in the direction of gravity. The upper portion 543b of the support wall 543, together with the upper portion 533b of the support wall 533, regulates the displacement of the top end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 upward (upper side in FIG. 17A). Similarly, the lower portion 543c of the support wall 543, together with the lower portion 533c of the support wall 533, regulates the downward displacement (the lower side in FIG. 17A) of the end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460. .

  The support wall 543 is formed as a rectangular protrusion whose vertical height is higher than that of the front restriction rib 542 in the cross sectional view shown in FIG. 17C, and the front end surface of the vertical wall is on the back surface of the front plate 541. It is formed as a parallel flat surface. Here, in the support wall 543, the front view shape shown in FIG. 17A is formed to be the same as the front view shape (see FIG. 16A) of the support wall 533 of the second cover 530. When the support member 540 is fastened and fixed to the body 530, the standing front end faces of the support walls 533 and 543 of each other abut. Therefore, the support wall 543, together with the support wall 533 of the second cover body 530, supports the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 from below in the direction of gravity by the straight portion 543a, and similarly The support wall 543, together with the support wall 533 of the second cover body 530, restricts the displacement of the tip plate portion 464b upward and downward (the upper and lower sides in FIG. 17A) by the upper portion 543b and the lower portion 543c. (See FIG. 19 (a)).

  The support member 540 is set to have different inclination angles between the front restricting rib 542 and the support wall 543 (straight portion 543a). Specifically, in the front view shown in FIG. 17A, the front regulation rib 542 has an inclination angle with the vertical direction set to the angle θ2, while the support wall 543 (linear portion 543a) has a vertical direction The inclination angle to be formed is the same angle (angle θ1) as the back surface control rib 532 and the support wall 533 (straight portion 533a). The angle θ1 is set to be larger than the angle θ2 (θ2 <θ1).

  The fastening seat portion 544 is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening post 534 of the second cover body 530, and the fastening seat portion 544 is placed on the standing front end face of the fastening subject column 534 of the second cover body 530. The support member 540 is disposed on the front of the second cover body 530 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw (see FIG. 15).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, a support structure for supporting the tip portion 464 of the first effect member 460 by the second cover body 530 and the support member 540 will be described.

  FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically illustrating the positional relationship between the support walls 533 and 543, the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542. As shown in FIG. FIG. 19A is a front view of the first unit 400 and the second unit 500, and FIG. 19B is a front view of the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 taken along line XIXb-XIXb in FIG. FIG. FIG. 18 corresponds to the perspective view of FIG. 19 (a). In FIG. 19A, a part of the support member 540 is partially omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, in the state where the support member 540 is fastened and fixed to the second cover body 530, the arrangement of the support wall 533 of the second cover body 530 and the support wall 543 of the support member 540 is matched. While the back restriction rib 532 of the second cover body 530 and the front restriction rib 542 of the support member 540 are disposed at different positions (positions which are not completely overlapped with each other in the front view). Ru.

  In this case, the back and front of the end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 (the back and front sides in FIG. 19A) and the front restriction of the back regulation rib 532 of the second cover 530 and the support member 540 A predetermined gap is formed between the rib 542 and the rib 542, respectively. As a result, when the first effect member 460 is slid on the tip end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) with little displacement (swing) in the front-rear direction, the occurrence of frictional resistance is reduced. By sliding the first effect member 460 smoothly, the load on the first drive motor 470 (see FIG. 8) can be reduced. On the other hand, when the displacement (swing) in the front-rear direction at the tip end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 becomes equal to or more than a predetermined amount, the displacement of each rib 532 or 542 causes excessive displacement ( Vibration can be suppressed to improve the durability.

  During an operation in which the first effect member 460 of the first unit 400 is slidingly moved between the raised position and the lowered position (see FIG. 14), the base end side (the base 461) of the first effect member 460 is the first case 410 (on the first base body 420 and the first cover body 430), the tip end side (tip portion 464) of the support wall 533 of the second cover body 530 and the straight portion 533a of the support wall 543 of the support member 540, Since it is supported from the lower side in the direction of gravity (FIGS. 18 and 19 (a) vertical direction) by 543a, the first effect member 460 can be in a double-held state.

  Thereby, the weight of the first effect member 460 can be shared not only on the proximal side (the base 461 and the first case 410) but also on the distal side (the distal end 464 and the support walls 533 and 534), Since the weight of the first effect member 460 can be dispersed by a minute, the proximal end side is compared with the case where only the proximal end side is supported and the distal end side is set as the free end. The burden of the load can be reduced, and the durability can be improved.

  The tip end side (tip end portion 464) of the first effect member 460 is disposed between the second base body 530 (front plate 531) and the support member 540 (front plate 541) facing each other. When the front end side of the head is displaced (swayed) in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide movement (back and forth direction perpendicular to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), vertical direction in FIG. 18 and FIG. The displacement can be regulated by the second base body 530 (front plate 531) and the support member 540 (front plate 541). As a result, the load on the base end side (the base 461 and the first case 410) can be reduced, the durability can be improved, and the first effect member 460 can be slid smoothly.

  Note that displacing the tip end side of the first effect member 460 in the direction (front-rear direction) orthogonal to the direction of the slide movement is not limited to the displacement mode having only a displacement component in the direction completely orthogonal to the direction of slide movement. As described above, the displacement mode (ie, the base portion 461 and the tip end portion 464 as a fixed end and the extension portion 463 as a free end) in which the extension portion 463 swings in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. This is the meaning including the displacement mode of vibration) and the displacement mode in which each of these displacement modes is synthesized.

  In this case, the second base body 530 has its front plate 531 to the back surface control rib 532, the support member 540 has its front surface plate 531 to the front surface control rib 542, and the tip portion 464 of the first effect member 460 (tip plate portion 464b) is erected toward the back and the front respectively. Thereby, as described above, when the first effect member 460 is displaced (swayed) in a direction (a direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 18 and FIG. 19A) orthogonal to the direction of the slide movement, , And the front end of the front restricting rib 542. That is, the protruding tips of the ribs 532 and 542 are partially in contact with the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460, and the contact area is suppressed. It can be reduced. Thus, the first effect member 460 can be slid smoothly, and the load on the first drive motor 470 can be reduced.

  Here, in both the forward path and the return path (up and down movement) of the first effect member 460 during the slide movement, the action direction of gravity is the same direction, while the pinion gear 480 to the rack gear of the rack portion 465 Since the acting direction of the rotational driving force acting on 465b (that is, the rotating direction of the pinion gear 480) is different, the attitude of the first effect member 460 is different in both paths, and as a result, the attitude of the tip end (tip portion 464) (Inclination state and movement trajectory) also change in both routes.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the extension direction of the back surface control rib 532 (inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction = angle θ1) and the extension direction of the front surface control rib 542 (inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction = angle θ2) are different. For example, the first effect member may be set by setting the extension direction of the back surface control rib 532 to the attitude of the forward path and the extension direction of the front surface control rib 542 to the attitude of the return path. When the 460 is displaced while sliding (swinging) in the back and forth direction (FIGS. 18 and 19 (a) front and back direction in the plane of the drawing) orthogonal to the direction of the sliding movement, The tip end portion 464 of the effect member 460 can be smoothly guided using the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542.

  As described above, the second base body 530 and the support member 540 are formed of light transmissive resin materials of different colors. Therefore, the light of the light emitting means (for example, the LED) can be transmitted, and the decorative effect by the light emission can be enhanced. In addition, by forming the second base body 530 and the second base body 530 and the support member 540 having different external dimensions from different colors, the color of the appearance can be enriched and the decorative effect can be enhanced. .

  In this case, the second base body 530 and the support member 540 are formed of light-transmissive resin materials of different colors, so that in the area where the second base body 530 and the support member 540 overlap, color mixing can be performed. The facing space of the second base body 530 and the support member 540 (the facing space between the front plate 531 and the front plate 541) can be made less visible from the outside. That is, the front end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 sandwiched between the front plate 531 and the front plate 541 is difficult to visually recognize from the outside in a front view of the support member 540, The presence of the tip portion 464 of the effect member 460 can be made inconspicuous.

  In the present embodiment, the tip end portion 464 of the first effect member 460 is formed of a black resin material. This can enhance the effect of making the tip portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) less visible and noticeable from the outside in a front view of the support member 540.

  Further, the extending direction of the back surface control rib 532 of the second base body 530 (inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction = angle θ1) and the extension direction of the front surface control rib 542 of the support member 540 (inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction = angle θ2) Are different from one another, so that the formation positions of the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 can be dispersed. As a result, the presence of the respective ribs 532 and 542 can be made inconspicuous as a whole with respect to the player visually recognized from the front of the support member 540, and loss of the appearance can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 are formed at positions not overlapping each other in front view except those closest to the support walls 533 and 543. That is, of the two back surface control ribs 532, one of the back surface control ribs 532 located on the side (left side in FIG. 18) separated from the straight portion 533 a of the support wall 533 and The two front restricting ribs 542 located on the side (left side in FIG. 18) separated from the linear portion 543a of the support wall 543 are formed so as not to overlap with each other in front view. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the formation of an overlapping portion of the two ribs 532 and 542 whose presence is emphasized when the support member 540 is viewed from the front, and it is possible to disperse the formation positions of the two ribs 532 and 542 Therefore, the presence of the respective ribs 532 and 542 can be made inconspicuous to suppress the loss of the appearance.

  As described above, the first effect member 460 is formed in a shape in which the extending portion 463 protrudes to the front side with respect to the base 461 (see FIG. 12B), and the barycentric position of the first effect member 460 as a whole. Is biased to the front side (the front side in FIG. 19A). Therefore, the first effect member 460 is more likely to be displaced (swingable) to the front side than to the back side due to the deviation of the center-of-gravity position. That is, when shaking occurs in the first effect member 460, the tip end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 is more frequently in contact with the front surface regulating rib 542 than the back surface regulating rib 532.

  In this case, first, the number of front restriction ribs 542 is smaller than the number of rear restriction ribs 532 (in this embodiment, the back restriction ribs 532 and 532 are used). Are arranged, while three front restriction ribs 542 are arranged) and secondly, the space size of the front restriction ribs 542 with respect to the space size of the back surface restriction ribs 532 (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 18) (In the present embodiment, the back regulation rib 532 is the interval J1, the front regulation rib 542 is the interval J2, and J1 <J2 is set), and thirdly, the back regulation rib 532 is the front regulation rib The first effect member 460 (the end plate portion 464b) is disposed more on the tip side (right side in FIG. 18) than the portion 542. In the present embodiment, although the case where the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 have the above first to third configurations will be described, it is not necessary to have all the first to third configurations. It is sufficient if it has the configuration of 1.

  Thus, with regard to the front restricting rib 542 in which the tip plate portion 464b frequently abuts, the front restricting rib 542 can be provided by increasing the number of dispositions and enlarging the interval dimension to widen the disposition area. The load generated when the distal end plate portion 464b abuts can be easily dispersed, and the durability can be improved. On the other hand, with regard to the back surface control rib 532 in which the front end plate portion 464b abuts at a low frequency, the presence of the back surface control rib 532 is made inconspicuous with respect to the player visually recognizing the support member 540 from the front. It can be suppressed that the appearance is lost.

  In this case, when the first effect member 460 is displaced to the rear side, only the front end side (the right side in FIG. 18) of the front end plate portion 464 b is in contact with the rear surface restriction rib 532. With regard to 532, it is effective to reduce the spacing dimension and to arrange the tip end of the tip plate portion 464 b in a biased manner. That is, it is wasteful to dispose the back surface control rib 532 on the root side (left side in FIG. 18) of the tip end plate portion 464b, and the tip end side portion effectively receives the tip end plate portion 464b with a small number of placements. Lead to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the positional relationship between the first effect member 460 of the first unit 400 and the second effect member 560 of the second unit 500 in the front-rear direction will be described. FIG. 20 is a schematic view of the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 in the lower view, and corresponds to the view in the arrow XIIb direction of FIG. 12 (a). In FIG. 20, the outer shape of the third unit 600 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 are disposed on the front surface (upper side surface in FIG. 20) of the third unit 600. That is, the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 are disposed on the same plane. In this case, in the first effect member 460, as described above, the extending portion 463 is raised to the front side (upper side in FIG. 20) than the base end 461 by the standing portion 462, and the end plate portion 464b is raised. The position (the position in the vertical direction in FIG. 20) is set between the front surface of the proximal end 461 and the back surface of the extending portion 463.

  Thus, a space can be formed between the rear surface of the extending portion 463 of the first effect member 460 and the front surface of the third unit 600. That is, this space can be used as a space for the second effect member 560 to move. As a result, in front view, the movement locus of the first effect member 460 and the movement locus of the second effect member 560 can be overlapped, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the configuration in which the first effect member 460 is bent (the bulk is raised by the standing portion 462) as described above, the weight of the first effect member 460 is increased, and accordingly, the base end side (the base end 461 side) 20), and the front end side (front end portion 464) in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 20) when sliding moves (longitudinal direction in FIG. 20) orthogonal to the displacement (swing) and sliding movement direction The displacement (swing) of the distal end side (the distal end portion 464) to the In the present embodiment, the tip end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 is supported from below in the gravity direction by the second cover body 530 and the support walls 533 and 543 (linear portions 533a and 543a) of the support member 540. By disposing between the front plates 531 and 541, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the tip end (tip portion 464) in the above-described orthogonal direction (front-rear direction).

  That is, bending the first effect member 460 (bulging by the standing portion 462) increases the weight and increases the load on the base end side (the base end portion 461 side). This can not be adopted in a cantilever state in which the tip end side (tip end portion 464) is a free end, and the tip end portion 464 (tip plate portion 464b) of the first effect member 460 can be used as the second cover body 530 and the support member. The support walls 533 and 543 (straight portions 533a and 543a) of the 540 can be used for the first time by supporting from the lower side in the direction of gravity and restricting the displacement of the tip side (tip portion 464) in the front and rear direction described above by the front plates 531 and 541 As a result, while improving the durability by reducing the burden on the base end side (the base end 461 side) and enabling the smooth slide movement of the first effect member 460, the first Production which overlap in the movement locus of the output member 460 and the front view and the movement locus of the second effect member 560 becomes possible.

  Next, the third unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 21 is a front exploded perspective view of the third unit 600, and FIG. 22 is a rear exploded perspective view of the third unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the third unit 600 includes a third case 610, a slide shaft 640 disposed in the third case 610, and a rack portion 650 guided along the slide shaft 640. And a pinion gear 680 engaged with the rack gear 651 of the rack portion 650, a third drive motor 670 for rotationally driving the pinion gear 680, and a third effect member 660 connected to the rack portion 650. .

  The third case 610 has a box-shaped third base body 620 whose one side (the front side in FIG. 21) is open, and a third base body 620 which is fastened and fixed to one side of the third base body 620. And the third cover body 630 of the open portion of the third base body 620 is fastened and fixed to one surface side of the third base body 620. And a flat plate cover (not shown) for closing the lower portion (the lower side in FIG. 21) of the lower end. The third base body 620, the third cover body 630, and the flat cover are formed of a colorless light transmitting resin material.

  The third base body 620 is formed in a rectangular frame shape by forming a rectangular opening 621 at the center in a front view, and the rectangular frame shape is rectangular upward from the center of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 21). It is formed in the shape from which the shape part protrudes. The opening 621 corresponds to the position and size corresponding to the opening 711a of the fourth unit 700 (the fourth base body 710) when the third unit 600 is stacked on the fourth unit 700 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The display content of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible through the two openings 621 and 711a.

  A plurality of to-be-fastened portions 624 fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 711 e (see FIG. 23) of the fourth case 710 are formed on the third base body 620. An insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted is bored in each of the to-be-fastened portions 624, and a seat surface (a front side surface in FIG. 22) of each of the to-be-fastened portions 624 is a back surface of the third base body 620 (FIG. 22). It is flush with the front side of the paper). In the present embodiment, in the third base body 620, the to-be-fastened portions 624 are formed at a total of four places of two places on the upper side and two places on the lower side in front view.

  Also, a plurality of pedestals 625 and 635 are formed on the third base body 620 and the third cover body 630. The pedestal portions 625 and 635 are portions to which the to-be-fastened portions 425 and 525 in the first unit 400 and the second unit 500 are fastened and fixed (see FIGS. 36 and 37), and correspond to the respective to-be-fastened portions 425 and 525 Placed in the

  The third cover body 630 is formed in a flat plate shape, and seals a region which is above the upper side of the opening 621 (upper side in FIG. 21) of the open portion of the third base body 620. The slide shaft 640, the rack portion 650, the third drive motor 670, and the pinion gear 680 are disposed on the third base body 620 in the area sealed by the third cover body 630.

  The slide shaft 640 is a member for guiding the slide movement direction of the rack portion 650, and is formed as a rod having a circular cross section having a length equal to the width dimension (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 21) of the third base body 620. It is disposed above the opening 621 in a horizontal posture (that is, a posture parallel to the upper side of the opening 621) with its longitudinal direction directed to the width direction of the third base body 520.

  The rack portion 650 is a box-shaped body having a rectangular cross section which is slid along the longitudinal direction of the slide shaft 640, and the third effect member 660 is disposed on the lower surface (the lower surface in FIG. 21) of the box-shaped body. The rack gear 651 is formed (cut) along the longitudinal direction of the slide shaft 640 on the front side of the box-like body. A pinion gear 680 is engaged with the rack gear 651, and a drive gear 672 fixed to the drive shaft 671 of the third drive motor 670 is engaged with the pinion gear 680.

  The third unit 600 includes a pair of drive mechanisms including the third drive motor 670, the pinion gear 680, the rack portion 650, and the third effect member 660, and the pair of drive mechanisms face both sides in the width direction of the third base body 620. Will be arranged.

  According to this drive mechanism, when the pair of third drive motors 670 are rotationally driven in opposite directions from the retracted position shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, each pinion gear 680 is rotated, and the rotation of the pinion gears 680 By being transmitted to each rack gear 651, each rack portion 650 (the third effect member 660) is slidingly moved toward the center of the opening 621 along the longitudinal direction of the slide shaft 640, and each third effect member 660 is It arrange | positions in the overhang | projection position (not shown) each projected in the formation area of the opening 621. As shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the pair of third drive motors 670 are rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case from the extended position, each rack portion 650 (third effect member 660) is in the longitudinal direction of the slide shaft 640. A retracted position where each third effect member 660 is retracted from the center side of the opening 621 toward both sides (the outer edge of the third base body 620) and out of the formation region of the opening 621 (FIG. 21). And FIG. 22).

  In the present embodiment, since the drive mechanism is provided in a pair, the pair of third effect members 660 can be slid independently. For example, only one of the third effect members 660 of the pair of third effect members 660 is slid by rotating only one of the third drive motors 670 of the pair of third drive motors 670. Can. Alternatively, the pair of third effect members 660 can be slid in the same direction by rotationally driving the pair of third drive motors 670 in the same direction.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the third base body 620 is provided with a third inner rib 622 and a third outer rib 623 on its back surface. The third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 are ribs for guiding the tip side (tip portions 764L and 764R) of the fourth effect member 760 of the fourth unit 700 (see FIG. 23), and has a semicircular cross section. While being projected from the back surface of the third base body 620 as a projection having a shape of a circle, it is curved and extended in an arc shape in a back view of the third base body 620. In a back view of the third base body 620, the right half and the left half of the third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 are curved in a circular arc shape with a different position as the center of curvature.

  The third inner rib 622 is divided into three by the opening 621 at two places in the extending direction. The third inner rib 622 divided into three is gradually lowered as the standing height from the back of the third base body 620 approaches the end near the end located across the opening 621 (ie, standing) The tip (the front side in FIG. 22) is inclined downward toward the end). The downward inclined area is hereinafter referred to as "inclined portion 622a".

  The third outer rib 623 is continuously extended over the entire area from one end (right end in FIG. 22) to the other end (left end in FIG. 22) without being divided halfway. Therefore, the tip portions 764L and 764R of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are always lifted from the back surface of the third base body 620 by an amount corresponding to the protruding height of the third outer rib 623 )be able to.

  Thereby, even when the third inner rib 622 is divided halfway (that is, the tip portions 764L and 764R can not be lifted from the back surface of the third base body 620 at the divided portion, so the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R (the curved portions 761L and 761R may collide with the inner peripheral edge of the opening 621), the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R rotate the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L When rotating between the raised position and the lowered position (see FIGS. 33 to 35), the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R can be prevented from colliding with the inner peripheral edge portion of the opening 621.

  When the third unit 600 is stacked on the fourth unit 700 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), the third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 form the fourth inner rib 714 of the fourth unit 700 and the fourth rib. It is formed in the position (position which overlaps in a plain view) corresponding to the outer rib 715, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 35, the fourth unit 700 will be described. FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the fourth unit 700. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the fourth unit 700 includes a fourth case 710, a fourth effect member 760 whose base end is rotatably supported by the fourth case 710, and a fourth effect member 760. And a fourth drive motor (not shown) for generating a driving force for driving the motor. Here, the detailed configuration of the fourth case will be described with reference to FIG. 24 to FIG.

  FIG. 24 is a front perspective view of the fourth case 710, in which the front cover 716 is removed.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the fourth case 710 includes a bottom plate 711 and a wall portion 712 erected from the outer edge of the bottom plate 711. The bottom plate 711 is formed in a rectangular frame shape by forming a rectangular opening 711a at the center in a front view, and the rectangular shape is formed upward from the upper center of the rectangular frame (upper side in FIG. 23) It is formed in the shape where a portion is projected. That is, the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710 is formed to have substantially the same front view shape as the front view shape of the third base body 620 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) of the third unit 600.

  A plurality of pedestals 711 e are formed on the bottom plate 711. The pedestal portion 711e is a portion to which the to-be-fastened portion 624 of the third case 610 in the third unit 600 is fastened and fixed (see FIGS. 36 and 37), and at a position corresponding to the to-be-fastened portion 624 of the third case 610. Be placed.

  Further, a pedestal 711 f and a plurality of holes to be fastened 712 a are formed in the wall 712. The pedestal portion 711 f is a portion to which the second base body 520 (fastened portion 526) in the second unit 500 is fastened and fixed (see FIGS. 36 and 37), and corresponds to the fasted portion 526 of the second base body 520. Placed in the The to-be-fastened hole 712a is a portion to which the decorative connection plate 450 in the first unit 400 is fastened and fixed (see FIGS. 36 and 37), and is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 451 of the decorative connection plate 450.

  Here, a restriction wall 711fa extending in an L shape in a front view is erected around the pedestal portion 711f. The restriction wall 711Fa is formed corresponding to the outer shape of the to-be-fastened portion 526 (see FIG. 15) of the second base body 520, and when the to-be-fastened portion 526 is fastened and fixed to the pedestal 711f, the to-be-fastened portion The inner wall surface of the restriction wall 711 fa faces (or abuts on) the outer edge (outer side surface) of 526. Thereby, the to-be-fastened portion 526 is placed on the pedestal portion 711 f (that is, the second unit 500 is stacked on the front surface of the third unit 600 in order to connect the second unit 500 to the fourth unit 700, see FIG. 37). In this case, positioning of the fastened portion 526 with respect to the pedestal portion 711 f can be performed using the restriction wall 711 fa. Thus, the assemblability can be improved.

  Further, since the restricting portion 711fa surrounds the two sides of the outer edge of the fastened portion 526, movement (displacement) of the fastened portion 526 on the pedestal portion 711f can be restricted by the restricting portion 711fa. Therefore, the connection strength of the second unit 500 with respect to the fourth unit 700 can be increased, and wobble of the operation unit 300 (displacement of the third unit 600 and the second unit 500 with respect to the fourth unit 700) can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the pedestal portion 711f is formed to project outward (right side in FIG. 24) from the standing end of the wall portion 712 of the fourth case 710, compared to the case where the pedestal portion 711f is provided on the inner wall surface side of the wall portion 712, Not only can the accommodating capacity of each unit 400 to 600 in the fourth case 710 be ensured, but the pedestal portion 711 f functions as a reinforcing rib, whereby the rigidity of the fourth case body 710 itself can be enhanced. As a result, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be enhanced, and the wobbling at the time of operation of each of the effect members 460 to 760 can be suppressed.

  Similarly, the to-be-fastened hole 712a is formed in a portion that is flanged outward from the standing end of the wall portion 712 of the fourth case 710 (upper side in FIG. 24), and thus, the inside of the wall portion 712 is formed. As compared with the case of providing on the wall surface side, not only can the accommodation capacity of each unit 400 to 600 in the fourth case 710 can be secured, but also a portion formed in such a flange shape (a portion where the to-be-fastened hole 712a is formed) By acting as a reinforcing rib, the rigidity of the fourth case body 710 itself can be enhanced. As a result, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be enhanced, and the wobbling at the time of operation of each of the effect members 460 to 760 can be suppressed.

  The bottom plate 711 includes a driving portion disposition concave portion 711 b, a fourth base side rib 713, a fourth inner rib 714 and a fourth outer rib 715. The driving portion disposition concave portion 711b is a portion where driving means for rotationally driving the fourth effect member 760 is disposed, which is at the center of the bottom plate 711 in the width direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 24) and above the opening 711a. And is recessed in the bottom plate 711 as a rectangular recess in a front view.

  A support wall 711c is erected along the outer edge of the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b, and a front cover 716 is fastened and fixed to an erect end of the support wall 711c. The front cover 716 is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in a front view, and is covered only on the upper portion (upper side in FIG. 24) of the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b.

  Accordingly, the lower end side (the opening 711a side, the lower side in FIG. 24) of the front cover 716 is opened (see FIG. 23), and the base side of the fourth effect member 760 is described later The fourth effect member 760 can be rotated about its axially supported portion while being pivotally supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L. In addition, a pair of holding recesses (not shown) having a circular front view are provided on the back of the front cover 716 (the back surface in FIG. 24), and the pair of holding recesses are used for the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L. The tips are respectively fitted and held. Here, with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, the drive means arrange | positioned by drive part arrangement | positioning recessed part 711b is demonstrated.

  FIG. 25 is a partially enlarged front view of the fourth case 710 in which the drive portion disposition concave portion 711 b is partially magnified, and FIG. 26 is a portion in the fourth case 710 where the drive portion concave portion 711 b is partially magnified. It is an expansion front perspective view. In FIG. 26, the state in which the right gear member 790R is removed is illustrated, and the positioning jig JG for positioning the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R in the rotational direction is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, in the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b, the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L, the drive gear 770, the direction conversion gear 780, the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L. And are arranged. The direction conversion gear 780 is rotatably supported by the support shaft (not shown) and the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L by the gear shaft 718 so as to be rotatable on the bottom surface of the drive portion recess 711b. A circumferential groove is recessed at the tip end of the gear shaft 718, and a retaining ring M fitted in the circumferential groove is used as a retainer for the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L.

  The right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L are members for rotatably supporting the base end side of the fourth effect member 760 (see FIGS. 33 to 35), and are formed in a cylindrical shape from a wrought material. Ru. The right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L are disposed at a predetermined interval in the width direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 25) of the fourth case 710, and forward from the bottom of the drive portion recess 711b (FIG. 25). Both are erected vertically toward the front of the paper).

  A fourth drive motor (not shown) is disposed on the back side (the rear side of the paper surface of FIG. 25) of the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b. The direction conversion gear 780 and the right gear member 790R are engaged with the drive gear 770 fixed to the drive shaft of the fourth drive motor, and the left gear member 790L is engaged with the direction conversion gear 780. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the fourth drive motor is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force of the drive shaft is directly transmitted to the right gear member 790R and transmitted to the left gear member 790L via the direction conversion gear 780. Thus, the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L are respectively rotated in opposite directions.

  The drive gear 770 and the direction conversion gear 780 are formed as gears having the same number of teeth. That is, since the direction conversion gear 780 converts the rotation of the drive gear 770 without decelerating and converts the direction only to the left gear member 790L, the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L have the same rotational speed. Is rotated in the reverse direction.

  As shown in FIG. 26, a positioning hole 711h is formed radially outward of the gear shaft 718 in the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b, and a rotational position detection sensor S is formed radially outward of the gear shaft 718. It is arranged. The positioning hole 711h is a hole having a circular cross section into which the insertion portion JGb of the positioning jig JG is inserted, as described later.

  The rotational position detection sensor R is an optical sensor provided with a light emitting portion Ra and a light receiving portion Rb, and an opposing space of the light emitting portion Ra and the light receiving portion Rb is an annular rib 793 of the right gear member 790R (see FIGS. 27 and 28). (That is, the light emitting portion Ra and the light receiving portion Rb are disposed at positions sandwiching the annular rib 793 (see FIG. 27) from the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side). Thus, the rotational position of the right gear member 790 is detected based on the presence or absence of the intermittent portion 793a. Here, with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, the right gear member 790 will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the right gear member 790R. FIG. 28 (a) is a rear view of the right gear member 790R, and FIG. 28 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right gear member 790R taken along line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 28 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the right gear member 790R includes a gear body 791 and a projecting pin 792 projecting from the front side (the lower surface of FIG. 28B) of the gear body 791. An annular rib 793 projecting from the back side of the gear main body opposite to the projecting pin 792 is provided, and the gear main body 791, the projecting pin 792 and the annular rib 793 are integrally formed of a resin material .

  The gear main body 791 is formed in a disk shape, and a support hole 791a through which the gear shaft 718 (see FIG. 26) is inserted is formed in the center along the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 28B). At the same time, a positioning hole 791b, through which the positioning jig JG (see FIG. 26) is inserted, is formed to penetrate along the axial direction at a position eccentric from the pivotal support hole 791a. The shaft support hole 791a and the positioning hole 791b are both formed as holes having a circular cross section. Further, teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear main body 791 over a substantially half circumference. The protruding pin 792 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and protrudes in parallel with the axial center (axial support hole 791a) of the gear main body 791 and is located eccentrically from the axial center of the gear main body 791.

  A sliding cylinder L (see FIG. 26) is rotatably attached to the projecting pin 792. The sliding cylinder L comprises a cylindrical main body having a support hole and a flange-like flange projecting radially outward from an axial end of the main body, and the flange is a gear main body. It is attached to the projecting pin 792 in a posture directed to the front of 791. That is, the sliding cylinder L has a diameter of the flange portion larger than the groove width of the guide grooves 762La and 762Ra (see FIGS. 31 and 32) of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R described later The diameter of the groove is slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide grooves 762La and 762Ra of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R, and the main body portion is slidably inserted into the guide grooves 762La and 762Ra.

  The annular rib 793 is a portion detected by the rotational position detection sensor R, and is formed in a cylindrical shape (that is, an annular shape in a back view shown in FIG. 28A). In the annular rib 793, an intermittent portion 793a is formed by cutting out (dividing) a part of the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, a central angle of 15 degrees).

  Here, when the right gear member 790R is pivotally supported by the gear shaft 718 (see FIGS. 25 and 26), the annular rib 793 is disposed between the facing surfaces of the light emitting portion Ra and the light receiving portion Rb of the rotational position detection sensor R. Be done. Therefore, the rotational position detection sensor R can intercept the light emitted from the light emitting portion Ra by the annular rib 793 and can not receive light by the light receiving portion Rb, or can pass the intermittent portion 793a and receive light by the light receiving portion Rb Therefore, the rotational position of the right gear member 790R can be detected.

  As described above, the gear member 790R has the cylindrical annular rib 793 erected on the back surface of the gear main body 791, and a part of the annular rib 793 is cut away to form the intermittent portion 793a, thereby detecting the rotational position. While enabling detection of the rotational position by the sensor R, the rigidity of the gear member 790R can be simultaneously improved. For example, a plate-shaped plate to be detected is projected radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear main body 791 from which the teeth are not provided, and the plate to be detected is the outer peripheral side of the gear main body 791 A configuration is also conceivable in which detection is performed by the rotational position detection sensor R disposed at.

  However, in this configuration, since it is necessary to secure the movement space of the detection plate projected radially outward around the gear member 790R, the space necessary for disposition of the gear member 790R increases. Further, even if such a plate-like plate to be detected is projected from the outer peripheral surface, improvement in the rigidity of the gear main body 791 can not be expected.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the annular rib 793 is erected on the back surface of the gear main body 791. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure a moving space on the outer peripheral side of the gear main body 791. The required space can be reduced. In addition, the rigidity of the gear main body 791 can be improved by the cylindrical annular rib 793 standingly provided on the rear surface of the gear main body 791.

  The right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L are formed in a symmetrical shape, and the elements have the same configuration. Therefore, the corresponding components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Referring back to FIGS. 25 and 26, a method of assembling the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R, which are formed as described above, into the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b will be described. Positioning jig JG is disposed between gripping portion JGa for gripping by the operator, columnar insertion portion JGb formed coaxially with gripping portion JGa, and gripping portion JGa and insertion portion JGb. A flange portion JGc which is provided and which protrudes radially outward is formed.

  When the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R are assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (axially supported by the gear shaft 718), positioning (phase alignment) of the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R in the rotational direction is performed. There is a need to do. When the rotational direction position (phase) of the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R is deviated from the proper rotational direction position, the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R connected via the projecting pins 792 (see FIG. 33 to 35) (for example, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can not be properly brought into contact with each other in the lowered position (a ).

  In the present embodiment, by using the positioning jig JG, the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R can be assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b at an appropriate rotational direction position (phase). For example, when the right gear member 790R is assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b, first, the insertion portion JGb of the positioning jig JG is inserted into the positioning hole 791b of the right gear member 790R, and the tip of the insertion portion JGb is the right gear It projects from the back of the member 790R (gear main body 791). Then, while inserting the tip of the gear shaft 718 into the insertion hole 791a of the right gear member 790R (gear main body 791), the tip of the insertion portion JGb projecting from the back of the right gear member 790R (gear main 791) It is inserted into the positioning hole 711 of the provided recess 711 b.

  Thereby, it is possible to position the rotational direction position (phase) about the gear shaft 718 of the right gear member 790R, so that the right gear member 790R is meshed with the drive gear 770 while maintaining this posture. Thus, the right gear member 790R can be assembled in a proper state. The method of assembling the left gear member 790L to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b is also the same, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring back to FIG. The fourth base rib 713 is erected from the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710 between the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b and the opening 711a. The fourth base rib 713 is a rib for guiding the base end side of the fourth effect member 760 (see FIG. 23) of the fourth unit 700, and protrudes from the front of the bottom plate 711 as a protrusion having a semicircular cross section. It is curved and extended in an arc shape having a center on the side of the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L.

  The fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 are erected from the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710 on the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 24) of the opening 711 a. Here, the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged front view of the fourth case 710 in which a region where the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 are formed is partially enlarged. As shown in FIG. 29, the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 are ribs for guiding the tip side (tip portions 760L and 760R) of the fourth effect member 760 of the fourth unit 700 (see FIG. 29). 23), which are projected from the front of the bottom plate 411 of the fourth case 710 as a protrusion having a semicircular cross section.

  Here, in the front view of the bottom plate 711 in the fourth case 710, the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 have a right portion (a portion positioned below the right support shaft 717R, right portion in FIG. 29) The left part (the part located below the left support shaft 717L, the left part in FIG. 24) has an arc shape with the right support shaft 717R as a center while being curved and extended in an arc shape with the support shaft 717L as a center It is curved and extended. The central portion is curved and extended in an arc shape in which the right and left portions are smoothly connected. Thereby, the tip side (tip parts 760L and 760R) of the fourth effect member 760 can be guided smoothly.

  Similar to the third inner rib 622 in the third base body 620 (see FIG. 22), the fourth inner rib 714 is divided at two places in the extending direction thereof by the openings 711 a. Further, in the fourth case 710, the fourth outer rib 715 is also divided at two places in the extending direction. The area where the fourth outer rib 715 is divided (the area in which the fourth outer rib 715 is not formed) is hereinafter referred to as "divided area 711 d". Therefore, the divided area 711 d is formed as a flat surface flush with the front surface of the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710.

  Thus, by dividing the two places, the height of the standing height from the bottom plate 711 is directed toward the end in the vicinity of the end where the third inner rib 714 divided into three is located across the opening 711a. (That is, the standing tip (the front side in FIG. 29) is inclined downward toward the end). This downward inclined area is hereinafter referred to as "inclined portion 714a".

  Similarly, by dividing the two portions, the third outer rib 715 divided in three has a vertical height from the bottom plate 711 directed toward the end in the vicinity of the end positioned across the divided region 711d. Gradually lower according to (the erecting tip is inclined downward to the end). This downward inclined area is hereinafter referred to as "inclined portion 715a".

  The width of the forming area of the dividing area 711d (the length in the extending direction in which the fourth outer rib 715 is divided) is the width dimension of the tip portions 760L and 760R of the fourth effect member 760 (FIG. 31A and FIG. It is slightly larger than the horizontal dimension in FIG. 31 (d). The inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714 at the center of the fourth inner rib 714 divided into three is a tip of the fourth effect member 760 when the tip portions 760L and 760R of the fourth effect member 760 are located in the dividing region 711d. The portions 760L and 760R can be supported (the portions overlapping the tip portions 760L and 760R in a front view) (see FIG. 34).

  Here, when the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 are divided, the tip portions 764L and 764R can not be lifted from the front surface of the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710 in the divided region. The effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R (curved portions 761L and 761R) may collide with the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711a. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the tip end portions 764L and 764R are located in the divided region of the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715, the edge of the curved portions 761L and 761R is the opening 711a. It is configured to pass through the inner peripheral edge and overlap the front of the bottom plate 711 in front view (see FIGS. 33 to 35). Therefore, when the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R rotate between the raised position and the lowered position with the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L as a rotation center, the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are Collision with the inner peripheral edge portion of the opening 621 can be suppressed.

  Referring back to FIG. The fourth effect member 760 is supported by being supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L at the base side, and is supported at the tip end side (tip portions 760L, 760R) by the fourth inner rails 714 and the fourth It is disposed on the front side of the outer rail 715 (the front side in FIG. 23). Here, the detailed configuration of the fourth effect member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32.

  FIG. 30 is a front perspective view of the fourth effect member 760. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 30, the fourth effect member 760 includes a left effect member 760L and a right effect member 760R. The left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are pivotally supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L in a state where their base end sides (the upper side in FIG. 30) cross each other (see FIG. 23). Therefore, the shapes of the base end sides (the extending portions 763L and 763R) are different. However, except for the shapes of the extended portions 763L and 763R, the other portions of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are formed substantially in left-right symmetry.

  First, the left effect member 760L of the fourth effect member 760 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 (a) is a front view of the left effect member 760L, and FIG. 31 (b) is a side view of the left effect member 760L in the arrow XXXIb direction view of FIG. 31 (a), FIG. 31 (c) FIG. 31C is a partially enlarged rear view of the left directing member 760L in the arrow XXXIc direction view of FIG. 31 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the left effect member 760L includes a curved portion 761L and a base portion 762L extended upward (upper side in FIG. 31A) from the upper end edge of the curved portion 761L. An extending portion 763L obliquely extending upward from the upper end edge of the base 762L and a lower side opposite to the extending direction of the base 762L from the lower end edge of the curved portion 761L (FIG. 31 (a) And a tip portion 764L extending downward).

  The curved portion 761 L is formed in a C-shape in which the annular body is equally divided into two in left and right in front view (see FIG. 31A), and is disposed at the lowered position (see FIGS. 23 and 35). An annular shape is formed together with the curved portion 761R of the effect member 760R. A geometric decorative shape is provided on the front side of the curved portion 761L. Further, in the curved portion 761L, a mating surface 761La is formed on the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 31A) side surface.

  The base portion 762L is formed in a flat plate shape, and is formed to project horizontally (parallel to the bending portion 761L) from the outer side surface of the bending portion 761L as shown in FIG. 31 (b). The rear surface (the surface on the right side in FIG. 31B) of the base portion 762L is formed flush with the rear surface of the curved portion 761L, and a fourth base rib 713 (a projection on the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710). (See FIG. 24).

  As shown in FIG. 31C, a guide groove 762La is recessed on the back surface of the base 762L. The guide groove 762La is a concave groove having an oblong shape in a front view that is linearly extended along the extending direction of the extending portion 763L, and the protruding pin 792 of the left gear member 790L slides on the guide groove 762La. By being inserted through the movable barrel L, the left effect member 760L and the left gear member 790L are connected.

  The extending portion 763L is a portion formed in a flat plate shape, and is disposed on the tip end side (upper side of FIG. 31A) of the base portion 762L in a state of being raised to the front side (left side of FIG. 31B). . Specifically, the base end side (the lower side in FIG. 31B) of the extended portion 763L is superimposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 31B) of the base portion 762L, whereby the thickness of the base portion 762L (FIG. 31) The back surface of the extended portion 763L is raised from the back surface of the base portion 762L by the thickness of the horizontal dimension). The extended portion 763R of the right rendering member 760R can be disposed in the space on the back side (right side in FIG. 31B) of the extended portion 763L formed by this bulking. That is, the extended portion 763L of the left effect member 760L and the extended portion 763R of the right effect member 760R can intersect (see FIG. 23).

  A shaft support hole 763La, which is circular in a front view, is formed through the tip end side of the extended portion 763L. The right support shaft 717R is inserted into the shaft support hole 763La, whereby the left effect member 760L is rotatably supported (suspended) on the right support shaft 717R. The axial center of the axial support hole 763La is located on a straight line passing through the widthwise center of the guide groove 762La (an extension of the guide groove 762La), as shown in FIG. 31 (c).

  Here, the axial support hole 763La (axial center) of the left effect member 760L passes through the mating surface 761a and the side surface of the base 762L (right side surface in FIG. 31A) in the front view shown in FIG. It is disposed at a position offset by a distance L3 to the opposite side (right side of FIG. 31A) to the bending portion 761L with respect to the virtual straight line M1. Further, the curved portion 761L is curved in a convex arc shape toward the opposite side (left side in FIG. 31A) to the side where the axial support hole 763La is offset, so that the center of gravity of the left effect member 760L is virtual. With respect to the straight line M <b> 1, the curved portion 761 </ b> L side (ie, the side opposite to the right effect member 761 </ b> R, the left side in FIG. 31A) is biased.

  Thus, when the support hole 763L of the extending portion 763L is supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left effect member 760L is suspended, the center of gravity of the left effect member 760L is positioned vertically below the support hole 763La. By the action of gravity, the mating surface 761La is the opposite side of the curved portion 761L (that is, the side of the right producing member 761R side) than the vertical line (line along the direction of gravity) passing through the axial center of the axial support hole 763L. 31 (a) on the right). Therefore, when the fourth effect member 760 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIGS. 23 and 35), the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other as described later.

  On the outer side surface of the extending portion 763L, a relief concave portion 763Lc is recessed in a semicircular shape in a front view. The escape recess 763Lc is a recess for letting the left support shaft 717L escape when the left effect member 760L is disposed at the raised position. Since the left support shaft 717L can be disposed close to the left gear member 790L by the amount of the relief concave portion 763Lc, the space necessary for disposition of the both members 717L and 790L can be reduced.

  The front end portion 764L protrudes from the front of the third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 (both of which are shown in FIG. 22) and the fourth case 710 (bottom plate 711) protruding from the back of the third base body 620. It is a part disposed between the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 (see FIGS. 23 and 24) and is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular shape in a front view.

  A wall is erected along the outer edge of the front surface (the front surface in FIG. 31A) of the front end 764L to improve the rigidity of the front end 764L. The front end surface of the wall provided upright on the front of the front end 764L and the back of the front end 764L are formed as flat surfaces parallel to each other and parallel to the back of the base 762L.

  Next, the right effect member 760R of the fourth effect member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 32. 32 (a) is a front view of the right effect member 760R, and FIG. 32 (b) is a side view of the right effect member 760R in the arrow XXXIIb direction view of FIG. 32 (a), FIG. 32 (c) FIG. 32B is a partially enlarged rear view of the right directing member 760R in the direction of the arrow XXXIIc in FIG. 32 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 32, the right effect member 760R includes a curved portion 761R and a base portion 762R extended upward (upper side in FIG. 32A) from the upper end edge of the curved portion 761R; An extending portion 763R obliquely extending upward from the upper end edge of the base 762R, and a lower side opposite to the extending direction of the base 762R from the lower end edge of the bending portion 761R (FIG. 32 (a) And a tip portion 764R extending downward).

  Here, right directing member 760R differs from left directing member 760L in which extending portion 763L is raised on the front side with respect to base 762 in that extension 763R is not raised in the front side with respect to base 762R. The other configuration (curved portion 761R, base portion 762R and tip portion 764R) is formed in the same (in detail, symmetrical shape) as each configuration (curved portion 761L, base portion 762L and tip portion 764L) of the left effect member 760L. . Therefore, the description of those identical (symmetrical) configurations is omitted.

  The extending portion 763R is formed in a flat plate shape, and the base end side thereof is continuously provided on the side surface of the base 762R. That is, the extending portion 763R is formed as a portion in which the base portion 762R is extended in the same plane. Thus, the extension portion 763R can be disposed in the space on the back side of the raised extension portion 763L. That is, the thickness dimension (the dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 32B) of the extending portion 763R in the right rendering member 760R is the bulk size of the extending portion 763L in the left rendering member 760L (the back surface of the extending portion 763L and the curved portion 761L The distance between it and the back surface (see FIG. 31 (b)) is slightly smaller, so that the extending portion 763L of the left rendering member 760L and the extending portion 763R of the right rendering member 760R intersect with each other. Yes (see FIG. 23).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are between the curved portions 761L and 761R and the extended portions 763L and 763R (axial support holes 763La and 763Ra). Bases 762L and 762R (guide grooves 762La and 762Ra) are disposed to be formed. In this case, the extending portions 763L and 763R (axial support holes 763La and 763Ra) can be disposed and formed between the curved portions 761L and 761R and the bases 762L and 762R (guide grooves 762La and 762Ra). The space between the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R needs to be increased, resulting in poor space efficiency. In addition, the diameter of the drive gear 770 and the direction conversion gear 780 needs to be increased accordingly. On the other hand, according to the arrangement of the present embodiment, the space between the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R can be narrowed, so that the space efficiency can be improved. In addition, the diameter of the drive gear 770 and the direction conversion gear 780 can be reduced accordingly.

  On the outer side surface of the extending portion 763R, a relief concave portion 763Rc is concavely provided in a semicircular shape in a front view. The relief recess 763Rc is a recess for releasing the right support shaft 717R when the right effect member 760R is disposed at the raised position (see FIG. 33), similarly to the release recess 763Lc in the left effect member 760L described above. Since the right support shaft 717R can be disposed close to the right gear member 790R by the amount of the relief concave portion 763Rc, the space required to arrange both members 717R and 790R can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33 to FIG. 35, the holding structure of the fourth effect member 760 arranged at the raised position and the lowered position and the rotational operation of the fourth effect member 760 between the raised position and the lowered position will be described. In addition, since the holding structure and the rotation operation of the fourth effect member 760 are the same in both the right effect member 760R and the left effect member 760L, the right effect member 760R will be described as a representative example.

  Fig.33 (a) is a front schematic diagram of the 4th unit 700 in the state by which the right rendering member 760R is arrange | positioned in the raise position, FIG.33 (b) is the 4th unit in the XXXIIIb part of Fig.33 (a). FIG. 7 is a partial enlarged schematic view of 700.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the present embodiment, when the right effect member 760R is disposed at the raised position, a straight line L1 connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the left support shaft 717L, and the projecting pin 792 And the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the gear shaft 718 is orthogonal (that is, the angle .theta. = 90 degrees).

  Thereby, even if an external force acts on the right effect member 760R, no force component in a direction to rotate the right gear member 790R (ie, a force component in a direction orthogonal to the straight line L2) is generated, and the rotation of the right gear member 790R Can be regulated. Specifically, for example, even if the right directing member 760 tries to rotate clockwise as shown in FIG. 33A about the left support shaft 717L by the gravity acting on the mass of the right directing member 760R itself, the rotation is Since the protrusion pin 792 is pressed toward the gear shaft 718 (that is, in the direction along the straight line L2) on the inner wall surface of the groove 762Ra, the direction to rotate the right gear member 790R (direction orthogonal to the straight line L2) The right gear member 790R can not be rotated.

  As a result, since the right effect member 760R can be mechanically maintained at the raised position shown in FIG. 33A, the driving force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) can be reduced (or released). it can. As a result, it is possible to miniaturize the capacity of the fourth drive motor and to suppress the energy consumption.

  FIG. 34 (a) is a schematic front view of the fourth unit 700 in a state in which the right effect member 760R is disposed between the raised position and the lowered position, and FIG. 34 (b) is a sectional view of FIG. It is a partial expansion schematic diagram of the 4th unit 700 in a XXXIVb part.

  When the fourth drive motor is rotationally driven from the state shown in FIG. 33 and the right gear member 790R is rotated counterclockwise about FIG. 33 (a) about the gear shaft 718 by the rotational drive force, the projecting pins A right effecting member 760R, which is moved toward one end of the guide groove 762Ra (end close to the left support shaft 717L) along the guide groove 762Ra, the centering member 760R located at the rising position is centered on the left support shaft 717L As it is rotated. Thereby, the rotation (lowering) of the right effect member 760R to the lower position is started.

  When rotation (descent) of the right effect member 760R toward the descent position is started, in the process of rotation (descent), the projecting pin 792 is one end of the guide groove 762Ra (the side closer to the left support shaft 717L After being moved towards the end by a predetermined amount, a change of direction of the movement occurs and is moved in the reverse direction. That is, the projecting pin 792 moving toward one end of the guide groove 762Ra changes direction and moves toward the other end of the guide groove 762a (the end remote from the left support shaft 717L).

  Thus, when the direction change of the movement direction of the protrusion pin 792 occurs, the change in the direction of the force acting on the inner wall surface of the guide groove 762Ra from the protrusion pin 792 becomes discontinuous at the time of the direction change. Since the behavior of the effect member 760R becomes unstable, it causes a runaway (flapping) of the tip 764R of the right effect member 760R. Therefore, the tip portion 764R is difficult to move by being locked (sandwiched) between the third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 and the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 facing each other ( Alternatively, it may not be possible to move, and smooth rotation of the right directing member 760R may be impeded.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the right gear member 790R is in the phase (or near the phase in which the direction of movement of the protruding pin 792 is changed in the guide groove 762Ra). Is reached, the tip portion 764R of the right effect member 760R is configured to be located in the divided area 711d. That is, when the front end portion 764R of the right effect member 760R is positioned in the dividing area 711d (or positioned in the dividing area 711d and the inclined portion 715a), the moving direction of the protruding pin 792 is changed. Ru.

  As a result, even if the tipping portion 764R of the right rendering member 760R undergoes a bounce when the direction of movement of the projecting pin 792 is changed, the tip portion 764R is utilized by using the space formed by the dividing region 711d. Can be prevented from being locked between the opposing surfaces of the third inner rib 622 and the third outer rib 623 and the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715. Therefore, movement of the tip portion 764R of the right effect member 760R can be secured, and smooth rotation of the right effect member 760R about the left support shaft 717L can be obtained.

  Further, in this case, when the tip end portion 764R of the right effect member 760R is located at (or near) the dividing region 711d, the tip end portion 764R is the inclined portion 622a of the third inner rib 622 and the fourth inner rib 714. , 714a, the inclination of the inclined portions 622a, 714a can be used to early recover from the flapping of the tip 764R. In particular, since the third inner rib 622 and the fourth inner rib 714 are portions that abut on the root side (the curved portion 761 R side) of the tip portion 764R, the third outer rib 623 and the fourth outer rib 715 described above It is possible to achieve coexistence with the suppression effect of the tip portion 764R being locked (sandwiched) between the facings.

  Here, when the right effect member 760R is further rotated (lowered) from the state where the tip end portion 764R is located in the divided area 711d as shown in FIG. 34 toward the lowered position (see FIG. 35), as described above The tip end portion 764R is first lifted to the inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714, and when the right effect member 760R further rotates (is lowered) to the lowered position, the side edge portion in the advancing direction of the tip portion 764R (FIG. The left side passes through the inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714, and the tip 764R is completely lifted (bulked) from the front of the bottom plate 711 by the fourth inner rib 714.

  In the present embodiment, the joint surface 761Ra of the curved portion 761R is the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711a after at least the side edge (left side in FIG. 34) of the leading end 764R in the advancing direction passes the inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714 When the side edge (the left side in FIG. 34) of the leading end 764R in the advancing direction passes the inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714, the curved portion 761R There is a gap between the mating surface 761Ra and the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711a). Accordingly, when the right effect member 760R is rotated (lowered) from the raised position to the lowered position, it can be suppressed that the mating surface 761Ra of the right effect member 760R collides with the inner peripheral edge portion of the opening 711a. .

  FIG. 35 (a) is a schematic front view of the fourth unit 700 in a state where the right rendering member 760R is disposed at the lowered position, and FIG. 35 (b) is a fourth unit in the XXXVb portion of FIG. 35 (a). FIG. 7 is a partial enlarged schematic view of 700.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the present embodiment, when the right effect member 760R is disposed at the lowered position, a straight line L1 connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the left support shaft 717L, and the projecting pin 792 And the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the gear shaft 718 is orthogonal (that is, the angle .theta. = 90 degrees).

  Thus, even when an external force is applied to the right effect member 760R, a force component in a direction to rotate the right gear member 790R (that is, a force component in a direction orthogonal to the straight line L2) is generated. Therefore, the rotation of the right gear member 790R can be restricted. Therefore, for example, even if the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is shaken by the player, it is possible to suppress rattling of the right effect member 760R in the direction of rotation about the left support shaft 717L. As a result, even in the lowered position, even when affected by the disturbance, the postures of the right effect member 760R and the left effect member 760L are maintained in a state in which the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La are in contact and in close contact with each other (see FIG. 23). be able to.

  Here, when the displacement of the right effect member 760R in the stopped state is started, the load of the fourth drive motor (not shown) is increased due to the influence of the inertial force and the static frictional force. In particular, when rotating (raising) the right effect member 760R in the lowered position toward the raised position, it is necessary to drive against the mass (gravity) of the right effect member 760R, so the load of the fourth drive motor Becomes larger.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when the right directing member 760R is stopped at the lowered position, a straight line L1 connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the left support shaft 717L and the axial center of the projecting pin 792 And the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the gear shaft 718 is orthogonal (that is, the tangential direction of the projecting pin 792 of a circle centered on the gear shaft 718 and the extending direction of the guide groove 762Ra (inner wall surface) Because the reduction gear ratio is large, the right effect member 760R rotates around the left support shaft 717L with respect to a unit rotation angle around the gear shaft 718 of the right gear member 780R. The rotation angle can be reduced. Therefore, when starting the rotation (rising) of the right effect member 760R from the lowered position, the load of the fourth drive motor can be reduced, and the capacity of the fourth drive motor can be reduced.

  Here, in the lowered position shown in FIG. 35, the right effect member 760R and the left effect member 760L abut each other on the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La to form an annular shape by the curved portions 761R and 761L ( See Figure 23). In this case, the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La can not be in close contact with each other, and when a gap is formed, the appearance of the annular shape is not adjusted, and the rendering effect is lost. However, in practice, it is difficult to bring the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La into close contact with each other due to dimensional tolerances of the respective members, shape tolerances, assembly tolerances, control errors of the fourth drive motor, or the like.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the right effect member 760R and the left effect member 760L cross the extended portions 763R and 763L with each other (that is, the right effect member 760R is the left support shaft In 717L, the left effect member 760L is suspended from the right support shaft 717R, respectively, and the suspension support points (the left support shaft 717L and the right support shaft 717R) are curved portions 761R with respect to the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La. , 761 L and offset to the opposite side. Thus, in the lowered position shown in FIG. 35, the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La can be pushed toward each other by the action of gravity that tends to position the center of gravity position vertically below the suspension support point. For example, in the case of the right effect member 760R shown in FIG. 35 (a), the mating surface 761Ra is pushed out to the left in FIG. 35a. As a result, in the lowered position, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other.

  For example, in the right effect member 760R, between the left support shaft 717L and the axial support hole 763Ra, between the guide groove 762Ra and the sliding cylinder L, between the sliding cylinder L and the protruding pin 792, or Since there is a gap between the gear shaft 718 and the insertion hole 791a, the portion of the gap pushes the mating surface 761Ra to the other side (the mating surface 761La side of the left effect member 760L, left side in FIG. 35A). . Therefore, in the lowered position, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other.

  When the right effect member 760R is rotated (raised) from the lowered position to the raised position shown in FIG. 35 (see FIGS. 33 and 34), in the present embodiment, the tip portion 764R is the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth. With the outer rib 715 completely lifted (bulked) from the front of the bottom plate 711, the outer peripheral edge (the side edge in the traveling direction, right side in FIG. 35) of the curved portion 761 R is the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711 a It is formed to pass through.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, at least the side edge (left side in FIG. 35) opposite to the direction of movement of the tip 764R is lifted by at least one of the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715. (Ie, in a state before the side edge opposite to the advancing direction of the tip 764R reaches both the inclined portions 714a and 715a), the outer peripheral edge of the bending portion 761R passes the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711a When the side edge portion (left side in FIG. 35) opposite to the advancing direction of the tip portion 764R reaches the inclined portion 714a of the fourth inner rib 714, the curved portion 761R is The outer peripheral edge has already passed through the inner peripheral edge of the opening 711 a). Thus, when the right effect member 760R is rotated (raised) from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer peripheral edge portion of the right effect member 760R can be prevented from colliding with the inner peripheral edge portion of the opening 711a. .

  The assembled state of the first unit 400 to the fourth unit 700 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG.

  36 and 37 are partially exploded front exploded perspective views of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 36 is a front exploded perspective view of the first unit 400, the third unit 600, and the fourth unit 700. 37 is a front exploded perspective view of the second unit 500, the third unit 600, and the fourth unit 700. FIG. In FIGS. 36 and 37, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the respective units 400 to 700 are schematically illustrated, and only the reference numerals necessary for the description of the assembled state are illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the first unit 400, the third unit 600, and the fourth unit 700, the third unit 600 is accommodated in the internal space of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, and the third unit 600. The first unit 400 is stacked on the front side of the second unit 400, and the first unit 400 is assembled to be connected to the fourth unit 700.

  More specifically, the third unit 600 stacks the back surface of the third base body 620 on the front surface of the bottom plate 711 in the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700. Thus, the to-be-fastened portion 624 of the third base body 620 is placed on the pedestal portion 711e of the fourth case 710, so the to-be-fastened portion 624 is fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 711e by a fastening screw (not shown). . As a result, the third unit 600 is disposed (connected) to the fourth unit 700.

  The first unit 400 stacks the back surface of the first base body 420 on the front of the third base body 620 and the third cover body 630 in the third unit 600. Thereby, the to-be-fastened portion 425 of the first base body 420 is placed on the pedestal portion 635 of the third base body 620, so the to-be-fastened portion 425 is fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 635 by a fastening screw (not shown). Do. As a result, the first unit 400 is disposed (connected) to the third unit 600.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative connection plate 450 in the first unit 400 is further inserted into the to-be-fastened hole 712 a of the fourth case 710 in the fourth unit 700 by a fastening screw (not shown) inserted through the insertion hole 451. Fasten and fix. Thus, the first unit 400 is connected to the fourth unit 700. That is, when the third unit 600 and the first unit 400 are accommodated in a state where they are stacked in the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, the first unit 400 at the top layer and the fourth unit 700 at the bottom layer Since connection is possible, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be secured. Thereby, even if each effect member 460, 660, 760 of each unit 400, 600, 700 operates, its wobble (displacement of the third unit 600 and the first unit 400 with respect to the fourth unit 700) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to operate each of the effect members 460, 660, 760 more quickly (speeding up of the operation).

  In addition, as described above, the portion where the to-be-fastened hole 712a is formed is flanged outward from the standing end of the wall portion 712 of the fourth case 710 (upper side in FIG. 36). Not only can the accommodation capacity of each of the units 400 to 600 in the fourth case 710 be ensured, but the flange-like overhanging portion can function as a reinforcing rib to increase the rigidity of the fourth case body 710 itself. As a result, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be enhanced, and the wobbling at the time of operation of each of the effect members 460 to 760 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in the second unit 500, the third unit 600 and the fourth unit 700, the third unit 600 is accommodated in the internal space of the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, and the third unit 600 The second unit 500 is stacked on the front side of the second unit 500, and the second unit 500 is assembled to be connected to the fourth unit 700.

  More specifically, as in the case described above, the third unit 600 stacks the back surface of the third base body 620 on the front surface of the bottom plate 711 in the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700. Thus, the to-be-fastened portion 624 of the third base body 620 is placed on the pedestal portion 711e of the fourth case 710, so the to-be-fastened portion 624 is fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 711e by a fastening screw (not shown). . As a result, the third unit 600 is disposed (connected) to the fourth unit 700.

  The second unit 500 stacks the back surface of the second base body 520 on the front surface of the third base body 620 in the third unit 600. Thus, the to-be-fastened portion 525 of the second base body 520 is placed on the pedestal portion 625 of the third base body 620, so the to-be-fastened portion 525 is fastened and fixed to the pedestal portion 625 by a fastening screw (not shown). Do. As a result, the second unit 500 is disposed (connected) to the third unit 600.

  In the present embodiment, the to-be-fastened portion 626 of the second base body 520 in the second unit 500 is further fastened and fixed to the pedestal 711 f of the fourth case 710 in the fourth unit 700 by a fastening screw (not shown). Thus, the second unit 500 is connected to the fourth unit 700. That is, when the third unit 600 and the second unit 500 are accommodated in a state where they are stacked in the fourth case 710 of the fourth unit 700, the uppermost second unit 500 and the lowermost fourth unit 700 can be Since connection is possible, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be secured. Thereby, even if each effect member 560, 660, 760 of each unit 500, 600, 700 operates, its wobble (displacement of the third unit 600 and the second unit 500 with respect to the fourth unit 700) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to operate each of the effect members 560, 660, 760 more quickly (speeding up of the operation).

  As described above, the regulation wall 711fa is erected around the pedestal portion 711f, and when stacking the second unit 500, the positioning of the to-be-fastened portion 526 with respect to the pedestal portion 711f is performed using the regulation wall 711fa Can be done. Thus, the assemblability can be improved. Further, the restricting portion 711fa is formed so as to surround two sides of the outer edge of the fastened portion 526, and movement (displacement) of the fastened portion 526 on the pedestal portion 711f can be restricted by the restricting portion 711fa. The connection strength can be increased. As a result, rattling of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the pedestal portion 711 f is formed so as to protrude outward (right side in FIG. 37) from the erected end of the wall portion 712 of the fourth case 710, whereby each unit 400 to the fourth case 710 is formed. Not only can the storable amount of ~ 600 be secured, but also the pedestal portion 711 f can function as a reinforcing rib to increase the rigidity of the fourth case body 710 itself. As a result, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 as a whole can be enhanced, and the wobbling at the time of operation of each of the effect members 460 to 760 can be suppressed.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38 to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the crank mechanism for rotationally driving the right effect member 760R and the left effect member 760L is described by the two members of the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R, but the second embodiment The crank mechanism in is constituted by one member (gear member 2790). The same parts as those in the above embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a partially enlarged front view of the fourth case 2710 in which the drive portion disposition concave portion 2711 b in the second embodiment is partially enlarged. FIG. 39 is a drive portion arrangement in which the vicinity of the gear member 2790 is partially enlarged. It is a partially expanded front schematic diagram of the provided recessed part 2711b. 39 (a) shows a state in which the protruding pin 2792 is in the raised position, and FIG. 39 (b) shows a state in which the protruding pin 2792 is between the raised position and the lowered position in FIG. 39 (c). The figures show the state in which the protruding pin 2792 is in the lowered position.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L, the drive gear 770, the gear member 2790 meshed with the drive gear 770, and the gear member 2790 are provided in the drive portion disposition recess 2711b. The link member 2791 whose lower end (the lower side in FIG. 38) is rotatably connected, the projecting pin 2792 protruding from the upper end (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the link member 2791, and the rear side of the link member 2791 An elongated hole-shaped guide groove 2711g is provided in which a guide pin (not shown) to be provided is inserted.

  A fourth drive motor (not shown) is disposed on the back side (the rear side of the page of FIG. 38) of the drive portion disposition concave portion 2711b, and a drive gear 770 fixed to the drive shaft of the fourth drive motor is disposed. The gear member 2790 is engaged. The gear member 2790 is rotatably supported by the gear shaft 2718 on the bottom surface of the drive portion disposition recess 2711 b. Therefore, when the fourth drive motor is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force is transmitted to the gear member 2790 through the drive gear 770, whereby the gear member 2790 is rotated about the gear shaft 2718. .

  The gear member 2790 has a gear body, a connecting shaft 2790a protruding from the front side (the front side in FIG. 38) of the gear body, and a rear side of the gear body opposite to the connecting shaft 2790a (FIG. 38). The gear main body, the connecting shaft 2790a and the annular rib are integrally formed of a resin material.

  The gear main body is formed in a disk shape, and rotatably supported by the drive portion disposition concave portion 2711 b via a gear shaft 2718 inserted at the center thereof. Teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear main body over substantially a half circumference. The connecting shaft 2790a is formed in a cylindrical shape, protrudes in parallel with the shaft center (gear shaft 2718) of the gear main body, and is eccentrically located from the shaft center of the gear main body.

  The annular rib is a portion detected by a rotational position detection sensor R (see FIG. 26) disposed on the back side of the gear member 2790, and has a similar shape (similar shape) to the annular rib 793 in the first embodiment. It is formed. That is, the intermittent portion is formed in the annular rib by cutting out (dividing) a part in the circumferential direction, and the rotational position of the gear member 2790 is detected based on the presence or absence of the intermittent portion.

  The link member 2791 is a long plate-like member, and the lower end in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 38) is rotatably supported by the connecting shaft 2790a of the gear main body 2790. A projecting pin 2792 is provided on the upper end (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the link member 2791 from the front side (the front side in FIG. 38) and a guide pin (shown in FIG. ) Is projected.

  The protruding pin 2792 is a portion inserted into the guide groove 2762a (see FIGS. 40 to 42) of the right producing member 2760R and the left producing member 2760L, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is disposed parallel to the connecting shaft 2790a. Ru. The guide pin is a portion that is inserted into a guide groove 2711g formed in the drive portion disposition recess 2711b, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is disposed coaxially with the protruding pin 2792.

  The guide groove 2711g has a groove width (dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 38) slightly larger than the diameter of the guide pin of the link member 2791 (that is, guides the moving direction of the guide pin in only one direction) These grooves are recessed in the drive portion installation recess 2711b. The extending direction (longer axis direction of the oval) of the guide groove 2711g is set in a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 38) perpendicular to the direction connecting the axial centers of the left support shaft 717L and the right support shaft 717R. The axial center of the gear shaft 2718 is located on a straight line (an extension of the guide groove 2711g) passing through the center of the guide groove 2711g in the groove width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 38).

  As shown in FIG. 39, in the projecting pin 2792, the rotation of the gear member 2790 around the gear shaft 2718 is transmitted through the link member 2791 to guide grooves between the raised position and the lowered position. Reciprocate along 2711 g.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), the drive gear 770 (see FIG. 38) is driven by the rotational drive force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) from the state where the projecting pin 2792 is arranged at the raised position. When rotated in one direction, the gear member 2790 is rotated about the gear shaft 2718 in one direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 39A). As shown in FIG. 39 (b), as the gear member 2790 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 39 (a), the link member 2791 is pulled down via the connecting shaft 2790a, and the projecting pin 2792 is in the guide groove It is displaced downward along 2711 g. As shown in FIG. 39 (c), when the drive gear 770 (see FIG. 38) is further rotated in one direction by a predetermined amount by the rotational drive force of the fourth drive motor from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b). The projecting pins 2792 are disposed at the lowered position.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 39C, the drive gear 770 is rotated in the other direction by the rotational drive force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) from the state where the protruding pin 2792 is disposed at the lowered position. Then, the gear member 2790 is rotated about the gear shaft 2718 in the other direction (clockwise in FIG. 39C). As shown in FIG. 39 (b), the link member 2791 is pushed upward through the connecting shaft 2790a with the clockwise rotation of the gear member 2790 in FIG. 39 (c), and the projecting pin 2792 is in the guide groove 2711g. Is displaced upward along the As shown in FIG. 39A, when the drive gear 770 (see FIG. 38) is further rotated in the other direction by a predetermined amount by the rotational drive force of the fourth drive motor from the state shown in FIG. 39B. , And the projecting pin 2792 is disposed at the raised position.

  The protruding pins 2792 are inserted through the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra of the fourth effect member 2760 (the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R) as described later, and the protruding pins 2792 are of the gear member 2790. By rotating along the guide groove 2711g between the raised position and the lowered position along with the rotation, the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R rise with the right indication shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L as a rotation center. It is rotated (raised and lowered) between the position and the lowered position (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), in the state where the protruding pin 2792 is disposed at the raised position, the gear on the extension of a virtual straight line connecting the shaft center of the protruding pin 2792 and the shaft center of the connecting shaft 2790a. The axis of axis 2718 is located. Further, as shown in FIG. 39C, in a state where the protruding pin 2792 is disposed at the lowered position, the gear shaft 2718 is on an imaginary straight line connecting the shaft center of the protruding pin 2792 and the shaft center of the connecting shaft 2790a. The axis of is located.

  In this case, a guide pin (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the link member 2791 is inserted into the guide groove 2711g, and the movement direction is regulated by the guide groove 2711g. Therefore, the extending direction of the guide groove 2711g Only movement in the (up and down direction in FIG. 39) is permitted. Therefore, only the movement of the protruding pin 2792 disposed coaxially with the guide pin in the extending direction of the guide groove 2711g is permitted.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 39 (a) or 39 (c), in a state where the protruding pin 2792 is disposed at the raised position or the lowered position, an external force in any direction acts on the protruding pin 2792. Even if the force acting on the connecting shaft 970a from the protruding pin 2792 via the link member 2791 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the gear member 2790, the rotation of the gear member 2790 may be restricted. it can.

  FIG. 40 (a) is a front view of the left effect member 2760L, and FIG. 40 (b) is a side view of the left effect member 2760L in the direction of the arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 41 (a) is a front view of the right effect member 2760R, and FIG. 41 (b) is a side view of the right effect member 2760R in the arrow XLIb direction view of FIG. 41 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R constituting the fourth effect member 2760 in the second embodiment are different from the first in that the formation positions of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra are different. It is configured in the same manner as the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R in the embodiment.

  Specifically, in the left effect member 760L of the first embodiment, the guide groove 762La is recessed on the back surface of the base 762L (see FIG. 31C), but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A guide groove 2763La is formed through the extended portion 763L. Similarly, in the right effect member 760R of the first embodiment, the guide groove 762Ra is recessed on the back surface of the base 762R (see FIG. 32 (c)), but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A guide groove 2763Ra is formed through the provided portion 763R.

  When the shaft support hole 763La of the left effect member 2760L is axially supported by the right support shaft 717R and the shaft support hole 763Ra of the right effect member 2760R is supported by the left support shaft 717L, the guide groove 2763La and the guide groove 2763Ra cross each other. The protruding pins 2792 are inserted through the intersections of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra (see FIG. 42). Thereby, the two members of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are connected to the gear member 2790 via the link member 2791 and the projecting pin 2792.

  The guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra are formed in an oval shape in a front view, and the groove widths (the distance between the inner wall surfaces) of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra are the outer diameter of the protruding pins 2792 (see FIG. 38). Slightly larger than. In the state where the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L (see FIG. 42), the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra are imaginary straight lines M1 (see FIG. 40A). It is formed in the shape which becomes line symmetry which makes a symmetry axis.

  Then, referring to FIGS. 39, 42 and 43, the holding structure of left directing member 2760L and right directing member 2760R (fourth directing member 2760) arranged at the rising position and the lowering position, and the raising position and the lowering position. The rotation operation of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R in the interval will be described.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a schematic front view of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R in the state of being disposed at the ascending position, and FIG. 42 (b) is disposed between the ascending position and the descending position. It is a front schematic diagram of left production member 2760L and right production member 2760R in a state. FIG. 43 is a schematic front view of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R in the state of being disposed at the lowered position.

  As shown in FIG. 39, FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, when the projecting pin 2792 is raised toward the raised position, the projecting pin 2792 is moved toward the upper end of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra, and the left effect member The 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are pushed up. That is, the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are rotated (raised) around the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L and arranged at the raised position (see FIGS. 39 (a) and 42 (a)). .

  On the other hand, when the protruding pin 2792 is lowered toward the lowered position, the protruding pin 2792 is moved toward the lower end of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra, and the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are pulled down. . That is, the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are rotated (lowered) about the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L and arranged at the lowered position (see FIGS. 39C and 43).

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 42 (a), in the state where the projecting pin 2792 is disposed at the raised position, as described above, the external force in any direction is applied to the projecting pin 2792. No force component in the direction of rotating the gear member 2790 is generated by the force acting on the connecting shaft 970a from the projecting pin 2792 via the link member 2791 even if can do.

  Specifically, due to the gravity acting on the mass of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R, the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R rotate (fall) around the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L. Since the force acting in the direction to rotate the gear member 2790 does not occur even if the inner wall surfaces of the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra try to push the protrusion pin 79 downward due to the action to be performed (see FIG. 39A). , The gear member 2760 can not be rotated.

  As a result, since the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R can be mechanically maintained at the raised position shown in FIG. 42A, the driving force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) is reduced (or released). Can). As a result, it is possible to miniaturize the capacity of the fourth drive motor and to suppress the energy consumption.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 39 (c) and 43, even when the projecting pin 2792 is disposed at the lowered position, as described above, an external force acts on the projecting pin 2792 in any direction. Even if the force acting on the connecting shaft 970a from the protruding pin 2792 via the link member 2791 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the gear member 2790, the rotation of the gear member 2790 may be restricted. it can.

  Thus, for example, even if the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is shaken by the player, etc., in the direction of rotation about the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R. It can suppress rattling. As a result, even in the lowered position, the postures of the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R are maintained in a state in which the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La are in contact with each other and in close contact with each other. be able to.

  Further, in the lowered position shown in FIG. 43, the right producing member 2760R and the left producing member 2760L abut each other on the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La to form an annular shape by the curved portions 761R and 761L (FIG. 23). According to the present embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, the right rendering member 2760R and the left rendering member 2760L are in a state in which the extending portions 763R and 763L cross each other (that is, the right rendering member 2760R The left effect member 2760L is suspended from the right support shaft 717R to the left support shaft 717L, and the suspension support points (the left support shaft 717L and the right support shaft 717R) with respect to the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La. It is offset to the opposite side to the curved portions 761R and 761L.

  Thus, in the lowered position shown in FIG. 43, the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La can be pushed toward each other by the action of gravity that tends to position the center of gravity position vertically below the suspension support point. As a result, in the lowered position, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, the guide grooves 2763La and 2763Ra are made to intersect, and the protruding pin 2792 is inserted through the intersections, thereby forming one crank mechanism (gear member 2790, link member The rotation (raising and lowering) of the two members (the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R) can be achieved by the mechanism including the 2791 and the protruding pin 2792. That is, it is possible to mechanically maintain the left effect member 2760L and the right effect member 2760R in the raised position and the lowered position, thereby reducing the capacity of the fourth drive motor and suppressing the consumed energy, and the number of crank mechanisms The cost can be reduced to reduce the cost of parts.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. In the first embodiment, the positioning jig JG is used to position the rotational direction position (phase) of the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R. However, the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member in the third embodiment The 3790R can be positioned in the rotational direction (phase) without using the positioning jig JG. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a partial enlarged front view of the fourth case 3710 in which the drive portion disposition concave portion 711 b in the third embodiment is partially magnified. FIG. 45 is a fourth enlarged view of the drive portion concave portion 711 b. 15 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of a four case 3710. FIG. In FIG. 45, the state in which the right gear member 3790R is removed is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, a pair of positioning pieces 3719 are disposed radially outward (upper in FIGS. 44 and 45) of the gear shaft 718 in the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b. The pair of positioning pieces 3719 is a portion for positioning the rotational direction position (phase) of the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718), and the drive portion disposition An erected portion 3719a erected from the front (the front side in FIG. 44) of the concave portion 711b, and an overhanging portion 3719b projected toward the gear shaft 718 from the erected tip of the erected portion 3719a. That is, the positioning piece 3719 is formed in an L-shape in a side view in which the standing front end side is bent toward the gear shaft 718 (see FIG. 46).

  In the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R, notches 3794 are respectively formed on the outer peripheral edge. The notch 3794 is a notch for passing the overhanging portion 3719b of the positioning piece 3719 when the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R are assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718), The outer peripheral peripheral edge portion of the gear main body 791 is cut out in a U-shape in a front view.

  In the positioning piece 3719, the distance between the axial center of the gear shaft 718 and the wall surface on the gear shaft 718 side of the overhanging portion 3719b is left in front view (view in the axial direction of the gear shaft 718) shown in FIG. The maximum radius of the gear body 3790L and the gear main body 791 of the right gear member 3790R is smaller (see FIG. 46 (b)). The width dimension (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 44) of the notch 3794 is equal to or slightly larger than the width dimension (the dimension in the lateral direction in FIG. 44) of the projecting portion 3719b of the positioning piece 3719. Thus, when the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R are assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718), the overhanging portion 3719b passes through the notch portion 3794, whereby the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790L The rotational direction position (phase) of the gear member 3790R is positioned at a predetermined position.

  In the positioning piece 3719, the distance between the axial center of the gear shaft 718 and the wall surface on the gear shaft 718 side of the standing portion 3719a is made larger than the maximum radius of the gear body 791 of the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R. And the facing distance between the front of the driving portion disposition concave portion 711b and the rear surface (the rear side of the paper surface of FIG. 44) of the overhang portion 3719b is determined by the thickness dimension of the gear main body 391 of the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member Is also enlarged (see FIG. 46 (c)). Therefore, after the overhanging portion 3719b passes through the notch portion 3794, the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R (the gear main body 391) are rotated about the gear shaft 718 without being hindered by the overhanging portion 3719b. It can be rotated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a method of assembling the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718) will be described. Since the method of assembling to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b is common to the left gear member 3790L and the right gear member 3790R, the method of assembling the right gear member 3790R will be described, and the method of assembling the left gear member 3790L will be described. Omit.

  46 (a) to 46 (c) are cross-sectional views of the right gear member 3790R and the drive portion installation concave portion 711b along the line XLVI-XLVI in FIG. 44, in the drive portion installation concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718). A state transition when assembling the right gear member 3790R is illustrated.

  When the right gear member 3790R is assembled to the drive portion disposition concave portion 711b (gear shaft 718), first, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), the tip of the gear shaft 718 is inserted into the insertion hole 791a of the right gear member 3790R. Let Then, the right gear member 3790R is rotated about the gear shaft 718, and the rotational direction position (phase) of the notch 3794 is made coincident with the positioning piece 3719 (the overhang 3729b). By pushing in the left direction in FIG. 46B, as shown in FIG. 46B, the protruding portion 3719b of the positioning piece 3719 is inserted into the notch 3794.

  Thus, the rotational direction position (phase) about the gear shaft 718 of the right gear member 3790R can be positioned at a predetermined position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46C, this posture is maintained. The right gear member 3790R is further pushed in the axial direction (left direction in FIG. 46 (b)). As a result, the right gear member 3790R and the drive gear 770 can be engaged with each other, and the right gear member 3790R can be assembled in an appropriate state.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide groove 424 of the first base body 420 is formed to have a constant groove width along the extending direction has been described, but the first base body 4420 in the fourth embodiment The guide groove 4424 is formed such that the groove width increases from the upper end or the lower end toward the center in the extending direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 47 is a front exploded perspective view of the first base body 4420 and the first cover body 4430 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 47, the guide groove 4424 of the first base body 4420 is formed in the shape of an elongated hole in a front view, and the groove width changes along its extending direction (that is, in the extending direction (longitudinal direction) Along the way, the groove width is maximized, and the groove width is gradually reduced from the maximum groove width portion toward the upper end or the lower end).

  Specifically, in the guide groove 4424, the inner wall surface 4424R on the right side in a front view on the extension direction side of the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 14) is continuously formed in a straight line in front view in parallel to the guide wall 423. On the other hand, the inner wall surface 4424L on the left side in a front view facing the inner wall surface 4424R is formed in a shape of a front view that is convex in the direction of separating from the inner wall surface 4424R.

  In the guide groove 4424, a wall similar to that of the first embodiment is erected toward the front side (the front side of the drawing sheet of FIG. 47) along the opening edge. Further, in the assembled state of the first case body 410 (see FIG. 7), the inner wall surface of the collar guide recess 4432 of the first cover body 4430 overlaps the inner wall surface 4424R, 4424L of the guide groove 4424 in a front view. It is formed.

  A process of assembling the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 8) to the first base body 4420 and the first cover body 4430 thus formed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a partially enlarged schematic view of the guide groove 4424 and the first effect member 460, and FIG. 48 (a) shows the state before the collar C is inserted into the guide groove 4424, FIG. And in FIG.48 (c), the state after the collar C is penetrated by the guide groove 4424 is illustrated.

  When attaching the first effect member 460 to the first base body 4420, the pair of collars C disposed on the back side of the base 461 is inserted through the guide groove 4424 of the first base body 4420 and the rack It is necessary to mesh the rack gear 465b of the portion 465 with the pinion gear 480 disposed on the first base body 420 (see FIG. 8). In this case, when the groove width of the guide groove 4424 is constant along the extending direction, when the pair of collars C is first inserted through the guide groove 4424, the meshing between the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 is performed. On the other hand, if the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 are engaged first, it may be difficult to insert the pair of collars C into either one of the guide grooves 4424.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove width of the guide groove 4424 is changed along the extending direction, as shown in FIGS. 48 (b) and 48 (c), the groove width (inner wall surface 4424L, The degree of freedom of the insertion position of the collar C with respect to the guide groove 4424 can be enhanced by utilizing a portion where the facing distance 4424R is increased. Therefore, since the position of the base 461 can be adjusted, the degree of freedom of the positional relationship of the rack gear 465b with respect to the pinion gear 480 can be increased accordingly (see FIG. 8).

  Thus, even if the pair of collars C is first inserted into the guide groove 4424, the pinion gear 480 can be adjusted by adjusting the position of the base 461, as shown in FIGS. 48 (b) and 48 (c). Since the position of the rack gear 465b with respect to the above can also be adjusted, these two gears 465b and 480 can be easily meshed. On the other hand, even if the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 are engaged first, the flexibility of the position where the collar C can be inserted is high because the width of the guide groove 4424 is wide. Each can be easily inserted into the guide groove 4424.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the rack guide recess 4431 (inner wall surface) of the first cover body 4430 is formed in the same shape as the guide groove 4424 (inner wall surface 4424L, 4424R) of the first base body 4420, After assembling the first effect member 460 to the first base body 4420, also in the process of assembling the first cover body 4430 to the first base body 4420, the first base body 4420 may be covered only by covering the first cover body 430, The pair of collars C disposed on the front side of the base portion 461 can be easily inserted into the collar guide recess 4432 of the first cover body 4430.

  Here, according to the present embodiment, the guide groove 4424 and the rack guide concave portion 4432 are provided so that the inner wall surface 4424R on the side of the first effect member 460 is continuously extended in a straight line in a front view. It is possible to stably exhibit the guiding effect of the first effect member 460 via the color C by the guiding concave portion 4432. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability and to speed up the slide movement of the first effect member 460. can do.

  That is, the sliding direction of the first effect member 460 is inclined in the direction closer to the second unit 500 side as it is raised, and the extending direction of the first effect member 460 is also on the second unit 500 side ( 5 and 6), the weight of the first effect member 460 is applied to the guide groove 4424 and the inner wall surface 4424R side of the rack guide recess 4432. Therefore, when the first effect member 460 is slid, the pair of collars C is mainly pressed toward the inner wall surface 4424R by the weight of the first effect member 460. Therefore, by continuously extending the inner wall surface 4424R linearly in a front view, the guiding effect of the collar C can be stabilized, and the improvement of the durability and the speeding up of the slide movement can be achieved. it can.

  On the other hand, the guide groove 4424 and the inner wall surface 4424L of the rack guide recess 4432 are straight lines in a front view between the upper end and the portion where the groove width is maximum and between the lower end and the portion where the groove width is maximum When the first effect member 460 slides, the sway occurs, and the collar C is displaced toward the inner wall surface 4424L (when the collar C is pressed against the inner wall surface 4424L). However, the collar C can be smoothly guided in the sliding direction by the inner wall surface 4424L. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability and speed up the slide movement of the first effect member 460.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. Although in the first embodiment, the guide groove 424 of the first base body 420 is formed to have a constant groove width along the extending direction, the first base body 5420 in the fifth embodiment is described. The guide groove 5424 is partially formed with a widening portion 5424a for widening the groove width in a part in the extending direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 49 is a front exploded perspective view of the first base body 5420 and the first cover body 430 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 49, the guide groove 5424 of the first base body 5420 is formed in the shape of a long hole in a front view, and a wide portion 5424a in a front view and a semicircular shape is formed in a part in the extension direction.

  Specifically, the guide groove 5424 is continuously formed in a straight line in a front view in which the inner wall surface is parallel to the guide wall 423. That is, it is formed similarly to the guide part 424 in 1st Embodiment. However, a part of the inner wall surface 4424 positioned on the opposite side (left side in FIG. 49) of the first effect member 460 to the extension direction is bulging outward in a semicircular shape, and the groove width is widened. This front view semicircular portion is taken as a widened portion 5424 a. Further, the lower end side of the guide groove 5424 is extended downward with respect to the guide groove 424 in the first embodiment. That is, when the first effect member 460 is disposed at the lowered position, the dimension of the gap formed between the collar C and the lower ends of the guide grooves 424 and 5424 is the fifth embodiment than in the case of the first embodiment. The case is larger.

  A process of assembling the first effect member 460 (see FIG. 8) to the first base body 5420 and the first cover body 430 thus formed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a partially enlarged schematic view of the guide groove 5424 and the first effect member 460. FIG. 50 (a) shows the state before the collar C is inserted into the guide groove 4424, and FIG. 50 (b) shows the state after the collar C is inserted into the guide groove 4424. . Moreover, in FIG. 50 (c), a state in which the first effect member 460 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated, and in FIG. 50 (d), a state in which the first effect member 460 is disposed at the raised position is illustrated. .

  As described above, when the first effect member 460 is attached to the first base body 5420, the pair of collars C disposed on the back side of the base 461 is attached to the guide groove 5424 of the first base body 5420. It is necessary to make the rack gear 465 b of the rack portion 465 mesh with the pinion gear 480 disposed on the first base body 420 while inserting the gear (see FIG. 8). In this case, if the groove width of the guide groove 4424 is constant along the extending direction, it is difficult to mesh the rack gear 465b with the pinion gear 480 if the pair of collars C is inserted into the guide groove 5424 first. On the other hand, when the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 are meshed first, it may be difficult to insert the pair of collars C into either one of the guide grooves 5424.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the widened portion 5424a is formed in a part of the guide groove 5424 and the groove width is increased in the portion where the widened portion 5424a is formed, as shown in FIG. The widening portion 5424a can be used to increase the degree of freedom of the insertion position of the collar C with respect to the guide groove 5424. Therefore, since the position of the base 461 can be adjusted, the degree of freedom of the positional relationship of the rack gear 465b with respect to the pinion gear 480 can be increased accordingly (see FIG. 8).

  Thus, even if the pair of collars C is first inserted into the guide groove 5424, the pinion gear 480 can be adjusted by adjusting the position of the base 461 using the region where the groove width is increased by the widening portion 5424a. Since the position of the rack gear 465b with respect to the above can also be adjusted, these two gears 465b and 480 can be easily meshed. On the other hand, even if the rack gear 465b and the pinion gear 480 are meshed first, the guide groove 5424 is widened by the widened portion 5424a, so the degree of freedom in the position where the collar C can be inserted is high. Each of the collars C can be easily inserted into the guide groove 5424.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), when the collar C is inserted into the guide groove 5424 using the widening portion 5424a, the base 461 (first effect member 460) is lifted or The collar C is lowered to be positioned in the non-forming area of the widened portion 5424a as shown in FIG. 50 (c) or FIG. 50 (d). Thereby, the first cover body 430 can be easily attached to the first base body 5420.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment described above, the groove widths of the guide groove 4424 and the collar guide concave portion 4432 are not constant but are changed along the extending direction, so the change (increase or decrease) of the groove width changes the collar C The guiding state becomes unstable, and the first effect member 460 is apt to shake when sliding.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first effect member 460 slides between the lowered position and the raised position, an area (hereinafter referred to as "areas T1, T2") in which a pair of collars C pass through the guide groove 5424. The widening portion 5424a is formed outside the region of. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50 (c) and 50 (d), since the widened part 5424a is formed in the area between the area T1 and the area T2, the pair of collars C is formed in the area T1, T1. It can only be guided by T2 (i.e. the area with a constant groove width). Thereby, the guiding state of the color C can be stabilized, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the shaking when the first effect member 460 slides. As a result, it is possible to speed up the slide movement of the first effect member 460.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. In the first embodiment, the left presentation member 760L and the right presentation member 760R are pivotally supported by the right support shaft 717R and the left support shaft 717L in a suspended manner (see FIGS. 33 to 35). The left effect member 6760L and the right effect member 6760R in the sixth embodiment are axially supported by the left support shaft 717L and the right support shaft 717R in a standing posture. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  51 and 52 are schematic front views of a fourth unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment. In FIGS. 51 and 52, only the main configuration is illustrated in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. Further, in FIG. 51, the state in which the left effect member 6760L and the right effect member 6760R are disposed in the raised position is illustrated, and in FIG. 52, the state in which the left effect member 6760L and the right effect member 6760R are disposed in the lowered position is illustrated. .

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the drive gear 770, the direction conversion gear 780, and the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the fourth case 710 It is disposed on the bottom plate 711 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). However, in the present embodiment, these members 770, 780, 790R, and 790L are disposed at positions below the opening 711a (the lower side in FIG. 51).

  The direction conversion gear 780 and the right gear member 790R are respectively meshed with the drive gear 770 fixed to the drive shaft of the fourth drive motor (not shown), and the direction change gear 780 is provided with the left gear member 790L. Be engaged. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the fourth drive motor is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force of the drive shaft is directly transmitted to the right gear member 790R and is transmitted to the left gear member 790L via the direction conversion gear 780, Thereby, the right gear member 790R and the left gear member 790L are respectively rotated in opposite directions.

  The left support shaft 717L and the right support shaft 717R are disposed laterally of the left gear member 790L and the right gear member 790R in the present embodiment. Further, in the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710, the fourth base side rib 713, the fourth inner rib 714 and the fourth outer rib 715 sandwich the opening 711a in the front view with respect to the case of the first embodiment. It is arranged in the posture that the heavens and the earth are reversed. However, the illustration is omitted in FIGS. 51 and 52.

  Since the left effect member 6760L and the right effect member 6760R are formed in symmetrical shapes, only the left effect member 6760L will be described, and the description of the right effect member 6760R will be omitted. The left effect member 6760L is directed from the lower end edge of the base 6762L to the side (left side in FIG. 51) from the lower end edge of the base 6762L extending obliquely downward (lower left side in FIG. 51) from the lower end edge of the curved portion 761L. And an extending portion 6763L extending horizontally.

  The base portion 6762L is formed in a flat plate shape, and is formed so as to protrude horizontally (parallel to the bending portion 761L) from the outer side surface of the bending portion 761L. The rear surface (surface on the rear side in the vertical direction in FIG. 51) of the base 6762L is formed flush with the rear surface of the curved portion 761L, and a fourth base side rib 713 protruding from the bottom plate 711 of the fourth case 710. (See FIG. 24).

  The extended portion 6763L is a portion formed in a flat plate shape, and a guide groove 6763La is recessed in the back surface (surface on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 51). The guide groove 6763La is a concave groove having an oblong shape in a front view that is linearly extended along the extending direction of the extending portion 763L, and a protruding pin 792 of the left gear member 790L slides on the guide groove 6763La. By being inserted through the movable barrel L (see FIG. 26), the left effect member 6760L and the left gear member 790L are connected.

  From the front end side of the extending portion 6763L, a support hole having a circular shape in a front view is formed to penetrate. The left support shaft 717L is inserted into the shaft support hole, whereby the left effect member 6760L is rotatably supported by the left support shaft 717L. The axial center of the axial support hole is located on a straight line passing through the widthwise center of the guide groove 6763La (an extension of the guide groove 6763La).

  Next, the holding structure of the left effect member 6760L arranged at the raised position and the lowered position and the rotation operation of the left effect member 6760L between the raised position and the lowered position will be described. In addition, since the holding structure and rotation operation of the right rendering member 6760R are the same as the left rendering member 6760L, the description of the right rendering member 6760R is omitted.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, when the left effect member 6760L is disposed at the raised position, a direction connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the left support shaft 717L (straight line L1, FIG. And FIG. 35) and the direction connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the gear shaft 718 (straight line L2, see FIGS. 33 and 35) are orthogonal to each other. Thereby, even if an external force acts on left rendering member 6760L, a force component in the direction of rotating left gear member 790L (that is, a direction connecting the axial center of projecting pin 792 and the axial center of gear shaft 718 (straight line L2, (See FIGS. 33 and 35), and the rotation of the left gear member 790L can be restricted.

  Therefore, for example, even if the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is shaken by the player, it is possible to suppress rattling of the left effect member 6760L in the rotational direction about the left support shaft 717L. As a result, as shown in FIG. 51, the postures of the left effect member 6760L and the left effect member 760L in a state in which the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La are in contact with each other and in close contact with each other as shown in FIG. Can be maintained.

  As described above, also in the present embodiment, since the left effect member 6760L can be mechanically maintained at the raised position, the driving force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) can be reduced (or released). it can. As a result, it is possible to miniaturize the capacity of the fourth drive motor and to suppress the energy consumption.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity of the left effect member 6760L is located closer to the counterpart member (right effect member 6760R) than the vertical line (vertical line in FIG. 51) passing the axis of the left support shaft 717L. Thereby, in the raised position shown in FIG. 51, the left directing member 6760L tends to lean toward the other member (right directing member 6760R) by its own weight, and the mating surface 761La of the left directing member 6760L is It can be pushed out to the other party side (the mating surface 761Ra side of the right effect member 7670R). As a result, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other at the raised position.

  When the fourth drive motor is rotationally driven from the state shown in FIG. 51 and the left gear member 790L is rotated clockwise about FIG. 51 about the gear shaft 718 by the rotational drive force, the projecting pin 792 is in the guide groove The left directing member 6760L, which is moved along the 6763La and located at the raised position, is rotated about the left support shaft 717L. Thus, the rotation (lowering) of the left effect member 6760L to the lower position is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52, the left effect member 6760L is disposed at the lower position.

  When rotation (descent) of the left effect member 6760L toward the descent position is started, in the process of rotation (descent), the protruding pin 792 is one end of the guide groove 6732La (the side closer to the left support shaft 717L After being moved by a predetermined amount toward the end portion of the sensor, a change in direction of the movement occurs, and the finger is moved in the reverse direction (the direction away from the left support shaft 717L). That is, the projecting pin 792 moving toward one end of the guide groove 6763 La turns and moves toward the other end of the guide groove 6763 a.

  In this case, as described above, when the direction of movement of the protruding pin 792 is changed, the behavior of the left effect member 6760L may become unstable, and the smooth rotation may be impeded. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the movement direction of the protruding pin 792 is left in the phase (or in the vicinity of the phase to be changed) in the guide groove 6763La. When the gear member 790R reaches, the tip end portion 764R of the left effect member 6760L is configured to be positioned in the dividing area 711d (see FIG. 34). Thereby, as in the case of the first embodiment, it is possible to obtain smooth rotation of the left effect member 6760L centering on the left support shaft 717L.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the present embodiment, when the left effect member 6760L is disposed at the lowered position, a direction connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the left support shaft 717L (straight line L1, FIG. And FIG. 35) and the direction connecting the axial center of the projecting pin 792 and the axial center of the gear shaft 718 (straight line L2, see FIGS. 33 and 35) are orthogonal to each other.

  Thereby, as in the case of the raised position, even if an external force acts on left rendering member 6760L, a force component in the direction of rotating left gear member 790L (ie, the axial center of projecting pin 792 and the axis of gear shaft 718 The rotation of the left gear member 790L can be restricted without generating a force component (a force component in a direction orthogonal to the straight line L2 (see FIGS. 33 and 35)) connecting the hearts.

  As a result, even in the lowered position, the left effect member 6760L can be mechanically maintained, so that the driving force of the fourth drive motor (not shown) can be reduced (or released). It is possible to reduce the size and the consumption energy.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on each above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited at all to the above-mentioned form, and it is easy to be able to various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention It can be guessed that.

  In the above embodiments, the base end sides of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R are made to intersect with each other, and the left effect member 760L is axially supported by the right support shaft 717R and the right effect member 760R is supported by the left support shaft 717L. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the left effect member 760L is used as the left support shaft 717L and the right effect member 760R without crossing the base end sides of the left effect member 760L and the right effect member 760R. The right support shaft 717R may be axially supported. In this case, only the shapes of the extension portions 763L and 763R may be changed from the above embodiment. Specifically, the extension portions 763L and 763R are extended on the extension of the base portions 762L and 762R without being inclined. Even in this modification, the position of the center of gravity is located outside the virtual straight line M1 (see FIG. 31), so that in the lowered position, the position of the center of gravity is located vertically below the suspension support point. Since the mating surfaces 761Ra and 761La can be pushed to the other side by the action, the mating surfaces 761La and 761Ra can be reliably brought into contact with each other.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the axially supported hole 465d of the rack portion 465 is a circular hole in a front view has been described (see FIG. 13), but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It is possible. As another shape, the long hole shape which makes the longitudinal direction (sliding direction guided by the guide wall 423) of the rack part 465 a long diameter is illustrated.

  When the axial support hole 465d of the rack portion 465 is formed into a long hole shape, the linear portion of the rack restricting wall 461e is extended with respect to the configuration of the above embodiment, and the rack portion 465 is the axial support hole 465d with respect to the base 461. It is configured to be movable along the major axis direction of the (long hole shape).

  According to this configuration, since rattling of the rack portion 465 with respect to the base portion 461 can be enlarged in the long diameter direction of the long hole shape as compared with the case of the above embodiment, the first effect on the first base body 420 Assemblability at the time of assembling the member 460 can be improved. In addition, since the dimensional tolerance required for each part can be relaxed by the amount of rattling, the part cost can be reduced.

  Here, an example of a method of driving the rack portion 465 in this configuration will be described. As a first method, the state in which the first effect member 460 is stopped (disposed) in the lowered position (that is, the state in which the base 461 is lowered to the lowermost end of the guide groove 424). The clearance in the sliding direction between the rack support shaft 461d and the shaft support hole 465d is lower than the lower end of the rack support shaft 461d (FIG. 13C). The form formed on the side is illustrated.

  According to this embodiment, when starting to ascend the first effect member 460 stopped (disposed) at the lowered position (see FIG. 14B), the gap in the sliding direction is below the rack support shaft 461d. Being formed, first, only the rack portion 465 is raised (ie, the base 461 is kept stationary). Next, the gap formed under the rack support shaft 461d between the rack support shaft 461d and the shaft support hole 465d is clogged (embedded) by the elevation of the rack portion 465, and the shaft support hole 465d is formed by the rack support shaft 461d. By being lifted upward, the rack portion 465 and the base portion 461 (and the extension portion 463 or the like) starts to be raised.

  That is, when raising the first effect member 460 from the lowered position, first, only the lightweight rack portion 465 is raised to apply momentum, and then the remaining portion where the weight is increased (the entire first effect member 460 It is possible to obtain a two-step form of raising). Thereby, the load on the first drive motor 470 at the start of the rise can be reduced.

  As a second method, in the state where the first effect member 460 is stopped (arranged) in the lowered position, the gap in the sliding direction between the rack support shaft 461 d and the axial support hole 465 d corresponds to the case of the first method On the contrary, the configuration formed on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 13C) of the rack support shaft 461d is exemplified.

  In this embodiment, the rack portion 465 is further lowered after the base 461 is lowered to the lower end of the guide groove 424 and the lower collar C abuts on the lower end (lower end in FIG. 9) of the guide groove 424. Since a gap is formed below the rack support shaft 461d (the lower side in FIG. 13C), the rack portion 465 is raised at one end to form the lower side of the rack support shaft 461d (the lower side in FIG. 13C). The gaps to be inserted are filled (filled) in advance (that is, the gaps are formed above the rack support shaft 461d (upper side in FIG. 13C)).

  According to this aspect, when the effect of raising the first effect member 460 arranged (stopped) at the lowered position to the raised position is started, the instruction of the effect is received immediately after the effect of the effect is received. You can start rising. As a result, the slide movement of the first effect member 460 can be speeded up, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 are continuously formed from one end on the upper portion 533b, 543b side of the support wall 533, 543 to the other end on the lower portion 533c, 543c side Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 may be formed in an intermittent shape by dividing one or more places from the one end to the other end. .

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the heights of the back surface regulating rib 532 and the front surface regulating rib 542 from the front plates 531 and 541 are constant. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The height at which the front restricting rib 542 and the front restricting rib 542 from the front plates 531 and 541 may be changed. As a form of change, for example, a form in which the standing heights of the back restriction rib 532 and the front restriction rib 542 are changed in a wave shape (sinusoidal) along the extending direction of the back restriction rib 532 and the front restriction rib 542 It is exemplified by a form to be changed into a shape, a form to be changed into a rectangular wave (square wave), a form combining some or all of the respective forms, and the like. Thereby, when the first effect member 460 slides, the effect part 463 (the decoration plate 463a) can be easily vibrated, and the effect of the vibration can be enhanced.

  It is preferable that the change form of the standing height of the back surface regulating rib 532 and the change form of the standing height of the front restricting rib 542 have the same cycle and amplitude and be in opposite phase. That is, along the slide movement direction of the first effect member 460 (tip portion 464), the facing distance between the back restriction rib 532 and the front restriction rib 542 is constant (one of the back restriction rib 532 and the front restriction rib 542 is a mountain) It is preferable that the other is a valley).

  In this manner, by changing the standing heights of the back surface regulating rib 532 and the front surface regulating rib 542 from the front plates 531 and 541 and vibrating the tip side (tip portion 464) of the first effect member 460, the first The first effect member 460 (decorative plate 463a) can be vibrated efficiently as compared with the case where the base end side (base 461) of the effect member 460 is vibrated. That is, it is difficult to vibrate the base 461 side restrained by the guide groove 424 and the collar guide concave part 432 because the rigidity is high as compared with the tip end 464 side which is the free end. On the other hand, the tip end portion 464 is a position farthest from the base portion 461 and is a portion where the amplitude is the largest. Therefore, the first effect member 460 (the decoration plate 463a) can be easily vibrated largely by changing the standing heights of the back surface control rib 532 and the front surface control rib 542 from the front plates 531 and 541.

  In the above embodiments, the tip end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 is in contact with the straight portions 533a and 543a of the support walls 533 and 543, and the tip end plate portion 464b is a straight portion when the first effect member 460 slides. Although the case of sliding on 533a and 543a has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the gap between the end plate portion 464b of the first effect member 460 and the linear portions 533a and 543a of the support walls 533 and 543 is described. The first effect is produced when a shake of a predetermined amplitude or more (a shake of more than the gap between the tip plate portion 464b and the linear portions 533a and 543a) occurs on the tip side of the first effect member 460. The linear portions 533a and 543a of the support walls 533 and 543 are configured to receive the tip plate portion 464b of the member 460 (support from the direction of gravity). And it may be.

  In each of the above embodiments, the annular rib 793 of the right gear member 790R is cut away from its standing end to its base end (that is, the entire standing height of the annular rib 793 is cut) to form the intermittent portion 793a. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and only the front end of the upright may be cut away to form the intermittent portion. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a rear perspective view of a modified right gear member 2790. FIG. The same parts as those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the right gear member 2790, the intermittent portion 2793a is formed by cutting out only the tip end side in the standing direction in a part of the circumferential rib 793 in the circumferential direction. In this modification, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a in the axial direction is 20 degrees (therefore, the central angle in the axial direction of the remaining portion where the intermittent portion 2793a is not formed is 340 degrees). .

  According to the right gear member 2790, the base end side (the gear main body 791 side) of the annular rib 793 is left in the formation portion of the intermittent portion 2793a, and the annular rib 793 continues in the circumferential direction on the base end side. Accordingly, the rigidity of the right gear member 2790 can be secured.

  Although the case where the intermittent part 793a of 1 was formed in the annular rib 793 was demonstrated in said each embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this and you may form two or more intermittent parts. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a rear perspective view of a modified right gear member 3790. FIG. The same parts as those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the right gear member 3790, an intermittent portion 2793a and an intermittent portion 3793a are formed at two places in the circumferential direction of the annular rib 793. In this modification, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a in the axial direction is 20 degrees, and the central angle of the intermittent portion 3793a in the axial direction is 10 degrees (therefore, the intermittent portions 2793a and 3793a are not formed. The total of the central angles in the axial direction of the remaining two places is assumed to be 330 degrees).

  According to the right gear member 3790, the circumferential lengths (central angles in the axial direction) of the intermittent portion 2793a and the intermittent portion 3793a are different from each other, so that two or more rotational positions can be detected.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 53, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a is smaller than the central angle in the axial direction of the remaining portion where the intermittent portion 2793a is not formed. Instead, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a may be larger than the central angle in the axial direction of the remaining portion where the intermittent portion 2793a is not formed. For example, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a is set to 340 degrees, and the central angle in the axial direction of the remaining portion where the intermittent portion 2793a is not formed is set to 20 degrees. A projecting piece with a corner of 20 degrees (remaining part where the intermittent part 2793a is not formed) is illustrated.

  The same applies to the modification shown in FIG. For example, the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a is 285 degrees and the central angle of the intermittent portion 2793a is 45 degrees, and the central angles in the axial direction of two remaining portions where the intermittent portions 2793a and 3793a are not formed are 10 degrees and The form with 20 degrees (that is, the form in which two projecting pieces with a central angle of 10 degrees and 20 degrees (remaining portions where the intermittent portion 2793a is not formed) is projected to the tip side of the annular rib 793 in the standing direction) It is illustrated.

  In the fourth embodiment, of the guide grooves 4424 and the inner wall surfaces 4424l and 4424R of the collar guide recess 4432, the case where the inner wall surface 4424R on the side where the first effect member 460 is projected is formed linearly in a front view However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and conversely, while the inner wall surface 4424L is formed in a straight shape in a front view, the inner wall surface 4424R is convex in the front view convex on the opposite side to the inner wall surface 4424L. You may form in the shape of a letter. That is, the relationship between the weight of the first effect member 460, the inclination angle of the guide groove 4424 and the color guide recess 4432 with respect to the gravity direction, or the center of gravity of the first effect member 460 with respect to the arrangement position of the pair of collars C In some cases, a pair of collars C may be mainly pressed to the inner wall surface 4424L side. In this case, the inner wall surface 4424L is continuously extended in a straight line in a front view. This is because the guiding effect of the color C can be stabilized, and the improvement of the durability and the speeding up of the slide movement can be made possible.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  A game machine comprising: a base member; a moving member whose base end is slidably supported by the base member; and driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member. A game machine A1 comprising: a support member extending along a movement trajectory on the tip end side of the support member and supporting the tip end side of the moving member from below in the direction of gravity.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a moving member whose proximal end is slidably supported by the base member, and a driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member There is a gaming machine which slides the moving member relative to the base member by the driving force of the driving means (see, for example, JP-A-2010-200914). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the weight of the moving member is supported on the proximal side, the burden on the proximal side is large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member is slid relative to the base member by the driving force generated by the driving means. In this case, the movable member has the proximal end side slidably supported by the base member and the distal end side is supported by the support member from below in the direction of gravity, so that the movable member can be held in a double-held state. As a result, the weight of the moving member can be shared not only on the proximal side (i.e., the base member) but also on the distal side (supporting member), and the weight of the moving member can be dispersed. Compared with the state, the load on the proximal side can be reduced, and the durability can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the shaking on the tip end side of the moving member, the moving member can be slid and moved smoothly.

  The sliding movement of the moving member is exemplified by linear movement in a direction inclined to the vertical (gravity) direction, linear movement in a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction, and the like.

  The gaming machine A1 includes one side member and the other side member oppositely disposed across the tip end side of the moving member from one side and the other side of the plane formed by the movement trajectory of the tip side of the moving member, the moving member The game machine A2 is characterized in that the base end is supported by the base member so as to be slidable in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction and the tip end is supported by the support member from below in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, when the moving member is slid in the direction inclined with respect to the vertical (gravity) direction, the tip end side of the moving member is lowered by the support member in the gravity direction. By supporting from the side, it is possible to hold the moving member in a double-held state in the direction of gravity. In this case, the end of the moving member is in the direction orthogonal to the sliding movement (that is, the direction toward the one side or the other side of the plane formed by the movement trajectory of the moving end). In the case of displacement (swing), the displacement (swing or rattling) can be regulated by the one side member and the other side member. As a result, the load on the proximal end side can be reduced, the durability can be improved, and the moving member can be slid smoothly.

  In the gaming machine A2, the one side member is provided with a one side rib erected toward the leading end side of the moving member from the opposing surface facing the other side member, and the other side member is the one side The apparatus further includes a rib on the other side which is erected toward the tip side of the movable member from an opposing surface facing the member, and the extending direction of the one rib is different from the extending direction of the other rib. Game machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2, the one side rib and the other side rib are respectively provided upright on the opposing surfaces of the one side member and the other side member. In the case of displacement (swing) in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide movement, the displacement (swing) can be regulated by the erected tips of the one side rib and the other side rib. That is, since the frictional resistance generated between the moving member and the tip end side can be reduced, the moving member can be slid smoothly.

  Here, since the action direction of gravity is the same in both the forward path and the return path (when ascending and descending), the moving member has a different acting direction of the driving force acting from the driving means, so The attitude on the tip side (movement locus) changes in both routes. In this case, in the gaming machine A3, since the extending direction of the one side rib and the extending direction of the other side rib are different, for example, the extending direction of the one side rib is set to the attitude of the forward path and the extending direction of the other side rib The movement member is moved in both the forward path and the return path when it is slid while being displaced (shaking) in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the slide movement by making each correspond to the attitude of the return path. The tip side of the member can be slid smoothly.

  Preferably, the one side rib and the other side rib extend linearly. This is because the effect of smoothly guiding the tip end side of the moving member in the direction of slide movement can be more effectively exhibited by the protruding tip.

  In the gaming machine A3, a gaming machine A4 characterized in that the one side member and the other side member are formed of a light transmitting material.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the one side member and the other side member are formed of the light transmitting material, so that the decorative effect can be enhanced. In particular, when a light emitting means such as an LED is provided, the light from the light emitting means can be transmitted, so that the decorative effect by the light emission can be enhanced.

  In this case, since the extending direction of the one side rib and the extending direction of the other side rib are different from each other, even when the one side member and the other side member are formed of the light transmitting material, The formation positions of the side ribs and the other side ribs can be dispersed, and the presence thereof can be made inconspicuous as a whole, so that the appearance can be prevented from being impaired.

  In the gaming machine A2, the one side member and the other side member are formed of a light transmitting material, and the one side member is erected from the opposing surface facing the other side member toward the tip side of the moving member And the other side member is provided with the other side rib erected from the opposite surface facing the one side member to the tip end side of the movable member, and the one side member and the other side A game machine A5 characterized in that, in a front view of the members, the one side rib and the other side rib are formed so as not to overlap with each other.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the one side rib and the other side rib are respectively provided upright on the opposing surface of the one side member and the other side member. In the case of displacement (swing) in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide movement, the displacement (swing) can be regulated by the erected tips of the one side rib and the other side rib. That is, since the frictional resistance generated between the moving member and the tip end side can be reduced, the moving member can be slid smoothly.

  Moreover, since the one side member and the other side member are formed of the light transmitting material, the decorative effect can be enhanced. In particular, when a light emitting means such as an LED is provided, the light from the light emitting means can be transmitted, so that the decorative effect by the light emission can be enhanced.

  In this case, in a front view of the one side member and the other side member, the one side rib and the other side rib are formed so as not to overlap each other, so the one side member and the other side member are formed of a light transmitting material Even in this case, the overlapping portion of the one side rib and the other side rib where the presence is emphasized is not formed, and since the formation position of the one side rib and the other side rib can be dispersed, It can be made inconspicuous to suppress the loss of the appearance.

  A game machine A6 characterized in that, in the game machines A2 to A5, the one side member and the other side member are formed of light transmissive materials of different colors.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the one-side member and the other-side member are formed of the light transmitting material. The light of the light emitting means can be transmitted to enhance the decorative effect by the light emission. In particular, by making the one side member and the other side members different colors, it is possible to enhance the color of the appearance and enhance the decorative effect.

  In this case, by forming the one side member and the other side member from light transmissive materials of different colors, in the region where the one side member and the other side member overlap, the one side member and the other side member are mixed It can be made difficult to visually recognize the opposite space. That is, the distal end side of the moving member sandwiched between the opposing sides of the one side member and the other side member is less likely to be visible from the outside of the one side member or the other side member, thereby making the presence of the distal end side of the moving member inconspicuous be able to. In addition, it is preferable that the tip end side of the moving member be dark color such as black. This is because it is possible to make the tip end side of the moving member less visible and enhance the effect of making it less noticeable.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A6, the moving member includes an intermediate portion formed by connecting the proximal end and the distal end and bending the region, and a region from the bent portion of the intermediate portion to the distal end A game machine A7, characterized in that the game machine is located on one side of a plane formed by the movement trajectory on the base end side.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 to A6, the area from the bent portion of the intermediate portion to the tip side is separated to one side from the plane formed by the movement trajectory on the base end side. Since it is located, the space formed by this separation can be used as a space for other members to move. That is, in front view, since the movement locus of the moving member and the movement locus of the other member can be overlapped, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the configuration in which the intermediate portion is bent in this manner, the weight of the moving member is increased by that amount, and the load on the proximal end side is increased by that amount and the direction orthogonal to the sliding movement during sliding movement The displacement (swing) on the tip side of the Therefore, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the tip end side of the moving member is supported by the support member from below in the direction of gravity, or in addition to this, the displacement on the tip end side in the orthogonal direction is restricted by the one side member Especially effective.

  That is, bending the middle part is not suitable for use in a cantilevered state in which the distal end side of the moving member is a free end because the weight is increased and the load on the proximal end side is increased. The distal end side of the moving member is supported from below in the weight direction, or in addition to this, it can be adopted for the first time by restricting the displacement of the distal end side in the orthogonal direction by the one side member and the other side member. By this (the bending of the middle part), the burden on the proximal end side is reduced, and the durability is improved, and the moving member can be slid smoothly, while the moving locus of the moving member and the other It is possible to overlap the movement trajectory of the member.

  A game machine comprising: a base member; a moving member whose base end is slidably supported by the base member; and driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member. The game comprises a driven part to which a driving force is applied from the driving means, and a connecting part which is connected to the driven part so as to be movable relative to it and is guided and moved by the base member. Machine B1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a moving member whose proximal end is slidably supported by the base member, and a driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member There is a gaming machine which slides the moving member relative to the base member by the driving force of the driving means (see, for example, JP-A-2010-200914). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when the sliding movement of the moving member is started by the driving force applied from the driving means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the movable member is provided with the driven portion to which the driving force is applied from the driving means, and the connecting portion which is connected to the driven portion so as to be relatively movable and guided by the guide portion. Thus, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when the sliding movement of the moving member is started by the driving force applied from the driving means. Further, since the driven part and the connecting part are connected so as to be able to move relative to each other, the connected members and the connecting part move while causing relative movement (for example, operation such as shaking or causing shaking). Since the member can be slid, its effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, the driven part and the connecting part are connected so as to be able to move relative to each other, thereby improving the assemblability of the moving member (for example, the assembling property of the connecting part to the base member) by the relative movement. it can.

  In the gaming machine B1, the driven portion and the connecting portion are connected so as to be relatively rotatable by pivoting.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the driven portion and the coupling portion are connected rotatably relative to each other by pivotal support, so that the relative movement of the both can be performed smoothly. The relative movable amount can be easily secured. As a result, the initial operation of the moving member can be smoothly performed. Moreover, while improving a rendering effect, the improvement of attachment property can be aimed at.

  In the gaming machine B2, an axis pivotally supporting the driven portion and the connecting portion so as to relatively rotate is orthogonal to a plane when the moving member slides.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the axis pivotally supporting the driven portion and the connecting portion relative to each other is orthogonal to the plane when the moving member slides, so The portion and the connecting portion can be relatively rotated in parallel to a plane when the moving member slides. Therefore, with the slide of the moving member, the driven part and the connecting part can be easily moved relative to each other. As a result, as a result, the initial operation of the moving member can be smoothly performed. Moreover, while improving a rendering effect, the improvement of attachment property can be aimed at.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the shaft and the shaft hole rotatably supporting the driven portion and the connection portion relative to each other have a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the shaft and the inner peripheral surface of the shaft hole. A game machine B4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, the shaft and the shaft hole for pivotally supporting the driven portion and the connecting portion relatively rotatably are the outer peripheral surface of the shaft and the inner peripheral surface of the shaft hole In addition to the relative rotation, the relative movement in the horizontal direction is also possible because of the clearance. Therefore, with the sliding of the moving member, the driven part and the connecting part can be further easily moved relative to each other.

  The shaft and the shaft hole do not have to be circular in cross section, and may be oval, elliptical, polygonal or the like. That is, it is not intended that one rotation (360 degrees) of rotation is required, but it is sufficient if relative rotation is possible using a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the shaft and the inner peripheral surface of the shaft hole. The shape of the shaft and the shaft hole is not limited as long as the rotation angle (for example, 5 degrees) is secured.

  In the gaming machine b2 to B4, a gaming machine B5 characterized in that one of the driven part and the connecting part is in contact with the other of the driven part and the connecting part to regulate the relative displacement thereof.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines B2 to B4, one of the driven portion and the connecting portion includes a restricting portion that abuts on the other of the driven portion and the connecting portion to restrict its relative displacement. Therefore, the load at the time of restricting the relative displacement of the driven portion and the connecting portion can be shared by the restricting portion by suppressing the bias to the shaft and the shaft hole. Thereby, the load on the shaft and the shaft hole can be reduced, and the durability can be improved.

  A game machine comprising: a base member; a moving member whose base end is slidably supported by the base member; and driving means for generating a driving force for sliding movement of the moving member. And the moving member are engaged by a gear, and the moving member causes the weight to act in a direction to separate the tooth flank of the gear of the driving means and the tooth flank of the gear of the moving member Machine C1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a moving member whose proximal end is slidably supported by the base member, and a driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member There is a gaming machine in which the driving means and the moving member are meshed by a gear, and the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the moving member via the gear to slide the moving member (for example, See 2010-200914). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the surface pressure of the tooth surface is increased, the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member can not be smoothly performed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the weight of the moving member can be made to act in the direction of separating the tooth flank of the gear of the driving means and the tooth flank of the gear of the moving member. Can be smoothly transmitted to the moving member from the driving means. In addition, it is possible to suppress wear of the tooth surface of the drive means and the gear of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gear comprises a pinion gear disposed in the driving means and a rack gear disposed in the moving member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven by the driving means, and the rotation of the pinion gear is the rack gear The game machine C2 is characterized in that the moving member is slidingly moved by being converted into a linear motion.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the gear comprises a pinion gear disposed in the driving means and a rack gear disposed in the moving member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven by the driving means Since the rotation of the pinion gear is converted into linear movement by the rack gear, the moving member is slid and moved, so that the sliding movement of the moving member can be speeded up.

  In the gaming machine C2, one of the base member and the moving member includes a guide groove extending along the sliding direction of the moving member, and the other of the base member and the moving member is guided by the guide groove. A gaming machine C3 comprising: a guided member disposed at a position where the rack gear is offset with respect to the guiding groove.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine C2, one of the base member and the moving member is provided with a guide groove extending along the sliding direction of the moving member, and the other of the base member and the moving member Since the guided member is guided by the guiding groove, the sliding movement of the moving member can be stably performed by the guided member being guided by the guiding groove by the guiding groove. Therefore, speeding up of the slide movement of the moving member can be achieved.

  In this case, since the rack gear is disposed at a position offset with respect to the guide groove, the weight of the moving member acts in a direction to separate the tooth surfaces of the driving means and the gear (pinion gear and rack gear) of the moving member. It can be made easy. As a result, it is possible to suppress the surface pressure of the tooth surface from being excessive, increase the speed of sliding movement of the moving member, and suppress the wear of the tooth surface.

  In the gaming machine C3, the moving member includes a driven portion in which the rack gear is disposed, and a connecting portion in which one of the guide groove or the guided member is disposed, and the driven portion and the connecting portion Are connected so as to be movable relative to each other.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C3, the moving member includes a driven portion in which the rack gear is disposed, and a connecting portion in which one of the guide groove or the guided member is disposed. Since the driven portion and the connecting portion are connected so as to be movable relative to each other, the assemblability of the moving member to the base member can be improved. That is, when assembling the moving member to the base member, for example, when the rack gear of the driven portion is meshed with the pinion gear of the driving means due to dimensional tolerance etc., the guided member to the guide groove in the connecting portion In some cases, it is difficult to arrange the guided member in the guide groove, and it may be difficult to mesh the rack gear with the pinion gear in the driven portion. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, since the driven portion and the connecting portion are connected so as to be movable relative to each other, the relative movement of both is used to arrange the rack gear for the pinion gear and the guided member for the guiding groove. You can increase your freedom. As a result, the assemblability of the movable member to the base member can be improved.

  In the game machine C3 or C4, the guide groove is characterized in that a portion in which the groove width is widened is formed in a part in the extending direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the guide groove is formed with a portion in which the groove width is widened in a part in the extending direction. The guided member can be easily arranged in the guiding groove. As a result, the assemblability of the movable member to the base member can be improved.

  In a gaming machine provided with a plurality of movable units, a box-like case body having one side open is provided, the plurality of movable units are stacked on the case body, and a movable unit located on the top layer is the case pair. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is connected to an opening edge.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a box-like case body open on one side and a movable unit having a movable body, the movable unit being disposed on the bottom of the case body. (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-125543). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the plurality of movable units are stacked in the case body, wobble tends to occur during operation of the movable body.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rigidity as a whole can be enhanced. That is, in the structure in which a plurality of movable units are stacked in order on the case body and accommodated, the movable units of the uppermost layer are connected to the opening edge of the case body while each movable unit is easily wobbled with respect to the case body when the movable body As a result, the rigidity as a whole can be enhanced, and the wobble of the movable body at the time of operation can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to operate the movable body more quickly (speeding up of the operation).

  In the gaming machine D1, the case body has a bottom forming a box-like bottom with the one side open, and a wall standing upright from the edge of the bottom and forming a box-like side with the one side open. And a flange portion projecting outward from a standing end of the wall portion, and the movable unit of the uppermost layer is connected to the flange portion.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the case body has a bottom forming a box-like bottom with one face open and a box standing from the edge of the bottom and having one face open. The movable unit of the top layer is connected to the wall portion forming the side face of the upper portion and the flange portion protruding outward from the standing end of the wall portion, so that the capacity of the movable unit can be reduced. It is possible to firmly connect the case body and the movable unit while securing the same. Moreover, the rigidity of the case body can be secured by the flange portion. As a result, the rigidity as a whole can be increased, and wobble at the time of operation of the movable body can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D2, the uppermost movable unit includes a connected portion mounted and connected to the flange portion of the case body, and the flange portion of the case body is formed along the outer edge of the connected portion. A game machine D3 characterized by comprising a restricted member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the uppermost movable unit is provided with a connected portion which is mounted on and connected to the flange portion of the case body, and the flange portion of the case body is connected Since the restriction member formed along the outer edge of the part is provided, the positioning of the mounting position of the coupled portion is restricted when the coupled portion is mounted on the flange portion (the uppermost movable unit is stacked). It can be performed using a member. Thus, the assemblability of the uppermost movable unit can be improved. In addition, since the movement of the coupled portion mounted on and connected to the flange portion on the flange portion can be restricted by the restricting member, the connection strength between the uppermost movable member and the case body can be enhanced.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, at least one movable unit of the plurality of movable units has a receiving hole for receiving a head of a fastening bolt projected from a lower movable unit on which the movable units are stacked. A game machine D4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, at least one movable unit of the plurality of movable units is provided with the receiving hole, so that the fastening is projected from the lower movable unit The head of the bolt can be released by the receiving hole. As a result, the movable units can be brought into close contact with the lower movable units without being hampered by the head of the fastening bolt, so these movable units can be stacked without bulking in the stacking direction, and the overall stack size can be reduced. It can be made smaller.

  In the gaming machine D4, the movable unit having the receiving hole includes a claw portion for holding an electrical wiring, and the claw portion is disposed at a position facing the receiving hole. D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the claw portion is disposed at a position facing the receiving hole, so external access to the head of the fastening bolt received in the receiving hole The manipulation of the head can be made more difficult by the claws. Further, since the claw portion is a portion for holding the electrical wiring, the electrical wiring can make it difficult to access the head of the fastening bolt from the outside.

  In a gaming machine provided with a moving member rotated between a first position and a second position around a first axis, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member, the driving force of the driving means A rotating body rotated about two axes, and a pin member protruding from the rotating body and located eccentrically to the second axis, the moving member including a guide portion for guiding the pin member, A game machine E1 characterized in that at least one of the first position and the second position, the direction in which the first axis and the pin member are connected is orthogonal to the direction in which the second axis and the pin member are connected.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first shaft, a moving member rotated about the first shaft, and driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member, and the driving force of the driving means Accordingly, there is a gaming machine which rotates the moving member between the first position and the second position with the first axis as a rotation center (see, for example, JP-A-2011-120640). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the mobile unit is held at the first position or the second position, the consumption energy is bulky because the driving force of the driving means is used.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one of the first position and the second position, the direction in which the first axis and the pin member are connected is orthogonal to the direction in which the second axis and the pin member are connected. The pin member can be positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the rotating body and the moving member. As a result, even if the driving force from the driving means is unnecessary, the rotating body and the moving member can be mechanically held at at least one of the first position or the second position, so energy consumption of the driving means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E1, the moving member is a member in which the first position is raised upward in the direction of gravity than the second position, and is stopped at the first position, and in the first position A game machine E2 characterized in that the direction in which the first axis and the pin member are connected is orthogonal to the direction in which the second axis and the pin member are connected.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the moving member is held at the first position which is above the second position in the direction of gravity, but at the first position, the first axis and pin Since the direction connecting the member is orthogonal to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, it is possible to mechanically maintain the moving member at the first position by using the dead center. Therefore, for example, even when the gaming machine is shaken, even if it is affected by a disturbance, the moving member starts moving (descending) downward in the direction of gravity from the position (first position) to be stopped. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a pair of the moving members is disposed, and the pair of moving members are in contact with each other at the second position to connect the first shaft and the pin member at the second position. A game machine E3 characterized in that the direction is orthogonal to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the pair of moving members are in contact with each other at the second position, but in the second position, the direction connecting the first axis and the pin member Is orthogonal to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, so that the dead point can be used to mechanically maintain the pair of moving members at the first position. Thus, for example, even when the gaming machine is shaken, the pair of moving members can be kept in contact with each other even when being influenced by disturbance, and the formation of a gap can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machines E1 to E3, the moving member is provided with a decorative portion that performs decoration by moving the game area with decoration, and between the decorative portion and the axial hole pivotally supported by the first axis. And a guide unit for guiding the pin member.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E3, the moving member is provided with a guiding portion for guiding the pin member between the decorative portion and the axial hole pivotally supported on the first axis. Therefore, the arrangement positions of the first shaft and the rotating body can be made close to each other, and accordingly, the space required for the arrangement of the first shaft and the rotating body can be reduced.

  A first member and a second member rotatably supported on the first shaft and the second shaft, respectively, in an abutting position where the first member and the second member abut on each other and in a separated position where the first and second members are mutually separated In the game machine which can be arranged, in the contact position, the positions of the first axis and the second axis are set such that the weights of the first member and the second member act in a direction to make them approach each other. The game machine F1 to be characterized.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first shaft and a second shaft, and a first member and a second member rotatably supported on the first shaft and the second shaft, respectively. There is a gaming machine which is disposed at an abutting position where one member and a second member abut on each other and in a separated position where they are separated from each other (see, for example, JP-A-2012-075813). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to bring the first member and the second member into contact with each other in an appropriate state in the contact position when having dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances, and the like.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, at the contact position, the positions of the first axis and the second axis are set such that the weights of the first member and the second member act in the direction to make them approach each other. For example, even in the case of having dimensional tolerances or assembly tolerances, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the two appropriately abut each other by utilizing its own weight.

  In the gaming machine F1, a gaming machine F2 characterized in that the first member and the second member are pivotally supported by the first axis and the second axis in a suspended state.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, since the first member and the second member are pivotally supported by the first shaft and the second shaft, the first shaft and the second shaft are The distance between the first axis and the second axis can be reduced as compared with the case where the first and second members pivotally supported are positioned above the first axis and the second axis in the gravity direction. Therefore, the space required for the arrangement can be reduced.

  A gaming machine F3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine F2, the first member and the second member cross each other in a suspended state on the first shaft and the second shaft in a state where the first member and the second member intersect.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, since the first member and the second member are pivotally supported by the first shaft and the second shaft in a crossing state, in the contact position The force acting in the direction of bringing the first member and the second member closer to each other can be made larger. Therefore, the state in which both contact | abut can be formed more reliably.

  In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the first and second members are pivotally supported on the first and second shafts in a state where the first and second members intersect, and the second and second shafts of the first and second members are A game machine F4 characterized in that relief portions for releasing the second shaft and the first shaft are recessed at positions facing the first shaft.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first member and the second member are pivotally supported by the first shaft and the second shaft in a cross state, At positions facing the second axis and the first axis of the two members, since the relief portions for releasing the second axis and the first axis are respectively recessed, the portions of the relief portions, the first member and the second The member and the second axis and the first axis can be disposed closer to each other. Therefore, the space required for the arrangement can be miniaturized.

  A rotating body rotated about a first axis, a pin member projecting from the rotating body and located eccentrically to the first axis, and a guide for guiding the pin member and having a second axis And a driving unit for applying a driving force to the rotating body, and the rotating body is rotated about the first axis by the driving force of the driving unit, thereby the pin In a gaming machine in which a member is reciprocated on the guide portion and the movable body is rotated about the second axis, the gaming machine includes a support member extending along a movement trajectory of the movable member and supporting the movable member. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that the amount of support of the movable member by the support member is reduced at a position where the direction of movement of the pin member reciprocating in the guide portion is changed in direction.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a rotary body rotated about a first axis, a pin member projected from the rotary body and located eccentrically to the first axis, and a pin member are guided. A moving member having a guide portion and rotating about a second axis, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the rotating body, the rotating body being rotated about the first axis by the driving force of the driving means Thus, there is a gaming machine in which the pin member is reciprocated in the guide portion and the movable body is rotated about the second axis (see, for example, JP-A-2004-350919). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the movement of the moving member becomes unstable at the position where the pin member which reciprocates the guide moves, and it is difficult to smoothly rotate the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, at the position where the moving direction of the pin member changes direction, the amount of support of the moving member by the support member is reduced, so the moving member moves smoothly (with the first axis as the center). Can be rotated). That is, when the pin member changes the direction of movement, the behavior of the moving member becomes unstable. When this behavior becomes unstable, the amount of support of the support member is reduced. The movable range of the support member can be secured, and the movement of the movable member (rotation around the first axis) can be prevented from being hindered by the support member. Thus, the moving member can be moved smoothly.

  In the gaming machine G1, the support member is formed in the shape of a rib extending along the movement trajectory of the moving member, and corresponds to the position where the moving direction of the pin member reciprocating the guide portion changes direction A gaming machine G2 comprising a divided area which is formed and at least the height of which is lowered.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the support member is formed in a rib shape extending along the movement trajectory of the moving member, so resistance is suppressed and the moving member is smoothed. Can be moved to In this case, the support member is provided with a divided area in which at least the height is lowered at a position where the direction of movement of the pin member that reciprocates the guide portion is changed. The movable range can be secured. Therefore, when the pin member changes the moving direction and the behavior of the moving member becomes unstable, it is possible to avoid that the movement of the moving member (rotation around the first axis) is inhibited by the support member. Thus, the moving member can be moved smoothly.

  In the gaming machine G2, the support member has a plurality of rows formed along the movement trajectory of the movable member, and the parting region is formed on the support member at a position most distant from the first axis of the plurality of rows of support members. A game machine G3 characterized in that it is formed.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the supporting members are formed in a plurality of rows along the movement trajectory of the moving member and are most separated from the first axis of the plurality of rows of supporting members. Since the dividing area is formed in the support member at the position, the dividing area can be passed to the tip end side (the opposite side to the first axis) of the moving member. Therefore, the action by the divided area can be more effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine G3, the support member adjacent to the support member at a position farthest from the first axis of the support members of the plurality of examples has an inclined region whose height is changed along the extending direction, A game machine G4 characterized in that the inclined area is formed at a position corresponding to the divided area.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the height of the supporting member adjacent to the supporting member at a position farthest from the first axis among the plurality of supporting members is the extending direction Since the sloped area is changed along the sloped area and the sloped area is formed at a position corresponding to the divided area, when the movement area is stabilized using the divided area, the inclined area is moved By passing through, it is possible to facilitate early recovery of the displacement on the tip side of the moving member by utilizing the inclination of the inclined area.

  In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body rotating about a first axis and a rotational position detection sensor detecting a rotational position of the rotating body, the rotating body stands on an end face in a direction along the first axial direction. An annular member in the axial direction provided and an intermittent portion formed by cutting out a part of the annular member, the annular member being a detected portion to be detected by the rotational position detection sensor Game machine H1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a rotating body that rotates about a first axis, a detection target that protrudes radially outward from an outer peripheral surface of the rotating body, and a rotation that detects the detection target There is a gaming machine provided with a position detection sensor, and detecting the rotational position of the rotating body based on the detection of the detected portion by the rotational position detection sensor (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307197). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the detected portion protrudes outward in the radial direction, it is necessary to secure the moving space of the detected portion along the outer peripheral side of the rotating body, and the space required for the arrangement. It was bulky.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the annular member in the axial direction viewed from the axial direction end face of the rotating body is the detected portion to be detected by the rotational position detection sensor. As compared with the case where the projection projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body, the movement space to be secured can be suppressed, and the space required for the arrangement can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, while reducing the space required for the arrangement, detection of the rotational position of the rotating body is enabled, and the rigidity of the rotating body can be enhanced by the annular member.

  In the gaming machine H1, a gaming machine H2 characterized in that the intermittent portion is formed in two or more places in the circumferential direction, and the circumferential lengths thereof are different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, two or more intermittent portions having different circumferential lengths are formed, so that two or more rotational positions of the rotating body can be detected.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, only the front end side of the annular member in the standing direction is cut away, and the intermittent portion is formed with the base side remaining.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, since the base side of the annular member is left, the rigidity of the rotating body can be secured by that amount.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the rotating body includes an insertion hole through which the first shaft is inserted, and a retaining means is attached to the tip of the first shaft inserted into the insertion hole. Thus, the gaming machine H4 is mounted on the first shaft, and the annular member is disposed on an axial end surface of the rotating body opposite to the retaining means. .

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the annular member is disposed on the end face in the axial direction opposite to the retaining means of the rotating body. Assemblability can be improved. That is, by disposing the rotational position detection sensor on the base side of the first axis, detection by the rotational position detection sensor is possible only by the operation of inserting the rotating body into the first axis from the side where the annular member is formed. It is possible to assemble the rotating body while forming a proper state.

  A gaming machine J1 characterized in that in any one of gaming machines A1 to A17, B1, C1, D1, E1, and F1 to F3, G1, G2, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine J2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A17, B1, C1, D1, E1, and F1 to F3, G1, G2, and H1 to H3. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A17, B1, C1, D1, E1 and F1 to F3, G1, G2 and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A game machine J3 that features. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a rotary body rotated about a first axis, a pin member which protrudes from the rotary body and is eccentrically positioned on the first axis, and a guide portion for guiding the pin member And a driving unit for applying a driving force to the rotating body, wherein the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the driving force of the driving unit. There is a gaming machine in which the pin member is reciprocated in the guide portion and the movable body is rotated about the second axis (for example, JP-A-2004-350919).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the movement of the moving member becomes unstable at the position where the pin member which reciprocates the guide moves, and it is difficult to smoothly rotate the moving member. The
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and a gaming machine capable of smoothly rotating a moving member at a position where a pin member reciprocating the guide portion turns. Intended to be provided.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 comprises a rotating body rotated about a first axis, and a pin member which is protruded from the rotating body and eccentrically located on the first axis. And a moving member having a guide portion for guiding the pin member and rotating about the second axis, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the rotating body, wherein the rotation by the driving force of the driving means When the body is rotated about the first axis, the pin member is reciprocally moved in the guide portion, and the movable body is rotated about the second axis, and the movement of the movable member is performed. A supporting member is provided extending along a locus to support the moving member, and at a position where the moving direction of the pin member reciprocating the guide portion changes direction, the supporting amount of the moving member by the supporting member is reduced. Ru.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the support member is formed in a rib shape extending along a movement trajectory of the moving member, and the guide portion is provided. It comprises a divided area which is formed corresponding to the position where the direction of movement of the reciprocating pin member is turned and at least its height is reduced.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the support member has a plurality of rows formed along the movement trajectory of the moving member, and the first row of the plurality of rows of support members The parting area is formed on the support member at a position farthest from one axis.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, since the amount of support of the moving member by the supporting member is reduced at the position where the moving direction of the pin member changes direction, the moving member is moved smoothly (centering on the first axis Can be rotated). That is, when the pin member changes the direction of movement, the behavior of the moving member becomes unstable. When this behavior becomes unstable, the amount of support of the support member is reduced. The movable range of the support member can be secured, and the movement of the movable member (rotation around the first axis) can be prevented from being hindered by the support member. Thus, the moving member can be moved smoothly.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the supporting member is formed in a rib shape extending along the movement trajectory of the moving member. The movement member can be moved smoothly by suppressing the resistance. In this case, the support member is provided with a divided area in which at least the height is lowered at a position where the direction of movement of the pin member that reciprocates the guide portion is changed. The movable range can be secured. Therefore, when the pin member changes the moving direction and the behavior of the moving member becomes unstable, it is possible to avoid that the movement of the moving member (rotation around the first axis) is inhibited by the support member. Thus, the moving member can be moved smoothly.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the supporting member has a plurality of rows formed along the movement locus of the moving member, and the supporting members of the plurality of rows Since the divided area is formed in the support member at a position farthest from the first axis of the above, the divided area can be passed to the tip end side (the side opposite to the first axis) of the moving member. Therefore, the action by the divided area can be more effectively exhibited.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
400 1st unit (movable unit)
410 first case (base member)
460 1st effect member (moving member)
461 base (connection part)
463 Extension part (middle part)
465 rack part (driven part)
465c Rack gear (gear)
470 1st drive motor (drive means)
480 Pinion gear (gear)
500 Second unit (movable unit)
510 Second case (base member)
530 Second cover member (one side member or other side member)
532 Back control rib (one side rib or the other side rib)
540 Support member (other side member or one side member)
542 Front restraint rib (other side rib or one side rib)
560 Second effect member (moving member)
600 Third unit (movable unit)
610 third case (base member)
660 3rd effect member (moving member)
670 3rd drive motor (drive means)
700 4th unit (movable unit)
710 fourth case (base member, case body)
715 Fourth outer rib (support member)
717R Right support shaft (1st axis, 2nd axis)
717L Left support shaft (1st axis, 2nd axis)
718 Gear shaft (1st shaft, 2nd shaft)
760 4th effect member (moving member)
760R right effect member (first member or second member)
760L Left effect member (second member or first member)
790R right gear member (rotary body)
790L Left gear member (Rotary body)
793 annular rib (annular member)
793a Intermittent part R Rotational position detection sensor

Claims (3)

A rotating body rotated about a first axis, a pin member projecting from the rotating body and located eccentrically to the first axis, and a guide for guiding the pin member and having a second axis And a driving unit for applying a driving force to the rotating body, and the rotating body is rotated about the first axis by the driving force of the driving unit, thereby the pin In the gaming machine, the member is reciprocated on the guide portion, and the movable body is rotated about the second axis,
A supporting member is provided extending along the movement trajectory of the moving member to support the moving member, and at a position where the moving direction of the pin member that reciprocates the guide portion changes direction of the moving member by the supporting member A gaming machine characterized in that the amount of support is reduced.   The support member is formed in a rib shape extending along the movement trajectory of the moving member, and is formed corresponding to a position at which the moving direction of the pin member reciprocating the guide portion changes direction. The gaming machine according to gaming machine 1, comprising a divided area in which at least the height is lowered.   The supporting member is formed in a plurality of rows along the movement trajectory of the moving member, and the divided area is formed in the supporting member at a position farthest from the first axis of the plurality of rows of supporting members. The gaming machine according to claim 2, characterized in that:

Images